Skip to main content

Full text of "Physical chemistry for beginners"

See other formats


UC-NRLF 


LIBRARY 

OF    THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 
Class 


PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY 


FOR 


BEGINNERS 


BY 

DR.   CH.   VAN   DEVENTER 


WITH  AN  INTRODUCTION 

BY 

PROF.   J.    H.  VAN'T   HOFF 


AUTHORIZED  AMERICAN  EDITION  FROM  THE  SECOND  GERMAN  EDITION 

TRANSLATED  BY 

BERTRAM   B.  BOLTWOOD,   PH.D. 

Formerly  Instructor  in  Physical  Chemistry  in  the  Sheffield  Scientific  School 
,of  Yale  University 


SECOND   EDITION,  RE  VISED 
FIRST    THOUSAND 


NEW    YORK 

JOHN    WILEY    &    SONS 

LONDON  :    CHAPMAN    &    HALL,    LIMITED 

1904 


OF   THE 

UNIV::*SITY    J 


GENERAL 


Copyright,  1899, 

BY 

BERTRAM   B.   BOLTWOOD. 


ROBERT   DRUMMOND,    PRINTER,    NEW  YORK. 


INTRODUCTION 


IN  delivering  in  Amsterdam  my  lectures  on  Chem- 
istry, chiefly  to  students  of  medicine,  I  was  confronted 
by  a  double  task:  on  the  one  hand  to  present  the 
systematic  side  of  the  subject  with  relative  complete- 
ness and  entirely  on  an  experimental  basis,  on  the 
other  hand  to  show  how  the  fundamental  laws  of 
chemistry  might  be  deduced  from  these  facts.  The 
scheme  of  presentation  which  I  adopted  therefore 
comprised  two  topics:  the  first  included  the  considera- 
tion of  certain  elements,  the  second  was  confined  to 
a  general  summary. 

I  began  with  "  Matter  from  a  Qualitative  Stand- 
point,'* water,  oxygen,  hydrogen,  air,  and  nitrogen 
supplying  me  with  the  necessary  material;  then  came 
the  concepts,  compound,  mixture,  element,  and  the 
whole  table  of  atoms;  the  halogens  furnished  the  ma- 
terial for  the  second  topic,  in  the  course  of  which  the 
laws  governing  weight  were  introduced,  and  in  this 
manner  I  continued  until  the  vacation. 

This  was  all  very  well,  but  nevertheless  a  book  was 
required.  For  the  systematic  side  I  indeed  recom- 

iii 


IV 

mended  many,  but  for  the  theoretical  side  this  was  diffi- 
cult, until  as  a  welcome  assistance  this  little  book  by 
Van  Deventer  appeared.  The  author  had  attended 
my  lectures,  had  worked  under  me  in  the  laboratory,  had 
pursued  his  studies  still  further,  and  had  devoted  con- 
siderable time  to  the  instruction  of  medical  students. 

But  from  a  broader  point  of  view  it  is  indeed  a 
commendable  task  which  the  author  has  set  himself 
in  presenting  in  his  own  way  the  subject  of  physical 
or  general  chemistry  to  the  students  of  medicine, 
pharmacy  and  chemistry,  without  placing  too  great 
stress  on  the  physical  and  mathematical  side  of  the 
subject.  A  realm  of  science  is  concerned  which  in 
recent  years  has  proved  extremely  fruitful,  a  journal 
especially  devoted  to  physical  chemistry  having  just 
appeared  in  the  New  World,  and  from  the  corre- 
sponding journal  of  the  Old  World  a  good  word  from 
the  pen  of  an  eminent  scientist  will  be  quoted: 

"  The  prospective  development  of  all  sciences  in 
which  chemistry  plays  a  part,  from  geology  to 
physiology,  including  the  whole  of  chemical  tech- 
nology, can  be  more  readily  appreciated  at  the  present 
moment  than  perhaps  at  any  time  previously;  they 
will  all  undergo  a  fundamental  reform  through  the 
application  of  the  facts  recently  acquired  through  the 
agency  of  general  chemistry. ' ' 

J.  H.  VAN'T   HOFF. 

AMSTERDAM,  1897. 


AUTHOR'S  PREFACE  TO  GERMAN 
EDITION. 


IN  the  book  at  hand  the  author  has  endeavorecj  to 
collect  the  most  important  results  of  physical  chemistry 
in  such  a  manner  that  this  important  branch  of  modern 
chemistry  may  be  accessible  to  those  who  have  not 
made  an  exhaustive  study  of  physics  and  mathematics. 
The  requirements  of  students  of  medicine  and  phar- 
macy, as  well  as  of  elementary  chemistry,  have  been 
especially  considered  in  the  preparation  of  this  work. 

The  author  desires  to  express  his  sincere  thanks  to 
Dr.  Ernst  Cohen,  who  has  prepared  the  present  edition. 

CH.  M.  VAN  DEVENTER. 

BATAVIA,  June,  1901. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

DEFINITIONS. 
SECTION  PAC8 

1.  Chemistry I 

2.  Substance  or  matter,  element,  compound,  mixture,  crys- 

tals        I 

CHAPTER   II. 

FUNDAMENTAL  LAWS   OF  COMPOSITION. 

3.  The  law  of  constant  weight 4 

4.  Law  of  constant  composition 4 

5.  Law  of  multiple  proportions »  5 

6.  Law  of  constant  proportions 12 

7.  Law  of  equivalence  of  the  elements 13 

8.  Explanation  of  the  fundamental  laws 14 

9.  Law  of  Gay  Lussac  on  the  combination  of  elements  in  a 

gaseous  state 15 

CHAPTER  III. 

THE  PROPERTIES  OF  GASES. 

10.  Law  of  Boyle-Gay-Lussac 17 

n.  Gay-Lussac's    law    on  the  reactions  of  substances  in  a 

gaseous  condition 1 8 

12.  Gas  density 18 

13.  Some  methods  for  determining  the  gas  density 20 

14.  Abnormal  gas  densities 24 

vii 


viii 


PACK 

15.  On  the  nature  of  gaseous  bodies.     Molecules.     Atoms  ..  25 

16.  Avogadro's  hypothesis 26 

17.  Deductions  from  Avogadro's  hypothesis  : 

a.   Molecular  weight 26 

18.  b.   Atomic  weight.     Theoretical  and  experimental  defini- 

tion    28 

19.  c.    Number  of  atoms  in  the  molecule 30 

20.  d.   Number  of  atoms  in  the  molecules  of  the  elements. ...  32 

21.  e.    Deduction  of  the  molecular  formula  of  a  substance. ...  33 

22.  f.  The  valence  of  the  elements > 43 

23.  g.  Theoretical  demonstration  of  the  law  of  Gay-Lussac 

on  the  reactions  of  gaseous  bodies. 46 

CHAPTER    IV. 

THERMOCHEMISTRY. 

24.  Law  of  Dulong  and  Petit 48 

25.  Joule's  Law 50 

26.  Application  of  the  two  laws  to  the  determination  of  the 

atomic  weight   c 52 

27.  Heat  of  formation  and  heat  of  decomposition  of  a  com- 

pound.     Heat  of  reaction.      Endothermic  and  exother- 
mic reactions 54 

28.  Calorimetric  methods 56 

29.  Law  of  Lavoisier  and  Laplace 58 

30.  Law  of  Hess 58 

31.  Applications  of  the  law  of  Hess 59 

32.  Some  general  results  of  investigations  on  heat  of  forma- 

tion    66 

33.  Principle  of  greatest  work 81 

34.  Application  of  the  principle  of  greatest  work . .  83 

35.  Causes  for  the  starting  of  reactions 91 

36.  Criticism  of  the  principle  of  greatest  work 92 

37.  Endothermic  reactions  which  take  place  at  normal  tem- 

peratures   92 

38.  Mass  action 93 

39.  Dissociation..... 94 

40.  The  principle  of  variable  equilibrium 94 

41.  Chemical  equilibrium 97 

42.  Graphic  representation 98 


IX 


43-   Proof  of  the  existence  of  equilibrium  between  simulta- 
neous reactions TOO 

4 \.   The  three  kinds  of  chemical  equilibrium 101 

45.  Effect  of  temperature  on  equilibrium 102 

46.  Effect  of  pressure  on  equilibrium. 104 

47.  Effect  of  chemical  mass  on  equilibrium 106 

48.  Analogy  between  changes  in  physical  and  chemical  state  107 

49.  Berthollet's  law 108 

50.  Watt's  principle no 

51.  Watt's  principle  applied  to  matter  at  normal  temperature  115 

CHAPTER   V. 

SOLUTIONS. 

52.  Definitions 121 

53.  General  laws  of  solubility 122 

54.  Solubility  of  hydrates 122 

55.  Osmosis 123 

56.  Osmotic  phenomena  in  dilute  solutions 124 

57.  Experimental  basis 126 

58.  Exceptions 129 

CHAPTER   VI. 

ELECTROCHEMISTRY. 

59.  Definitions 131 

60.  Electrolytic,  dissociation 131 

61.  Faraday's  law 132 

62.  Conductivity  of  organic  and  inorganic  compounds 133 

63.  Some  laws  governing  electrolytic  dissociation 134 

64.  Verification  of  the  laws  of  electrolytic  dissociation 137 

CHAPTER  VII. 

PHENOMENA   OF   LIGHT. 

65.  Colored  flames 140 

66.  The  spectroscope 140 

67.  Absorption  phenomena 142 


FACE 

68.  Photochemical  action 144 

69.  Photochemical  extinction 145 

70.  Development  and  fixing  of  a  photographic  picture 146 

71.  Color  photography 147 


CHAPTER   VIII. 

THE    PERIODIC   SYSTEM. 

72.  Definition ' 149 

73.  Graphic  representation 150 

74.  Tabular  representation 151 

75.  Large  and  small  periods 151 

76.  Variation  of  physical  properties  in  periods 152 

77.  Application  of  the  periodic  system 154 

78.  Closing  remarks  on  the  periodic  system 157 

Table  of  the  Elements  arranged  according  to  the 
Natural  System. 


CHAPTER    I. 
DEFINITIONS. 

§  i.  Chemistry  is  the  science  which  treats  of  the 
conditions  under  which  one  substance  of  itself,  or  sev- 
eral substances  by  reciprocal  action,  give  rise  to  the 
appearance  of  new  substances.  The  province  of 
chemistry  also  includes  the  description  of  the  sub- 
stances, as  well  as  of  the  phenomena  which  accompany 
the  formation  of  new  substances. 

§  2.  Substance  or  Matter  is  the  name  given  in 
chemistry  to  every  homogeneous  body,  without  refer- 
ence to  its  form  or  state  of  aggregation. 

An  element  is  a  substance  which  cannot  be  decom- 
posed into  other  substances.* 

A  compound  is  a  substance  composed  of  two  or 
more  elements;  of  the  properties  of  the  elements,  the 
weight  only  is  retained  in  the  properties  of  the  com- 
pound. 

A  mixture  is  a  combination  of  substances  in  which 
the  essential  properties  of  the  substances  are  retained. 

REMARK  i.  The  substances  which  are  now  called  ele- 
ments are  relative  elements — i.e.,  non-decomposable  by  any 

*  A  table  of  elements  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  this  book. 


known  forces.  For  the  introduction  of  the  conception  rel- 
ative element  we  are  indebted  to  Lavoisier. 

REMARK  2.  It  is  often  difficult  to  plainly  distinguish 
the  limits  between  compounds  and  mixtures.  The  differ- 
ence may  be  most  clearly  stated  as  follows  :  in  a  compound 
the  elements  are  indeed  present  as  such,  but  are  so  influ- 
enced by  one  another  that  the  properties  of  the  whole, 
with  the  exception  of  the  weight,  are  not  equal  to  the  sum 
of  the  properties  of  the  components  ;  also  the  behavior  of 
the  compound  towards  other  substances  is  in  no  way  sim- 
ilar to  that  of  the  free  elements.  In  a  mixture,  however, 
the  mingled  components  may  be  considered  as  side  by  side, 
each  part  retaining  its  characteristic  properties,  these  prop- 
erties being  so  little  influenced  by  one  another  that  the 
components  act  upon  other  substances  in  the  same  manner 
that  they  would  act  if  entirely  separate. 

REMARK  3.  Solid  bodies  often  form  from  liquids  and 
produce  solid  figures  enclosed  by  planes.  Bodies  of  this 
sort  are  called  crystals.  They  show  certain  regularities 
upon  which  the  systems  of  the  crystals  depend.  They  are 
so  divided  into  six  groups  that  every  crystalline  chemical 
compound  is  included  in  one  of  these  groups. 

Crystals  grow  by  the  addition  of  new  layers  of  material 
to  the  faces  already  existing.  As  a  result  of  this  process 
the  forms  of  crystals  are  not  materially  influenced  by  their 
dimensions,  but  are  dependent  upon  the  angles  between 
their  faces;  since,  by  the  parallel  extension  of  the  plane 
faces  of  the  crystals,  these  angles  remain  unaltered.  It  is 
always  possible,  by  shifting  the  faces  of  a  crystal,  to  reduce 
it  to  an  ideal  form  in  which  a  certain  symmetry  can  be 
detected.  The  degree  of  symmetry  is  dependent  upon  the 
number  of  symmetry  planes. 

The  position  of  the  crystal  faces  is  often  expressed  by 
their  intersections  with  certain  a^es  taken  in  the  crystal  ; 
these  axes  being  chosen  with  direct  reference  to  the  planes 
of  symmetry. 


Each  group  of  crystal  forms  in  which  an  equal  number 
of  symmetry  planes  can  be  detected  is  called  a  crystal  sys- 
tem. There  are  six  of  these  :  with  nine,  with  seven,  with 
five,  with  three,  with  one,  and  with  no  symmetry  planes. 

Solid  substances  which  are  not  crystalline  are  called 
amorphous. 

Some  compounds  can,  however,  crystallize  in  more 
than  one  crystal  system  ;  such  cases  are  usually  dependent 
on  the  temperature. 


CHAPTER  II. 
FUNDAMENTAL  LAWS  OF  COMPOSITION. 

§  3.  The  Law  of  Constant  Weight  (Lavoisier's 
Law).  A  system  of  matter  on  changing  into  another 
system  does  not  alter  in  mass  (weight). 

Differently  formulated.  On  chemical  action  no 
mass  is  either  lost  or  gained. — The  weight  of  a  sys- 
tem of  matter  is  independent  of  the  chemical  form. — 
On  chemical  action  the  total  weight  of  matter  before 
and  after  the  reaction  is  the  same. 

REMARK  i.  This  principle  was  dogmatically  employed 
by  Lavoisier  as  a  fundamental  doctrine  in  experimental 
chemical  investigation.  But  only  after  his  death,  and 
chiefly  as  a  result  of  his  efforts,  was  it  introduced  as  a 
fundamental  law  of  all  chemical  teaching. 

REMARK  2.  From  the  law  of  Lavoisier,  in  connection 
with  the  conception  element,  it  follows  directly  that  not 
only  the  entire  system,  by  a  change  in  the  chemical  form, 
does  not  alter  in  weight,  but  also  each  element  before  and 
after  the  reaction  is  present  in  exactly  the  same  quantity. 

§  4.  The  Law  of  Constant  Composition.    The 

composition    of  a  compound   is    independent   of  the 
method  by  which  it  is  prepared. 

Differently  formulated.  A  compound,  character- 
ized by  a  definite  number  of  physical  and  chemical 

4 


properties,  has  an  invariable  qualitative  and  quantita- 
tive composition. 

Example.  Alcohol  is  obtained  by  the  fermenta- 
tion of  sugar  in  water.  The  same  substance  is  formed 
also  from  the  oxidation  of  ethane,  by  the  action  of 
ethyl  iodide  on  an  aqueous  solution  of  potassium  hy- 
droxide, and  by  other  reactions.  The  product,  which 
has  a  specific  gravity  of  0.792  and  a  boiling-point  of 
78°,  is  always  of  the  same  composition :  46  grams  of 
the  substance  contains  24  grams  of  carbon,  6  grams 
of  hydrogen,  and  16  grams  of  oxygen. 

REMARK.  This  law  was  introduced  by  Proust  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  present  century. 

§  5.  The  Law  of  Multiple  Proportions.  When 
two  elements  occur  together  in  more  than  one  com- 
pound, then  the  different  quantities  of  the  one  element 
which  are  associated  with  the  same  quantity  of  the 
other  element,  stand  with  respect  to  their  weights  in 
proportions  which  can  be  expressed  by  rational  num- 
bers. 

Differently  formulated.  A  fixed  quantity  of  one 
element  so  combines  with  different  quantities  of  another 
element  that  the  ratio  between  the  latter  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  rational  numbers. 

Example.  In  the  compounds  methane,  ethane, 
ethylene,  acetylene,  benzene  there  are  to  every  12 
grams  of  carbon  respectively  4,  3,  2,  I,  and  I  grams 
of  hydrogen.  In  the  substances  ammonia,  ammonium 
chloride,  nitric  acid,  methyl-amine,  amido-benzene, 
nitrotoluene,  hydrazoic  acid  there  are  to  every  14 
grams  of  nitrogen  respectively  3,  4,  I,  5,  7,  7,  and 
J  grams  of  hydrogen. 


REMARK  i.     This  law  was  discovered  by  Dalton  in  1802. 

The  law  of  constant  weight  permits,  following  Lavoisier's 
example,  of  the  expression  of  chemical  reactions  by  means 
of  equations,  in  which  the  substances  in  the  initial  state 
stand  on  the  left  of  the  equality  sign,  and  the  products  of 
the  reaction  on  the  right. 

Thus  :  Sodium  hydroxide  -j-  Hydrochloric  acid  =  So- 
dium chloride  +  Water. 

REMARK  2.  Since  each  separate  substance  has  a  fixed 
composition,  a  substance  is  often  named  from  its  composi- 
tion. Substances  are  also  denoted  by  a  symbol,  a  formula, 
which  expresses  their  qualitative  and  quantitative  composi- 
tion. These  formulas  consist  of  letters  which  represent  the 
element  and  a  characteristic  number  belonging  to  it ;  coeffi- 
cients at  the  rear  of  the  letters  denote  how  many  times  this 
characteristic  number  shall  be  taken.  How  these  numbers, 
the  so-called  atomic  weights,  are  determined  will  be  ex- 
plained later. 

The  substance  potassium  chlonde  is  represented  by  the 
formula  KC1  ;  it  contains  for  every  39  grams  of  potassium 
35.5  grams  of  chlorine.  HNO9  is  nitric  acid,  a  substance 
which  in  63  grams  contains  i  gram  of  hydrogen,  14  grams 
of  nitrogen,  and  48  grains  of  oxygen. 

When  the  formulas — frequently  multiplied  by  a  coeffi- 
cient— of  the  substances  which  enter  into  a  reaction  are 
assembled  in  an  equation,  an  accurate  idea  is  obtained  of 
the  substances  and  the  relative  quantities  in  which  they 
enter  into  the  reaction,  and  an  exact  expression  for  the  qual- 
itative and  quantitative  course  of  the  reaction  is  secured. 

The  equation 

KNO,  +  HaS04  =  KHS04  +  HNO, 

states  that  by  the  action  of  sulphuric  acid  on  potassium 
nitiate  each  101  grams  of  potassium  nitrate  requires  for  its 
decomposition  98  grams  of  sulphuric  acid,  and  as  a  result 


of  this  process  136  grams  of  hydrogen  potassium  sulphate 
and  63  grams  of  nitric  acid  are  formed. 
From  the  equation 

2H,  +  O,  =  2HaO 

it  is  seen  that  4  grams  of  hydrogen  combine  with  32  grams 
of  oxygen  to  form  36  grams  of  water. 

When  the  substances  exist  in  the  form  of  gas  or  vapor, 
the  formulae  have  a  special  significance  which  will  be  ex- 
plained later  (compare  §  17,  Rem.  3  and  §  23). 

REMARK  3.  Berzelius  was  the  first  to  represent  elements 
by  letters,  and  compounds  by  combinations  of  letters,  and 
it  was  he  who  gave  a  quantitative  significance  to  the  latter. 

The  characteristic  numbers  now  associated  with  the  let- 
ters by  all  chemists  were  first  used  about  thirty  years  ago. 

REMARK  4.  A  chemical  equation,  according  to  the  law 
of  Lavoisier  and  the  definition  of  an  element,  shall  have  the 
same  elements,  and  of  each  element  the  same  quantity  on 
both  sides  of  the  equality  sign.  If  the  formulas  of  the  sub- 
stances in  the  initial  and  final  state  are  known,  correct 
results  are  not  always  attained  by  writing  the  formulas  on 
both  sides  of  the  equality  sign.  Hydrogen  and  oxygen 
react  to  form  water,  but  the  equation 

Ha  +  Oa  =  HaO  * 

is  incorrect.  What  shall  be  done  in  this  case  is  quite  evi- 
dent ;  since  by  writing 

2H,  +  O,  =  2H,0 

the  equation  is  made  to  conform  with  Lavoisier's  law. 
But  it  is  not  always  so  simple  to  determine  the  correct 

*  Hydrogen  and  oxygen,  as  will  be  explained  later,  are  not 
denoted  by  H  and  O,  but  by  H3  and  Oa. 


8 

coefficients,  and  in  some  cases  careful  consideration  is  re- 
quired. Since  the  coefficients  determine  the  conformity 
of  the  equation  with  Lavoisier's  law,  the  law  prescribing 
only  the  equality  of  two  quantities  but  not  their  absolute 
values,  it  is  evident  that  only  the  relative  values  of  the 
coefficients  must  be  determined. 

For  explaining  the  method  a  special  case  will  be  con- 
sidered. 

When  potassium  manganate  (K2MnO4)  is  added  to  a 
considerable  volume  of  water,  potassium  permanganate 
(KMnO4),  manganese  dioxide  (MnO,),  and  potassium  hy- 
droxide (KOH)  are  produced.  The  equation  expressing 
this  reaction  must  have  the  following  form  : 


/KaMnO4  -f  ?HSO  =*KMnO4  +  jMnO,  +  sKOH. 

From  the  definition  of  an  element  and  Lavoisier's  law 
the  following  equations  must  be  true  : 

/Ka  =  (*  +  s)K  or  2/ =  #  +  *...  (a) 

^Mn  =  (x  -f~  y)Mn  or  ^>  =  x  -{-  y.  (^) 

/O4-{-^O  =  •^O4-|->yOi  -f-  sO  or  •  ^p-\-q  =  4^-j~2y~{~^'  •  (f) 

^H,  =  j?H  or           2q  =  z (d) 

As  is  evident,  there  are  five  unknown  quantities  and  only 
four  equations.  But  since,  as  already  stated,  the  relation 
only  of  the  coefficients  is  required,  the  number  of  equations 
is  sufficient,  and  it  is  only  necessary  to  choose  some  rational 
value  for  one  of  the  unknown  quantities.  If  on  carrying 
out  the  calculation  the  values  found  for  other  unknown 
quantities  are  fractions,  the  whole  must  be  multiplied  by 
some  suitable  factor  in  order  to  reduce  the  coefficients  to 
whole  numbers.  Irrational  quantities  must  not  appear  in  the 
results ;  the  equations  must  therefore  be  of  the  first  degree 
and  the  coefficients  of  the  unknown  quantities  must  be 
rational. 

If  we  now  take  z  =  i,  then  from  (d)  .     .     .     .  q  =  4. 


By  the  combination  of  (<r)  and  (b)  we  obtain 

—  q  =  2y  —  z     and    y  —  \. 

From  (b)  and  (a)  p=  z  —  y,  that  is/  =  f. 
Finally  :  from  (a)  f  =  *  -f-  i,  which  gives  x  =  J. 
If  now  all  the  results  of  the  calculation  be  multiplied  by 
4,  and  be  inserted  in  the  equation  of  the  reaction,  we  obtain 

3K,MnO4  +  2H,O  =  2KMnO4  +  MnO,  +  4KOH. 

More  equations  than  unknown  quantities  cannot  be  ob- 
tained ;  but  the  case  is  not  excluded  where  the  number  of 
equations  may  differ  by  more  than  one  from  the  number  of 
unknown  quantities.  For  example,  the  reaction  by  which 
potassium  chlorate,  on  heating,  forms  oxygen,  potassium 
perchlorate,  and  potassium  chloride: 

/KC1O3  =  ?KC1  +  rKC!O4  -f  sO,. 


This  gives  for  2  independent  relations  4  unknown  quantities, 
with  which  more  than  one  system  of  values  can  be  de- 
termined. Experience  has  shown  that  the  temperature  de- 
termines which  system  makes  its  appearance.  The  equa- 
tions, however,  are  of  the  first  degree  and  their  unknown 
quantities  have  whole  numbers  for  coefficients,  so  that  in 
this  case,  also,  only  rational  values  can  be  obtained  for  the 
unknown  quantities. 

//  is  therefore  always  possible  to  represent  a  chemical  reac- 
tion by  an  equation  in  which  the  coefficients  are  whole  num- 
bers. 

An  important  application  of  this  rule  will  be  given  later 
in  §  23. 

REMARK  5.  The  fact  must  not  be  overlooked  that  the 
quantities  of  the  substances  which  appear  in  the  equation 
are  only  the  portions  which  actually  take  part  in  the  trans- 
formation. In  the  equation 

2K,MnO4  +  2H2O  =  2KMnO4  -f  4KOH  +  MnO, 


IO 


but  a  relatively  small  quantity  of  water  appears.  It  must 
not  be  assumed,  however,  that  this  small  quantity  of  water 
is  sufficient  to  cause  the  transformation  ;  since  the  equation 
merely  states  that  in  the  reaction  referred  to — and  this 
occurs  only  in  the  presence  of  much  water — the  given  quan- 
tity of  water  has  changed  into  another  form. 

REMARK  6.  The  methods  which  have  been  given  for  the 
determination  of  the  proper  coefficients  usually  lead  to  the 
desired  results.  Nevertheless  it  is  often  simpler  to  refer  the 
chemical  change  to  an  imaginary  reaction,  the  coefficients  of 
which  can  be  immediately  determined  ;  when  the  latter  are 
known  it  is  not  difficult  to  write  the  actual  equation  with  the 
proper  coefficients. 

The  action  of  water  on  potassium  manganate  will  be  again 
considered.  KaMnO4  is  a  derivative  of  MnOs ;  with  water 
it  gives  KMnO4,  a  derivative  of  MnaO7,  and  the  peroxide 
MnO,.  The  imaginary  change  of  the  oxide  is  the  forma- 
tion of  MnaO7  and  MnO3  from  MnOs. 

For  this  imaginary  reaction  the  equation  can  be  imme- 
diately found : 

3Mn03  =  Mn,07  +  MnOa. 

3MnO3  requires  3K3MnO4  ;  MnaO7  assumes  2KMnO4  ;  4K 
remains,  appearing  as  4KOH,  and  therefore  4H,O  is  re- 
quired. 

Finally  :  The  action  may  be  divided  into  a  series  of 
phases  ;  each  phase  can  be  represented  by  a  simple  reaction, 
the  equation  for  each  phase  written,  and  then  it  is  only 
necessary  to  combine  the  separate  phases  in  order  to  arrive 
at  an  equation  which  represents  the  initial  and  final  states  of 
the  reaction. 

It  is  known,  for  example,  that  by  the  action  of  potassium 
bichromate  on  alcohol  there  are  formed  aldehyde,  potassium 
sulphate,  and  chromic  sulphate.  It  is  accordingly  assumed  : 
that  sulphuric  acid  and  potassium  bichromate  give  potas- 
sium sulphate  and  chromic  acid  ;  that  chromic  acid  splits 


II 

up  into  water  and  anhydride  ;  that  the  anhydride  oxidizes 
alcohol  with  the  formation  of  aldehyde  and  water,  and 
is  itself  reduced  to  chromium  trioxide.  These  changes  are 
expressed  in  the  following  equations  : 

K,CraO,  -f  H,S04  +  HS0  =  KaSO4  +  2H,CrO4; 
2HaCrO4  =  2HaO  -f  2CrO,; 

2Cr09  =  CraO,  +  3O; 
3CaH.O  +  30  =  3CaH40  +  3H,0; 
Cr,08  +-  3HaS04  =  Cra(SO)4  -f  3H,O. 

By  addition,  similar  members  being  cancelled  on  both  sides, 
we  obtain 

K3CraO,  +  4HaS04  -f  3CaH60 

=  KaS04  +  Cr,(S04)3  +  3CaH40  +  7HaO. 

The  disappearance — in  the  above  addition — of  so  many 
substances  has  not  only  a  mathematical  but  also  a  chemical 
significance.  The  division  of  the  whole  change  into  phases 
is  a  purely  mental  operation,  and  the  substances  which  occur 
in  this  operation,  but  do  not  actually  come  into  existence, 
are  not  found  in  the  final  equation.  The  members  of  the 
equation  which  disappear  are  all  formulas  of  substances,  the 
existence  of  which  is  assumed  in  order  to  connect  the  equa- 
tions with  one  another,  and  only  those  substances  appear  in 
the  final  equation  which  can  be  identified  in  the  initial  and 
final  stages  of  the  reaction. 

Problems.  The  equations  should  be  found  which  repre- 
sent the  following  reactions: 

1.  The  action  of  dilute  nitric  acid  (HNO3)  on  copper 
(Cu)  causes   the  formation   of  copper  nitrate  (Cu(NO,)a), 
nitric  oxide  (NO),  and  water  (H,O). 

2.  The  action  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  (H,SO4)  on 
copper  (Cu)  gives  copper  sulphata  (CuSO4),  sulphur  dioxide 
(SO,),  and  water  (H,O), 


12 

3.  Oxalic  acid  (C3H3O4)  in  the  presence  of  dilute  sul- 
phuric acid  (H,SO4)  is  oxidized  by  potassium  permanganate 
(KMnOj  to  carbon  dioxide  (CO3)  and  water  (H3O),   while 
potassium     sulphate    (K3SO4)    and     manganese    sulphate 
(MnSOj  are  formed  as  secondary  products. 

4.  Potassium  bichromate  (K3Cr3O7)  on  heating  with  con- 
centrated hydrochloric  acid  (HC1)  is  decomposed,  with  the 
formation  of  chromic  chloride  (Cr3Cl6),  potassium  chloride 
(KCl),and  water  (H3O). 

5.  Potassium  iodide  (KI)  in  neutral  or  alkaline  solutions 
is  oxidized  by  potassium  permanganate  (KMnO4)  to  potas- 
sium iodate  (KIO,)  with  the  formation  of  MnO,  and  KOH. 

§  6.   Law  of  Constant  Proportions.   The  elements 
combine  with  one  another  in  fixed  relations  by  weight 
and  these  relations  are  often  retained  when  the  same 
elements  appear  together  in  combination   with  other 
elements. 

Example.  Ethylene  is  composed  of  6  parts 
carbon  and  i  part  hydrogen.  Carbon  and  hydrogen 
occur  in  the  same  relation  by  weight  in  all  other 
hydrocarbon  compounds  of  the  ethylene  series,  also  in 
all  fatty-acid,  aldehyde,  and  dihalogen  compounds  of 
ethylene ;  the  latter  containing  in  addition  both  oxy- 
gen and  halogen. 

200  grams  of  mercury  combine  with  32  grams  sul- 
phur, forming  mercuric  sulphide.  The  same  quantities 
are  found  in  mercuric  sulphate  combined  with  64  grams 
of  oxygen. 

39  parts  of  potassium  by  combination  with  35.5 
parts  chlorine  form  potassium  chloride.  In  potassium 
chlorate  the  same  quantity  of  potassium  is  found  com- 
bined with  the  same  quantity  of  chlorine  and  48  parts 
of  oxygen. 


13 

In  connection  with  this  law  the  following  rules  will 
be  given : 

The  same  relation  by  weight  existing  between  two 
elements,  combined  with  a  third,  is  often  observed 
when  the  two  elements  combine  with  another  element. 

Example.  48  parts  oxygen  and  14  parts  nitro- 
gen, form  a  compound  with  108  parts  silver:  48  parts 
oxygen  and  14  parts  nitrogen  are  also  found  in  com- 
bination with  31.75  parts  copper,  with  103  parts  lead, 
with  100  parts  mercury,  with  32.5  parts  zinc,  with 
68.5  parts  barium,  with  20  parts  calcium,  with  39 
parts  potassium,  with  23  parts  sodium,  with  I  part 
hydrogen. 

32  parts  sulphur  and  64  parts  oxygen  combine  with 
216  parts  silver;  an  equal  quantity  of  sulphur  and 
oxgen  is  found  combined  with  206  parts  lead,  63.5 
parts  copper,  200  parts  mercury,  65  parts  zinc,  137 
parts  barium,  40  parts  calcium,  78  parts  sodium,  and 
2  parts  hydrogen. 

§  7.  Law  of  Equivalence  of  the  Elements.  In 
many  cases  the  elements  can  enter  into  combination 
with  one  another  according  to  fixed  relations  by  weight. 
The  number  of  grams  of  an  element  which  can  replace 
one  gram  of  hydrogen  is  called  the  equivalent  of  the 
element. 

Example.  I  gram  of  hydrogen  combines  with  8 
grams  of  oxygen.  But  the  hydrogen  in  combination 
with  8  grams  of  oxygen  can  be  replaced  by  23  grams 
sodium,  39  grams  potassium,  20  grams  calcium,  68.5 
grams  barium,  9  grams  aluminium,  32.5  grams  zinc, 
31.75  grams  copper,  103  grams  lead,  IOO  grams 
mercury. 


14 

REMARK.  The  equivalence  of  an  element  can  therefore 
be  determined  from  the  quantity  of  it  which  combines  with 
8  grams  of  oxygen,  or  with  such  quantity  of  another  element 
as  forms  a  saturated  compound  with  i  gram  of  hydrogen. 

§  8.   Explanation    of   the     Fundamental    Laws. 

Only  the  first  three  of  the  six  laws  given  are  indepen- 
dent laws,  stating  something  which  is  in  itself  unre- 
stricted. The  law  of  constant  proportion  and  the  law 
of  equivalence  can  be  considered  as  special  cases  of  the 
law  of  multiple  proportion.  Nevertheless  the  formula- 
tion of  these  special  cases  is  necessary,  since  they  make 
clear  the  existence  of  important  phenomena:  and 
without  this  formulation  the  important  special  cases 
would  perhaps  be  overlooked. 

In  order  to  express  the  fact  "  that  an  element  takes 
the  place  of  another  in  a  compound,"  the  word  substi- 
tute is  often  employed.  It  is  said  "  that  copper 
chloride  is  hydrochloric  acid  in  which  the  hydrogen  has 
been  substituted  by  copper."  Relative  to  this  it  is 
to  be  remarked  that  the  substitution  is  not  always  di- 
rectly practicable.  Although  it  is  possible  without 
difficulty  to  substitute  the  copper  in  copper  sulphate 
by  zinc,  by  introducing  a  rod  of  zinc  in  the  solution  of 
the  copper  sulphate,  the  reverse  substitution  does  not 
take  place  so  easily  and  is  attained  only  by  a  relatively 
complicated  chemical  process. 

It  is  possible,  under  certain  conditions,  Jo  effect 
the  substitution  with  quantities  of  the  elements  other 
than  the  so-called  equivalents.  For  example,  a  chlo- 
rine compound  may  be  obtained  from  hydrochloric  acid 
which  in  place  of  I  gram  of  hydrogen  contains, not  31.75 
grams  copper,  but  double  that  quantity.  Especially 


in  organic  chemistry  this  circumstance  has  made  the 
determination  of  the  equivalents  very  difficult, — since 
here  the  question  :  which  substitution  quantity  shall  be 
called  the  equivalent  ?  often  arose, — and  the  complex 
substitutions  increased  the  difficulty  of  representing  the 
substances  by  universally  valid  formulae  at  a  time 
when  the  significance  of  equivalence  was  attributed  to 
the  letters  representing  the  elements.  The  subse- 
quently developed  atomic  theory  saves  us  the  trouble 
of  deciding  on  the  proper  equivalent,  and  furnishes  us 
with  a  method  of  formulation  which  is  not  affected  by 
the  uncertainty  of  the  notation  previously  used.  It 
is  true  that  atomic  weight  and  the  equivalence  do  bear 
a  certain  relation  to  one  another,  but  in  each  stage  of 
experimental  chemistry  there  is  for  each  element  a 
fixed  atomic  weight,  while  the  significance  of  the  cor- 
rect equivalent  may  always  vary. 

§  9.  Gay-Lussac's  Law  on  the  Combination  of  Ele- 
ments in  a  Gaseous  State.  When  a  gaseous  com- 
pound is  formed  from  gaseous  elements,  the  volume  of 
a  fixed  quantity  of  the  compound  stands  to  the  vol- 
umes of  the  combining  elements  in  a  ratio  which  can 
be  expressed  by  whole  numbers. 

Example.  Two  liters  of  gaseous  hydrogen  chlo- 
ride result  from  the  combination  of  one  liter  of  chlo- 
rine and  one  liter  of  hydrogen.  Two  liters  of  water- 
vapor  can  be  decomposed  into  two  liters  of  hydrogen 
and  one  liter  of  oxygen,  and  can  be  formed  from  the 
same  quantities.  Two  liters  of  ammonia-gas  give 
on  decomposition  three  liters  of  hydrogen  and  one 
liter  of  nitrogen. 

REMARK  i.     This  law  is  a  special  case  of  a  more  general 


i6 


law  discovered  by  Gay  Lussac  in  1808,  which  will  be  given 
later  in  §  n. 

REMARK  2.  When  substances  in  a  gaseous  condition  are 
compared  with  respect  to  their  volumes,  it  is  always  assumed 
that  the  pressure  and  temperature  are  the  same  in  all  cases. 


CHAPTER  III. 
THE  PROPERTIES  OF  GASES.   . 

§  10.  Law  of  Boyle  -  Gay  -  Lussac.  Many  sub- 
stances, by  heating  or  by  a  decrease  of  pressure,  are 
transformed  into  gaseous  bodies ;  many  others  are  gas- 
eous at  normal  temperature  and  normal  pressure,  i.e., 
at  15°  C.  and  760  millimeters  of  mercury.  For  most 
gaseous  bodies  there  exist  certain  limits,  within  which 
for  a  certain  quantity  of  substance  the  relation  between 
pressure,  volume,  and  temperature  is  governed  with 
great  exactitude  by  the  following  equation : 

PV          PV 

= 


In  this  formula  V  is  the  volume  of -a  certain  quan- 
tity of  the  substance  at  the  absolute  temperature  T, 
and  P  the  corresponding  pressure. 

Example.  I  gram  of  hydrogen  at  o°  C.  and 
760  mm  occupies  a  volume  of  11.16  liters;  I  gram  of 
chlorine  a  volume  of  0.324  liters.  'Z' 

*  /=  temperature  in  centigrade  degrees. 
C"=  a  constant, 

17 


i8 

REMARK  i.  This  law  is  a  combination  of  the  law  of  Boyle, 

PV=A (T  constant), 

with  the  law  of  Gay-Lussac  (also  called  law  of  Charles), 

T 
VT  =   V^ (P  constant), 

or 

Vt    =  P.  (  i -r--^— ).     .     .     .     (P  constant). 


REMARK  2.  The  gases  which  conform  to  the  above  law 
are  called  ideal  gases.  Vapors  can  be  considered  as  ideal 
gases  when  they  are  at  temperatures  relatively  far  above 
their  condensation-points.  If  gases  show  a  considerable 
deviation  in  their  behavior  from  the  Boyle-Gay-Lussac  law, 
their  closer  investigation  belongs  to  the  field  of  physics. 
In  this  book  only  the  case  of  the  so-called  abnormal  gas 
densities  will  be  considered.  (Compare  §  14.) 

§  ii.  Gay-Lussac's  Law  on  the  Reactions  of  Sub- 
stances in  a  Gaseous  Condition.  When  gaseous 
substances  appear  in  a  reaction,  their  volumes  stand 
to  one  another  in  most  simple  relations,  which  may 
be  expressed  by  whole  numbers. 

Example.  Two  liters  of  hydrogen  combine  with 
one  liter  of  oxygen  to  form  two  liters  of  water-vapor 
(see  Remark  to  §  12). — One  liter  of  chlorine  combines 
with  one  liter  of  hydrogen  to  form  two  liters  of  hydro- 
gen chloride. — One  liter  of  methane  with  two  liters 
of  oxygen  gives  one  liter  of  carbon  dioxide  and  two 
liters  of  water-vapor. —  I  gram  of  diamond  combines 
with  1.9  liters  of  oxygen  to  form  1.9  liters  of  carbon 
dioxide. 

REMARK.     This  law  was  deduced  by  Gay  Lussac  from 


19 

investigations  carried  out  in  1808  andfwas  proved  by  Hum- 
boldt.     It  includes  the  law  given  in  §  9. 

§  12.  Gas  Density.  In  chemistry  the  density  of 
a  gas  is  compared  with  that  of  air  or,  more  generally. 
with  that  of  hydrogen  at  the  same  temperature  and 
pressure.  The  relation  between  the  weights  of  equal 
volumes  of  a  gas  and  hydrogen  under  the  same  condi- 
tions shall,  according  to  the  law  of  Boyle-Gay-Lussac, 
be  the  same  for  all  temperatures  and  pressures.  If  the 
volume  occupied  by  a  definite  weight  of  a  substance  in 
a  gaseous  condition  at  a  definite  temperature  and  pres- 
sure is  known,  then  the  weight  of  one  liter  of  the  gas 
under  normal  conditions  (o°  and  760  mm)  can  be  cal- 
culated by  applying  the  Boyle-Gay-Lussac  law.  This 
weight,  expressed  in  grams,  divided  by  0.0896  gram 
(the  weight  of  I  liter  of  hydrogen  at  o°  and  760  mm) 
gives  the  gas  density  of  the  substance. 

REMARK  i.  The  weight  of  a  substance  in  a  gaseous  con- 
dition at  o°  and  760  mm  is  often  only  a  mathematical 
fiction,  and  this  is  true  of  those  substances  whose  maximum 
vapor  pressure  at  o°  is  less  than  760  mm.  When  it  is  stated 
that  one  liter  of  water-vapor  at  o°  and  760  mm  has  a 
weight  of  0.8  gram,  this  is  not  an  actually  true  statement, 
since  water-vapor  at  a  temperature  of  o°  has  a  vapor  pres- 
sure of  only  4  mm.  The  weight  would,  however,  be  0.8 
gram  if  water-vapor  could  be  compressed  at  o°  without 
condensing  until  a  pressure  of  760  mm  was  reached  and 
obeyed  the  Boyle-Gay  Lussac  law  at  this  pressure.  This 
imaginary  value  is  used  since  it  allows  all  gases  and  vapors 
to  be  compared  directly  with  hydrogen,  of  which  the  weight 
of  one  liter  at  o°  and  760  mm  has  been  very  accurately  de- 
termined, and  since  by  this  comparison  the  vapor  density  of 
different  substances  may  be  readily  obtained. 


20 


REMARK  2.  The  specific  volume  of  a  gas  is  the  volume  of 
i  gram  of  the  gas,  at  o°  and  760  mm,  expressed  in  liters. 
For  hydrogen,  for  example,  this  value  is 

liters  =  11.16  liters. 


0.0896 

REMARK  3.  The  knowledge  of  the  gas  densities  is  of 
great  importance  in  chemistry,  not  only  because  this  is  a 
property  of  substances,  but  also  because  it  has  been  shown 
that  relations  exist  between  the  gas  densities  and  the 
weights  of  substances  which  take  part  in  reactions;  also 
relations  exist  between  the  vapor  densities  and  the  laws  of 
composition,  and  their  most  striking  application  is  found  in 
the  atomic  theory,  which  will  presently  be  considered. 
(See  §  14  ff.) 

§  13.  Some  Methods  for  Determining  the  Gas 
Density. — General  Principle.  In  order  to  calculate 
the  gas  density  of  any  substance — the  weight  of  I 
liter  of  hydrogen  at  o°  and  760  mm  being  accepted 
as  already  determined — there  must  be  known :  the 
weight  of  the  quantity  of  substance  taken,  its  vol- 
ume in  the  gaseous  condition,  and  the  pressure  and 
temperature  at  which  the  volume  has  been  measured. 
From  these  data  the  weight  of  I  liter  at  o°  and  760 
mm  can  be  calculated.  This  principle  is  the  founda- 
tion of  the  following  methods: 

a.  Regnauli 's  Method.     A  glass  globe,  the  capacity 
of  which    is   known,  is  weighed    first    evacuated   and 
then  filled  with  the  gas,  at  the  temperature  and  pres- 
sure of  the  surroundings.     This  method  is  especially 
suitable  for  substances  which   are   gases  at   ordinary 
temperatures,  and  gives  very  accurate  results. 

b.  Dumas  Method.     This  is  much  used  for  liquids 


which  do  not  have  a  high  boiling-point.  A  small 
quantity  of  the  liquid  to  be  examined  is  introduced 
into  a  glass  globe  of  known  weight  and  capacity ;  this 
is  then  heated  in  a  bath,  the  temperature  of  which  is 
several  degrees  above  the  boiling-point  of  the  sub- 
stance. The  liquid  boils,  the  vapor  escapes  through 
the  narrow  neck,  and  the  air  is  driven  out.  Finally 
the  globe  is  filled  with  the  vapor  at  the  temperature  of 
the  bath  and  at  the  atmospheric  pressure.  The  neck 
of  the  globe  is  sealed  by  fusion,  the  globe  is  removed 
from  the  bath  and  again  weighed. 

REMARK.  By  certain  alterations,  this  method  may  be 
used  also  for  very  high  temperatures,  the  glass  globe  being 
replaced  by  one  of  porcelain.  The  Dumas  method  has 
the  disadvantage  that  liquids  are  often  mixed  with  small 
quantities  of  substances  having  higher  boiling-points  ;  as  a 
result  the  impurities  play  an  important  part  in  the  final 
state. 

c.  Gay  Lussac  s  Method,  modified  by  Hoffmann. 
This  is  used  for  liquids  having  a  low  boiling-point.  A 
little  flask,  weighed  first  empty,  then  filled  with 
liquid,  fused  shut,  and  again  weighed,  is  introduced 
into  the  Torricellian  vacuum  of  a  graduated  barometer. 
The  latter  is  surrounded  by  a  jacket  into  which  is  led 
the  vapor  of  a  boiling  liquid.  The  substance  is  thus 
transformed  into  vapor,  the  flask  bursts,  and  the  mer- 
cury falls  in  the  tube.  The  volume  is  then  read  off 
by  the  graduations  on  the  tube;  the  pressure  of  the 
vapor  is  the  atmospheric  pressure  minus  the  column  of 
mercury  remaining  in  the  tube;  the  weight  is  already 
determined,  and  the  temperature  is  that  of  the  vapor 
in  the  jacket. 


22 


d.      Victor      Meyer  s    Method.       (Air-displacement 
Method.)     In  this  method  the  volume  of  the  vapor  is 
not    measured    directly,    but    the 
volume    of    air    displaced   by  the 
vapor  is  determined. 

A  long  glass  tube  ec,  having  an 
elongated  bulb  on  its  lower  end, 
is  provided  with  a  side  tube  d. 
The  jacket  #,  which  surrounds  the 
greater  part  of  the  tube,  contains 
a  liquid,  the  vapor  of  which  on 
boiling  heats  the  part  c  to  a  con- 
stant temperature.  The  opening 
e  is  closed  with  a  stopper,  while  d 
extends  into  a  vessel  filled  with 
water,  in  which  stands  the  gradu- 
ated tube  /,  likewise  rilled  with 
water.  The  liquid  in  a  is  heated 
to  boiling;  the  vapor  surrounds 
the  bulb  c\  the  air  in  the  latter 
expands  and  escapes  through  d 
until  the  expansion  ceases.  The 
end  of  d  is  now  brought  under 
the  opening  of  /and,  by  remov- 
ing the  stopper,  there  is  quickly 
dropped  into  the  tube  through  e 
a  little  bottle  containing  a  known 
quantity  of  the  substance  the  gas 
density  of  which  is  to  be  deter- 
mined, and  the  stopper  is  re- 
placed immediately.  The  substance  is  now  vapor- 
ized in  the  lower  part  of  the  apparatus  and  a  volume 


23 

of  air  corresponding  to  the  volume  of  vapor  is  dis- 
placed ;  this  volume  of  air  escapes  through  the  con- 
necting tube  d  into  /.  When  the  substance  is 
completely  vaporized  the  escape  of  air-bubbles  ceases. 
Now  since  the  gas  has  displaced  an  equal  volume  of 
air,  the  volume  of  the  air  is  exactly  equal  to  the 
volume  of  the  gas  if  this  were  to  be  cooled  under 
atmospheric  pressure  to  the  temperature  of  the  room. 
The  volume  of  the  air  is  suitably  measured,  the 
pressure  and  temperature  are  noted,  and  the  former  is 
decreased  by  the  vapor  pressure  of  water  at  the  tem- 
perature of  observation.  After  the  weight,  pressure, 
temperature,  arid  volume  have  been  determined  in  this 
manner,  the  weight  of  one  liter  of  the  vapor  at  o° 
and  760  mm  can  be  readily  calculated. 

Example.  In  a  gas-density  determination  by 
Victor  Meyer's  method  0.184  gram  of  a  liquid  was 
vaporized  and  at  the  end  of  the  operation  37.5  cc 
of  moist  air  were  obtained.  The  height  of  the 
barometer  was  752  mm,  the  temperature  of  the  room 
14°  C. 

What  is  the  gas  density  of  the  substance  ? 

The  total  pressure  of  air  and  water-vapor  is  752 
mm.  But  since  the  vapor  pressure  of  water  at  14°  is 
12  mm,  the  pressure  of  the  air  must  be  equal  to  740 
mm.  At  o°  and  760  mm  the  volume  of  the  air  is 
accordingly 


740 
37-5  X  X  -  =  35  cc, 


and  this  is  equal  to  the  volume  of  0.184  gram  of  the 
vaporized  substance  at  o°  and  760  mm.    Therefore  one 


24 

liter  of  this  substance   at   o°    and    760  mm  has  the 
weight 

0.184 
1000  X  gram  =  5.3  grams. 

The  gas  density  accordingly  is '— -  =  59. 

o.Ooo,o 

REMARK  i.  When  it  is  desired  to  determine  the  gas 
density  with  only  relative  accuracy  the  Victor  Meyer 
method  is  usually  employed  ;  in  most  cases  a  relatively 
accurate  determination  of  the  gas  density  is  sufficient  for 
chemical  purposes. 

As  is  evident  from  the  description  of  this  method,  it  is 
not  necessary  to  know  the  temperature  of  the  bath,  the  only 
requirement  being  that  it  be  sufficiently  high  to  effect  the 
complete  vaporization  of  the  substance  under  investigation. 
If  the  tube  ec  is  constructed  of  suitable  material,  this 
method  can  be  used  for  very  high  temperatures. 

§  14.  Abnormal  Gas  Densities.  Most  gases  and 
vapors  are  so  constituted  that  the  volume  occupied  by 
a  given  weight  of  the  substance  can  be  measured  at 
certain  temperatures  and  pressures,  and,  after  being 
reduced  to  o°  and  760  mm,  for  the  same  substance 
always  give  the  same  value.  Each  substance  has  a 
corresponding  gas  density,  independent  of  the  tem- 
perature or  pressure  at  which  the  measurements  are 
conducted.  This  rule  holds  good  for  all  substances 
which  within  certain  limits  of  temperature  and  pres- 
sure obey  the  law  of  Boyle-Gay  Lussac. 

There  are,  however,  certain  substances,  as  nitrogen 
dioxide  and  acetic  acid,  which  behave  differently; 
their  gas  densities  are  dependent  upon  the  tempera- 


25 

tures  and  pressures  employed.  For  such  substances 
there  exists  at  low  temperatures  a  maximum  value  for 
the  gas  density,  and  at  high  temperatures  a  minimum 
value,  which  does  not  alter  on  further  increase  of  tem- 
perature. These  latter  constant  values  are  accepted 
as  the  correct  values  for  acetic  acid  and  similar  sub- 
stances. Of  certain  other  gases  the  density  is  con- 
stant for  a  considerable  range  of  temperature,  but 
decreases  at  still  higher  temperatures.  Chlorine  is 
a  gas  of  this  nature.  Especially  noteworthy  is  the 
behavior  of  sulphur,  the  gas  density  of  which  at  464° 
is  about  four  times  greater  than  at  1 100°,  and  which 
suffers  no  change  between  1100°  and  1700°. 

The  anomalies  just  mentioned  are  called  abnormal 
gas  densities.  An  explanation  of  this  behavior  will 
be  given  in  the  following.  (See  §  17,  Rem.  5.  Comp. 
also  §  21,  Rem.  3.) 

§  15.  On  the  Nature  of  Gaseous  Bodies.  Mole- 
cules. Atoms.  In  physics  and  also  in  chemistry  the 
following  conception  is  employed :  a  gas  consists  of 
a  great  number  of  very  small  particles  moving  in 
straight  lines  through  space.  Each  of  these  particles, 
called  molecules,  has  the  same  chemical  composition 
as  the  entire  mass  of  the  substance.  If  the  gas  is  a 
compound,  then  the  molecule  consists  of  hetero- 
geneous parts,  each  of  which  is  composed  of  a  single 
element.  These  parts  are  called  atoms  ;  according  to 
our  present  knowledge  of  chemical  phenomena  the 
atoms  in  a  chemical  or  physical  respect  are  not  further 
divisible.  The  molecules  of  gaseous  elements  are  also 
composed  of  atoms  which  in  this  case  are  similar  to 
one  another.  The  volume  of  the  molecules  them- 


26 


selves  is   small  in  comparison  to  the  space  in  which 
they  move. 

REMARK  i.  The  theory  of  the  constitution  of  liquids 
has  not  been  so  far  developed  as  that  of  gases.  Still  less 
work  has  been  done  on  the  molecular  theory  of  solid  sub- 
stances. 

REMARK  2.  The  existence  of  atoms  was  assumed  by 
Demokritos  as  early  as  the  fourth  century  B.C.  Modern 
chemistry  is  indebted  chiefly  to  Laurents,  whose  work  dates 
from  the  middle  of  the  present  century,  for  the  distinction 
between  the  conceptions,  atom,  molecule,  and  equivalent. 

§  1 6.  Avogadro's  Hypothesis.  In  equal  volumes 
of  different  gases  at  the  same  pressure  and  the  same 
temperature  there  is  an  equal  number  of  molecules. 

REMARK  i.  This  hypothesis  was  enunciated  by  Avogadro 
in  1811  and  by  Ampere  in  1814,  but  was  not  recognized  by 
many  chemists  as  the  foundation  of  a  system  until  the  latter 
half  of  the  present  century. 

§  17.  Deductions  from  Avogadro's  Hypothesis. 

a.  Molecular  Weight.  The  relation  by  weight  be- 
tween two  equal  volumes  of  different  gases,  under 
similar  conditions  of  temperature  and  pressure,  is  the 
relation  by  weight  between  one  molecule  of  the  one 
substance  and  one  molecule  of  the  other.  If  the 
weight  of  one  molecule  of  hydrogen  is  assumed  to  be 
2,  then  the  weight  of  one  molecule  of  other  gases  is 
equal  to  their  molecular  weight. 

The  molecular  weight  is  therefore  a  ratio,  which 
expresses  the  relation  between  the  weight  of  one 
molecule  of  a  substance  in  a  gaseous  condition  and 
the  weight  of  one  half-molecule  of  hydrogen.  The 
molecular  weight  may  also  be  denned  as  twice  the 


27 

quotient  of  the  weight  of  one  liter  of  the  substance, 
in  a  gaseous  condition  at  o°  and  760  mm,  divided  by 
0.0896  gram. 

Briefly  stated  :  The  molecular  weight  of  a  substance 
is  equal  to  twice  its  gas  density.  (Comp.  §  12.) 

REMARK  i.  The  indefinite  number  2  taken  as  the  mo- 
lecular weight  of  hydrogen  is  not  an  experimentally  deter- 
mined value,  but  is  a  conventionally  assumed  out ;  therefore 
all  molecular  weights  which  are  used  in  chemistry  are  only 
relative  numbers.  The  determination  of  the  absolute  mo- 
lecular magnitudes  belongs  to  physics  ;  chemistry  for  the 
investigation  of  its  problems  requires  only  relative  numbers. 

REMARK  2.  The  molecular  weight  of  only  those  sub- 
stances which  vaporize  without  decomposing  can  be  deter- 
mined directly.  Comp.  §  21,  Rem.  3. 

REMARK  3.  The  weight  of  one  liter  of  a  substance  in  the 
gaseous  state  can  be  determined  directly  from  the  molecu- 
lar weight  ;  it  is  equal  to  one-half  of  the  molecular  weight 
multiplied  by  0.0896  gram. 

REMARK  4.  The  molecular  quantity  of  a  substance  is  the 
number  of  grams  of  the  substance,  which  contains  the  same 
number  of  units  as  the  molecular  weight. 

Often  this  quantity  is  also  called  a  gram-molecule  of  the 
substance., 

REMARK  5.  Explanation  of  the  Existence  of  Abnormal  Gas 
Densities.  Substances  the  gas  densities  of  which  vary  with 
the  temperature  vary  also  in  molecular  weight.  This  may 
be  explained  by  assuming  that  the  structure  of  the  mole- 
cules is  more  complicated  at  a  low  temperature  than  at  a 
higher  temperature,  and  that  on  an  increase  in  temperature 
the  structure  becomes  simpler.  This  explanation  of  the 
phenomenon  is  supported  by  the  fact  that  the  specific  heats 
of  substances  with  abnormal  gas  densities  are  very  great  and 
are  variable  ;  only  a  portion  of  the  heat  added  goes  to  in- 
crease the  temperature  ;  the  rest  is  used  for  breaking  down 


28 


the  complicated  molcular  structure  into  a  more  simple  one. 

§  18. 

b.  Atomic  Weight.  Theoretical  and  Experimental 
Definition.  The  atomic  weight  of  an  element  is  the 
weight  of  one  atom  of  the  element  with  respect  to  a 
half-molecule  or  one  atom  of  hydrogen. 

REMARK  i.  An  atomic  weight  also  is  only  a  ratio,  i.e.,  a 
relative  quantity. 

REMARK  2.  In  the  table  given  in  the  back  of  this  book 
the  unit  taken  for  the  atomic  weights  is,  for  certain  reasons, 
not  the  atom  of  hydrogen,  but  is  one  sixteenth  of  the  atom 
of  oxygen.  The  value  there  given  for  the  atomic  weight  of 
hydrogen  is  accordingly  1.007.  If  all  tne  atomic  weights  in 
the  table  are  divided  through  by  1.007,  their  values  with  re- 
lation to  one  atom  of  hydrogen  are  obtained. 

The  atomic  weight  of  an  element  is  the  greatest  com- 
mon divisor  of  the  different  quantities  of  this  element 
which  are  present  in  molecular  quantities  of  its  com- 
pounds. 

Example : 

I.  Compounds  of  oxygen. 

Name.  Molec.  Quant.         Quant,  of  Oxygen. 

Oxygen 32  32 

Water 18  16 

Carbonic  oxide 28  16 

Carbon  dioxide 44  32 

Sulphur  dioxide 64  32 

Sulphur  trioxide 80  48 

Nitric  acid 63  48 

Arsenic  trioxide — ...  396  96 

Greatest  common  divisor  =  16  =  atomic  weight  of 
oxygen. 


29 

II.   Compounds  of  chlorine. 

Chlorine 71  7l 

Hydrogen  chloride 36.5  35.5 

Methyl  chloride   50.5  35-5 

Ethylene  dichloride....  99  71 

Chloroform 119.5  106.5 

Carbon  tetrachloride...  164  142 

Greatest  common  divisor  =  35.5  =  atomic  weight 
of  chlorine. 

REMARK  3.  The  existence  of  a  greatest  common  divisor 
is  in  conformity  with  the  law  of  multiple  proportion,  but  is 
not  deduced  from  it.  If  molecular  quantities  of  different 
compounds  of  the  elements  A  and  B  all  contain  equal  quan- 
tities of  A,  then  the  law  of  multiple  proportion  requires  that 
there  shall  be  a  greatest  common  divisor  for  the  correspond- 
ing quantities  of  B.  But  the  other  condition  is  not  con- 
tained in  the  law.  The  existence  of  these  greatest  common 
divisors,  which  are  the  virtual  foundations  of  the  atomic 
weights,  is  not  a  circumstance  which  can  be  assumed  from 
any  of  the  earlier  mentioned  laws,  but  is  a  fact  derived 
from  experience. 

It  is  evident  that  the  atomic  weight  of  an  element  must 
be  changed  if  a  new  compound  of  it  is  discovered,  the 
analysis  of  which  leads  to  the  finding  of  another  greatest 
common  divisor. 

REMARK  4.  Other  methods  for  the  determination  of  the 
atomic  weight  will  be  considered  later.  In  these,  however, 
the  truth  of  Avogadro's  hypothesis  is  accepted,  so  that  the 
results  obtained  by  them  in  no  way  diminish  the  value  of 
the  atomic  weights  obtained  by  the  methods  just  described. 
If  the  number  of  volatile  compounds  of  an  element  is  small, 
much  importance  cannot  be  attached  to  the  greatest  com- 
mon divisor,  and  other  methods  are  required  for  determin- 
ing and  comparing  the  atomic  weights. 


30 

REMARK  5.  To  determine  the  composition  of  molecular 
quantities  of  a  substance  it  is  not  necessary  to  analyze  these 
quantities.  The  numbers  are  calculated  from  the  percent- 
age composition  of  the  substance  and  from  the  gas  density. 

REMARK  6.  The  greatest  common  divisor  here  mentioned 
is  a  number  the  accuracy  of  which  is  dependent  upon  that 
of  the  molecular  weight  and  also  upon  that  of  the  gas  densi- 
ty. The  latter  is  indeed  not  very  great  ;  but  the  degree  of 
the  number  sought  is  determined  by  the  greatest  common 
divisor,  and  with  the  knowledge  of  this  degree  the  number 
can  be  accurately  determined,  since  choice  can  then  be 
made  from  a  great  number  of  possible  values,  all  of  which 
may  be  determined  with  great  accuracy.  If  the  analysis  of 
pure  hydrogen  chloride  shows  that  the  substance  contains 
35.46  grams  of  chlorine  to  i  gram  of  hydrogen,  and  the 
molecular  weight  is  found  to  be  36.5,  then  the  atomic  weight 
of  the  chlorine  can  only  be  either  35.46  or  a  rational  frac- 
tion of  this  number.  The  greatest  common  divisor  is,  how- 
ever, of  the  degree  35.5,  and  it  therefore  directly  follows 
that  the  accurate  atomic  weight  is  35.46. 

REMARK  7.  The  molecular  weight  determined  from  the 
gas  density  is  only  approximately  accurate.  Since  this  is 
the  case,  it  also  is  corrected  with  the  help  of  analytical  data, 
as  will  be  described  later  (comp.  §  21). 

§  19- 

c.  Number  of  Atoms  in  the  Molecule.  When  the  qual- 
itative and  quantitative  composition,  the  molecular 
quantity,  and  atomic  weights  of  the  elements  of  a 
compound  are  known,  the  number  of  atoms  in  the 
molecule  can  be  easily  determined.  This  is  done  by 
dividing  the  quantities  of  the  elements  which  are 
present  in  the  molecular  quantity  of  the  compound  by 
the  atomic  weights  of  the  corresponding  elements. 

Example.       The    molecular    quantity    of    ethyl 


31 

alcohol  is  46  grams ;  these  46  grams  contain  24  grams 
carbon,  6  grams  hydrogen,  and  16  grams  oxygen. 
The  atomic  weights  of  carbon,  hydrogen,  and  oxygen 
are,  respectively,  12,  I,  and  16.  The  ethyl-alcohol 
molecule  therefore  contains  2  atoms  of  carbon,  6 
atoms  of  hydrogen,  and  I  atom  of  oxygen. 

The  molecular  quantity  of  oxygen  is  32.  There  are 
accordingly  2  atoms  in  the  molecule. 

The  molecular  quantity  of  phosphorus  is  124,  the 
atomic  weight  is  3 1  ;  the  number  of  atoms  in  the  mole- 
cule is  therefore  4. 

REMARK.  Certain  reactions  lead  to  the  determination  of 
the  number  of  atoms  in  the  molecule,  without  involving 
the  investigation  of  the  molecular  quantity  or  the  atomic 
weights. 

One  liter  of  chlorine  and  one  liter  of  hydrogen  combine 
to  form  two  liters  of  hydrogen  chloride.  If  chlorine  and 
hydrogen  were  both  monatomic  gases,  the  total  number  of 
molecules  after  the  reaction  had  taken  place  would  be  only 
half  the  number  in  the  initial  condition;  and  accordingly — 
from  Avogadro's  hypothesis — the  volume  of  the  hydrogen 
chloride  would  be  only  half  the  entire  volume  of  the  react- 
ing gases.  If,  however,  it  be  assumed  that  chlorine  and  hy- 
drogen, as  well  as  hydrogen  chloride,  are  composed  of  dia- 
tomic molecules,  then  the  number  of  molecules  and  also  the. 
volumes  of  the  gases  will  undergo  no  alteration.  It  is  a  fact 
that  in  the  reaction  mentioned  no  contraction  in  volume 
takes  place. 

This  may  also  be  stated  as  follows  :  one  liter  of  hydro- 
gen occupies  after  the  reaction  a  volume  of  two  liters  ;  each 
molecule  has  therefore  split  up  into  two  halves. 

Similarly  to  this  may  be  viewed  the  formation  of  2  liters 
of  water-vapor  from  2  liters  of  hydrogen  and  i  liter  of 


32 

oxygen,  and  also  the  decomposition  of  2  liters  of  ammonia- 
gas  into  i  liter  of  nitrogen  and  3  liters  of  hydrogen. 

From  these  facts  it  can  be  assumed  that  hydrogen, 
chlorine,  oxygen,  and  nitrogen  are  not  monatomic,  but  are 
at  least  diatomic.  Nevertheless  such  speculation  does  not 
lead  to  positive  conclusions  ;  since  theory  and  fact  would 
also  agree  if  the  number  of  atoms  in  the  mclecule  was 
greater  than  two.  It  is  therefore  better  to  solve  the  problem 
with  the  help  of  the  molecular  quantities  and  the  atomic 
weights. 

§  20. 

d.  Number  of  Atoms  in  the  Molecules  of  the  Ele- 
ments. Many  substances  in  the  gaseous  state  are 
diatomic,  i.e.,  nitrogen,  hydrogen,  oxygen,  chlorine: 
Na,  Ha,  O,,  Cla. 

Phosphorus- vapor  at  1040°  is  P4,  at  still  higher 
temperatures  it  breaks  up  partially  into  Pa.  Sulphur- 
vapor  at  the  boiling-point  of  sulphur  is  S8,  at  higher 
temperatures  the  molecules  split  up  into  molecules  S,, 
which  are  stable  at  the  highest  temperatures.  Mon- 
atomic are:  potassium,  sodium,  zinc,  cadmium,  and 
mercury:  K,  Na,  Zn,  Cd,  Hg.*  The  gas  densities  of 
the  first  four  monatomic  elements  mentioned  are  de- 
termined at  very  high  temperatures,  and  their  atomic 
weights  are  not  deduced  from  the  molecular  quantities 
of  the  compounds,  but  are  found  in  another  way. 

The  vapor  density  of  mercury  is  100,  while  the 
molecular  quantity  is  200.  The  volatile  compounds 
of  this  element  which  have  been  investigated  all  con- 
tain 200  grams  of  this  element  in  molecular  quanti- 

*It  is  possible  that  the  recently  discovered  argon  is  to  be 
counted  among  the  monatomic  elements. 


33 

ties  of  the  compounds.  The  number  of  these  com- 
pounds is  not  large,  and  from  this  it  might  perhaps 
be  doubted  that  mercury  was  in  fact  monatomic.  But 
the  specific  heat  of  solid  mercury  also  leads  to  the 
atomic  weight  200  (comp.  §  24),  and  the  researches  of 
Kundt  on  the  velocity  of  sound  in  mercury-vapor  have 
shown  that  the  so-called  factor  of  Laplace  for  this  gas 
is  1.67:  according  to  the  kinetic  theory  of  gases,  this 
value  for  this  factor  belongs  to  a  monatomic  gas. 

§21. 

e.  Deduction  of  the  Molecular  Formula  of  a  Sub- 
stance.  The  molecular  formula  of  a  substance  ex- 
presses by  certain  symbols  its  qualitative  and  quan- 
titative composition,  as  well  as  the  number  of  atoms 
which,  when  the  substance  is  in  the  gaseous  state,  are 
present  in  the  molecule. 

These  symbols  have  already  been  used  in  this  book. 
The  elements  are  represented  by  letters,  and  each 
symbol  denotes  not  only  an  element,  but  also  its 
atomic  weight.  Furthermore,  the  formula  gives  the 
gas  density,  since  this  is  equal  to  one-half  the  sum  of 
the  weights  of  the  atoms. 

The  substance  H2SO4  for  example  contains  to  2 
grams  of  hydrogen  32  grams  of  sulphur  and  64  grams 
of  oxygen ;  its  gas  or  vapor  density  is  49. 

The  deduction  of  the  molecular  formula  from  ex- 
perimental data  will  be  illustrated  by  an  example. 

The  analysis  of  acetic  acid  has  shown  that  100  parts 
of  this  substance  contain  39.9  parts  of  carbon,  6.7 
parts  of  hydrogen,  and  53.4  parts  of  oxygen.  The 
atomic  weights  are:  C  =  12,  H  =  I,  O  =  16.  The 
value  30.5  has  been  found  for  the  vapor  density. 


34 

From  the  latter  fact  it  is  assumed  that  the  molecular 
weight  is  equal  to  about  61. 

With  the  help  of  the  atomic  weights  the  relative 
composition  is  determined  in  the  following  manner: 

The  formula  must  have  the  form  C^H^O,.  and  the 
substance  therefore  contains  \2p  parts  carbon,  q  parts 
hydrogen  and  i6r  parts  oxygen.  The  quantities 
stand  in  the  proportion  39.9  :  6.7  :  53.4,  and  the 
formula  Cao.9Ha.,OM.4  represents  the  results  of  the 

~77  TT 

analysis.  From  this  the  formulas  C3.mH6>7Os.837  and 
CHt0ffcO,,M4  are  derived.  The  latter  may  be  rounded 
off  to  CHaO. 

The  results  of  the  analysis  are  accurately  expressed 
by  the  formula  CHaO  ;  but  by  this  alone  its  correctness 
is  not  established,  since  the  formula  C^H^O^  would 
also  be  in  agreement  with  the  results  obtained.  All 
that  may  be  correctly  assumed,  therefore,  is  that  the 
substance  has  a  formula  of  the  form  C^H^O^. 

A  substance  having  this  formula  would  give  the  gas 
density  \^x.  By  experiment  the  gas  density  was 
found  to  be  30.5  ;  therefore  x  =  2  and  the  formula  of 
acetic  acid  is  C,H4Oa. 

This  example  illustrates  what  has  been  stated  in  § 
18,  Rem.  6,  namely,  that  it  is  necessary  to  determine 
the  gas  density  with  only  relative  accuracy.  A  value 
is  required  which  will  decide  by  what  factor  the  sim- 
plest formula,  in  this  case  CH2O,  is  to  be  multiplied. 

Therefore  in  order  to  obtain  the  molecular  formula 
from  the  experimental  data,  the  following  operations 
are  necessary :  the  percentage  composition  of  each  ele- 
ment is  divided  by  the  corresponding  atomic  weight ; 


35 

the  quotients  thus  obtained  are  made  into  round  num- 
bers ;  the  imaginary  gas  density  of  the  simplest  formula 
thus  obtained  is  divided  into  the  gas  density  deter- 
mined by  experiment;  the  quotient  expressed  in  round 
numbers  is  multiplied  into  the  simplest  formula. 

Problems.  An  attempt  should  be  made  to  solve 
the  following  problems : 

1.  An  organic  compound  has  the  following  compo- 
sition : 

C   =  51.9* 

H=  13*1 

0-35 

The  gas  density  is  found  to  have  the  value  22.7. 
What  is  the  molecular  formula  of  the  substance? 

2.  A  hydrocarbon  contains 

92$  of  carbon 
and  7.7$  of  hydrogen. 

The  gas  density  is  38.8.  Determine  the  molecular 
formula. 

3.  A  substance  contains  in  100  parts 

73.8  parts  carbon, 
8.7  parts  hydrogen, 
17.1  parts  nitrogen. 

The  gas  density  is  80.2.  Determine  the  molecular 
formula. 

REMARK  i.  If  the  molecular  quantity  can  be  determined 
by  another  way  than  by  the  gas  density,  it  is  likewise  pos- 
sible to  arrive  at  the  molecular  formula. 

The  molecular  formula  gives  the  gas  density  and 
the  results  of  analysis,  and  in  addition  the  number  of 


36 

atoms  of  each  element  in  the  molecule,  but  not  the 
grouping  of  the  atoms.  This  arrangement  of  the  atoms 
must  be  shown,  however,  when  two  substances  are 
different  and  yet  have  the  same  molecular  formula. 
This  condition  occurs  frequently  in  organic  chemistry 
and  is  called  isomerism.  The  representation  of  the 
arrangement  of  the  atoms  in  the  molecule  makes  it 
possible  to  express  the  behavior  of  the  substance  in 
many  reactions. 

A  formula  in  which  the  grouping  of  the  atoms  is 
shown  is  generally  called  a  constitutional  formula ;  it 
may  also  be  called  a  structural  formula;  and  while  too 
great  importance  must  not  be  attached  to  such  a  for- 
mula,— since  not  all  reactions  lead  to  the  same  con- 
clusions with  regard  to  the  grouping,  and  the  question 
often  arises  as  to  which  reaction  shall  determine  the 
constitution, — in  practical  chemistry  the  need  of  such 
formulas  is  very  great,  since  they  at  all  events  express 
many  relations  of  the  substances  to  one  another. 

Example.  Ethyl  alcohol  and  methyl  ether  are 
isomers,  the  molecular  formula  for  both  being  C2H,O. 
The  first  of  these  substances  is  attacked  by  sodium 
with  the  evolution  of  hydrogen  and  the  formation  of  a 
substance,  sodium  ethylate,  whose  composition  is  rep- 
resented by  the  formula  C2H6ONa.  Sodium  has  no 
action  on  methyl  ether.  If  to  the  alcohol  the  struc- 
tural formula  (CaH5)OH  be  given,  to  the  ether  the  for- 
mula (CH3)2O,  then  the  chemical  difference  mentioned 
as  existing  between  the  two  bodies  is  expressed,  and 
according  to  these  formulae  an  analogy  exists  between 
alcohol,  (C9H6)OH,  and  water,  HaO,  which  explains 


37 

the  action  of  sodium.  No  such  analogy  is  found  in 
the  structural  formula  (CH8)aO. 

Acetic  acid  and  methyl  formate  are  isomers  having 
the  molecular  formula  C,H4O2.  By  the  action  of 
sodium  on  acetic  acid  one  hydrogen  atom  may  be 
substituted  by  sodium ;  methyl  formate,  however, 
allows  no  such  substitution ;  on  heating  with  sodium 
it  is  decomposed  and  is  transformed  into  methyl 
alcohol  and  sodium  formate.  This  difference  in  be- 
havior towards  sodium  is  found  expressed  in  the 
formulas  C,H3O.OH  for  acetic  acid  and  HCO.O.CH, 
for  methyl  formate. 

The  separation  of  the  atoms  into  groups  is  carried 
still  further,  and  ethyl  alcohol,  for  example,  is  repre- 
sented by 

CEEH,  C  =  H, 

I  I 

C  =  H,      and  acetic  acid  by      C  =  O. 

OH  OH 

The  meaning  of  the  dashes  in  these  formulae  will  be 
explained  later  (see  §  22). 

In  the  substances  mentioned  above  it  is  sufficient  to 
show  only  the  grouping  of  the  atoms;  but  in  many 
cases  this  method  of  writing  the  formulae  is  not 
adequate  to  express  the  difference  of  the  isomers,  and 
it  is  necessary  to  determine  also  the  spacial  relations 
of  the  groups  in  the  molecule,  and  to  represent  the 
molecule  as  a  figure  of  three  dimensions,  and  not  as  a 
flat  figure,  whose  parts  lie  in  one  plane,  for  example 
a  piece  of  paper. 

With  this  point  in  view  Van't  Hoff  and  Le  Bel  have 


38 

proposed  (1877)  a  theory  which  makes  it  possible  to 
explain  many  important  cases  of  isomerism  and  to 
denote  them  by  formulae.  One  of  the  most  important 
propositions  of  this  theory  will  here  be  stated  and 
explained. 

There  are  cases  where  two  substances  have  exactly 
the  same  chemical  properties  and  are  both  represented 
by  the  same  constitutional  formula,  but  which  differ 
from  one  another  in  that  in  solution  one  of  them 
rotates  the  plane  of  polarization  of  polarized  light  to 
the  right,  the  other  to  the  left,  and  both  with  an  equal 
intensity.  These  phenomena  are  in  accord  with  the 
following  rule  :  if  in  the  constitutional  formula  for  the 
molecule  of  an  organic  compound  a  carbon  atom  — 
combined  with  four  dissimilar  atoms  or  groups  — 
appears,  then  the  compound  is  optically  active,  and 
exists  in  two  modifications,  one  of  which  rotates  the 
plane  of  polarization  just  as  far  to  the  right  as  the 
other  to  the  left. 

Example.  The  following  is  the  constitutional 
formula  of  malic  acid  : 

C03H 

HO—  C—  H 


C03H 
The  carbon  atom  of  the  alcohol  group 


HO— C— H  is 


a  so-called  asymmetric  carbon  atom ;  it  is  attached  to 
four  dissimilar  groups:  (CO,H),  H,  (OH),  and 
(CH2CO3H);  malic  acid  is  therefore  optically  active. 


39 

Tartaric  acid  has  the  constitutional  formula 
C02H 

H— C— OH 
H— C— OH* 
CO»H 


In  this  substance  there  are  therefore  two  asym- 
metric carbon  atoms;  it  is  optically  active. 

As  already  stated,  the  presence  of  an  asymmetric 
carbon  atom  requires  the  existence  of  two  active 
modifications;  there  appears,  however,  in  addition  to 
the  first  two,  still  another — an  inactive  modification — 
which  is  formed  by  the  combination  of  the  two  active 
modifications.  An  important  example  of  this  double 
molecule — which  is  ordinarily  formed  when  the  sub- 
stance is  artificially  prepared — is  racemic  acid,  which  is 
inactive,  and  results  from  the  combination  of  dextro- 
and  laevo-tartaric  acids.  An  inactive  substance  of  this 
nature  can  always  be  decomposed  into  its  active  con- 
stituents. 

There  exists  still  a  fourth  modification  of  tartaric 
acid,  in  addition  to  the  two  active  compounds  and 
racemic  acid,  which,  like  racemic  acid,  is  inactive,  but 
which  can  not  be  decomposed.  Still  this  fact  is  not  in 
contradiction  to  the  theory;  since  tartaric  acid  contains 
two  asymmetric  carbon  atoms,  both  having  exactly 
equal  functions,  the  molecule  being  thus  divided  into 
two  exactly  equal  halves.  Each  half  causes  an  exactly 
equal  rotation  of  the  plane  of  polarization,  and  there- 
fore the  two,  according  to  their  geometric  relations, 


may  both  rotate  the  plane  to  the  right,  or  both  to  the 
left,  or  each  in  an  opposite  direction. 

In  the  latter  case  a  compensation  of  rotation  occurs, 
and  a  molecule  is  obtained  which  cannot  be  decom- 
posed although  it  is  inactive. 

The  following  is  the  explanation  of  the  behavior  of 
active  substances : 

Van't  Hoff  represents  an  active  compound  by  a 
figure  of  three  dimensions.  The  asymmetric  carbon 
atom  is  located  at  the  centre  of  a  tetrahedron,  from 
which  point  four  forces  are  exerted  towards  the  apexes 
of  the  solid  angles,  and  connect  the  asymmetric  carbon 
atom  with  the  four  groups  situated  at  these  apexes. 
If  the  central  carbon  atom  is  actually  asymmetric,  then 
the  groups  at  the  apexes  of  the  figure  are  dissimi- 
lar, and  the  substance  has  the  formula  C  R,  R,  R,  R4, 
which  may  be  represented  by  the  two  following 
diagrams : 


These  two  figures  are  not  the  same ;  since  it  is  not 
possible  so  to  superpose  them  that  similar  groups  only 
will  come  together.  Further,  neither  one  of  them  pos- 
sesses a  single  symmetry  plane;  they  are  absolutely 
asymmetrical.  If,  however,  two  of  the  four  groups  are 
similar,  a  symmetry  plane  results,  and  the  two  figures 
are  then  superposable. 


41 

The  representation  of  the  molecule  as  a  tetrahedron 
makes  it  possible  to  denote  the  optical  isomerism  in 
the  formula.  The  correspondence  of  the  structure 
with  the  optical  activity  mentioned  above  is  in  so  far  in 
accord  with  the  observed  facts,  in  that  all  active  sub- 
stances have  been  found  to  contain  one  or  more  asym- 
metric carbon  atoms.  The  theory  is  further  supported 
by  the  fact  that  solid  bodies,  which  possess  the  power 
of  rotating  the  plane  of  polarization,  appear  in  the 
form  of  asymmetric  crystals. 

REMARK  2.  A  molecular  weight  exists,  strictly  speaking, 
only  for  such  substances  as  may  be  volatilized  without 
decomposition.  The  molecular  weight  is  deduced  fr^m  the 
gas  density,  or  else  is  determined  by  some  other  method — 
i.e.,  from  the  osmotic  pressure  of  solutions  (§  57,  Rem. 
4),  or  from  considerations  on  the  constitution.  If  the 
molecular  weight  is  unknown,  the  simplest  formula  which  is 
obtained  by  analysis  is  made  use  of,  and  this  formula  is 
then  nothing  more  than  an  expression  for  the  qualitative  and 
quantitative  composition. 

REMARK  3.  In  the  case  of  a  number  of  substances  whose 
molecular  weights  are  not  determined  from  the  gas  density, 
but  are  deduced  from  other  data,  the  experimentally  found 
gas  densities  do  not  correspond  with  those  calculated  from 
the  molecular  formulas.  The  molecular  formula  of  am- 
monium chloride,  for  example,  is  NH4C1.  From  this  the 
gas  density  should  be  26.75.  In  practice  a  number  equal 
to  about  one-half  of  this  value  is  actually  obtained.  This 
is  due  to  the  fact  that  ammonium  chloride  cannot  be  con- 
verted into  a  gas  without  decomposition,  but  on  volatilizing 
splits  up  into  NH9  and  HCL  One  molecule  of  ammonium 
chloride  on  vaporizing  therefore  forms  two  molecules, 
which — according  to  Avogadro's  hypothesis — occupy  a 
double  volume.  In  general  this  phenomenon  will  appear  in 


42 

the  case  of  substances  which  on  volatilizing  split  up  into 
simpler  molecules. 

If  it  is  desired  to  include  also  these  cases  under  abnormal 
gas  densities,  then  it  may  be  said  that  the  gas  density  of  a 
substance  is  abnormal  when  it  does  not  correspond  to  the 
molecular  formula.  (Comp.  14,  Rem.  5.) 

REMARK  4.  Quite  recently  it  has  been  possible  to  gain 
an  idea  of  the  size  of  the  molecules  of  liquids  from  a  theoret- 
ical inquiry  into  the  phenomena  of  capillarity.  It  has  been 
found  that  in  the  case  of  the  molecules  of  liquids  chiefly  as- 
sociation occurs — that  is,  the  molecules  of  a  liquid  are  gen- 
erally complexes  of  molecules  of  the  same  substance  in 
gaseous  form. 

Associated  are  the  liquid  molecules  of  water,  all  alcohols, 
glycols  and  organic  acids,  most  ketones,  propio-nitrile, 
nitro-ethane,  phenol,  nitric  acid,  and  sulphuric  acid. 

Non-associated,  for  example,  are  the  liquid  molecules  of 
CS9,  N,04,  SiCl4,  PCVPOCl,,  SaClQ,SOClt,  SO.C1.,  Ni(CO)4, 
C9H;8,  CC14,  C.H.I,  CaH6SH,  (CaH§)aO,  CC1.CHO, 

CH,CaHsO       CH. 
HCOOCH,,     ClCOOC,Ht,      ||  ,    ||  C6H8, 

^ — ^  x — *"  COOC2H6        COC1 

C6H6C1,  C6H,NOa,  pyridine,  quinoline. 

It  has  been  found  also  that  the  degree  of  association  is 
dependent  on  the  temperature.  In  general  on  an  increase 
of  temperature  the  size  of  the  liquid  molecule  approaches 
that  of  the  gas  molecule,  and  at  relatively  low  temperatures 
there  exists  in  the  solution  an  equilibrium  between  the  asso- 
ciated and  the  non-associated  molecules.  In  the  following 
table  the  relation  between  temperature  and  association  is 
given  for  several  substances: 

—  89°. 8  C.   +2o°C.    ioo°C.     i40°C.     2oo°C.    28o°C. 

Methyl  alcohol..  2.65       2.32       2.08       1.97        1.81        

Ethyl  alcohol..    2.02       1.65        1.39       1.27        1.09        

Water 1.64       1.41       1.29       

Acetic  acid 2.13       1.86       1.72       1.53        1.30 


43 

Sulphuric  acid  at  medium  temperatures  has  the  liquid 
molecule  (H,SO4)la;  above  130°  C.  this  breaks  up  into  sim- 
pler complexes. 

§22. 

/.  The  Valence  of  the  Elements.  The  so-called 
theory  of  valence  has  a  direct  bearing  on  Avoga- 
dro's  hypothesis.  If  an  investigation  be  made  to 
determine  how  many  atoms  of  any  one  element  will 
combine  with  one  atom  of  a  certain  other  element  to 
form  a  saturated  compound,  it  will  be  discovered  that 
the  power  of  different  elements  varies  in  this  respect ; 
this  power  is  called  the  valence  of  the  element ;  it  is 
measured  by  the  number  of  hydrogen  atoms  with 
which  one  atom  of  the  element  in  question  can  com- 
bine to  form  a  molecule. 

Of  equal  valence  or  equivalent  are  those  elements 
the  atoms  of  which  can  combine  with  a  similar  number 
of  hydrogen  atoms ;  equivalent  are  evidently  also  such 
elements  as  combine  with  one  another  to  form  a  com- 
pound, one  molecule  of  which  contains  a  single  atom 
of  both  elements. 

Univalent  are,  for  example,  chlorine,  bromine, 
iodine,  since  they  form  the  compounds  HC1,  HBr,  HI. 
Bi-  or  di-valent  are  oxygen  and  sulphur:  H2O,  H,S. 
Trivalent  are  nitrogen  and  phosphorus:  NH3,  PH8. 
Tetra-  or  quadri-valent  are  carbon  and  silicon :  CH4, 
SiH4.  Equivalent  are  chlorine,  bromine,  and  iodine; 
oxygen  and  sulphur;  nitrogen  and  phosphorus ;  carbon 
and  silicon. 

Under  certain  conditions  the  valence  may  also  be 
determined  from  the  number  of  atoms  of  other  univa- 
lent  elements  with  which  one  atom  of  the  particular 


44 

element  can  combine.  Elements  having  a  valence 
greater  than  one  cannot  in  general  be  used  for  the  de- 
termination of  the  valence,  since  in  the  case  of  such 
elements  a  mutual  compensation  of  the  valences  may 
take  place.  Further,  such  elements  often  have  a 
variable  valence,  i.e.,  the  element  appears  in  different 
compounds  with  different  valences. 

In  ferrous  chloride  (Fed,)  iron  is  bivalent,  in  ferric 
chloride  (FeCl3)  it  is  trivalent.  From  the  formulas  of 
nitrogen  dioxide  (NO3)  and  su1phur  trioxide  (SO,)  the 
valence  of  the  elements  nitrogen  and  sulphur  cannot 
be  determined  with  certainty. 

If  the  theory  of  valence  was  a  logically  deduced 
and  sharply  defined  conception,  it  would  be  possible 
to  obtain  a  priori  a  knowledge  of  the  valence  of  an 
element  from  the  formulas  of  its  compounds.  In  prac- 
tice, however,  the  application  of  the  theory  is  very 
much  affected  by  the  exigence  of  variable  valences 
and  unsaturated  compounds.  Also,  it  is  not  in  general 
the  rule  that  the  highest  valence  of  the  element  ap- 
pears in  its  most  stable  compound.  MnCl4  is  less 
stable  than  MnCl,,  while  ferrous  compounds,  on  the 
contrary,  are  readily  oxidized  to  ferric  compounds. 
Only  in  the  cases  of  the  saturated  compounds  of  C,  O, 
and  H  can  it  be  in  general  assumed  that  these  ele- 
ments are  tetra-,  di-,  and  uni-valent  respectively,  and 
this  fact  alone  makes  it  possible  to  determine  the  con- 
stitution of  a  saturated  organic  compound  from  its 
molecular  formula. 

The  molecular  formula  C2H6O,  for  example,  can  be- 
long to  only  two  isomeric  substances.  The  carbon  and 
the  oxygen  possess  together  ten  valences,  and  of  these 


45 

ten  valences  six  only  are  required  to  satisfy  the  six 
univalent  H  atoms.  If  six  of  the  valences  of  carbon 
are  saturated  by  hydrogen,  there  remain  only  two  more, 
which  may  be  used  by  the  oxygen,  and  this  gives  the 
formula  H,C.O.CH3,  which  is  the  formula  of  methyl 
oxide. 

But  if  one  of  the  valences  of  oxygen  is  satisfied  by 
hydrogen  (and  in  this  case  the  oxygen  cannot  be  com- 
bined with  two  hydrogens),  then  the  other  valence 
must  serve  to  connect  the  oxygen  to  the  carbon.  This 
latter  element  then  uses  five  of  its  eight  valences  for 
hydrogen,  one  for  oxygen,  and  the  remaining  two 
compensate  one  another,  resulting  in  the  formula 
HO.HaC.CH3,  the  formula  of  ethyl  alcohol. 

Problems,  i.  Determine  the  constitutional  formu- 
las of  the  saturated  compounds  the  molecular  formu- 
las for  which  are  C,H8O. 

2.  Determine  the  constitutional  formulas  of  the  sub- 
stances having  the  molecular  formula  CaH4Oa,  noting 
that  in  each  of  these  compounds   one  oxygen  atom  is 
attached  directly  to  carbon. 

3.  Determine  the  constitutional  formulas  of  the  sub- 
stances with  the  molecular  formula  C3HflO3,  it  being 
understood    that  all    of   these    contain    the    carboxyl 
group  OC.OH. 

The  valences,  also  called  affinity  units,  are  usually 
represented  by  dashes  which  extend  from  the  symbols 
representing  the  atoms.  Methyl  oxide  may  be  repre- 
sented thus; 

H\  /H 

H-C-0— C-H  , 
H/  \H 


46 

and  ethyl  alcohol  thus : 

/H 
C-H 

\H 

/H 
C— H 

\0— H. 

In  the  case  of  unsaturated  carbon  derivatives  (by 
this  expression  it  is  meant  that  the  valences  of  the 
carbon  atoms  are  not  saturated),  their  state  is  denoted 
by  connecting  the  carbon  atoms  by  two  or  by  three 
dashes. 


For  example,  ethylene 


r/H 

L\H  C— H 

;  acetylene  ||| 
r/H  C— H 

\H 


These  relations,  however,  must  not  be  confounded 
with  forces ;  they  denote  nothing  more  than  certain 
unsaturated  states,  such  as  appear  in  the  cases  of 
ethylene  and  acetylene.  Also  the  expressions  double 
and  triple  bonds  never  imply  the  actual  existence  of 
forces,  but  signify  merely  a  certain  state  of  saturation. 

The  tetravalence  of  carbon  is  the  basis  of  the  stereo- 
chemical  theory  of  Van't  Hoff  and  Le  Bel.  The 
manner  in  which  the  unsaturated  compounds  are 
represented  in  this  theory  cannot  here  be  further 
considered. 

§23. 

g.  Theoretical  Demonstration  of  the  Law  of  Gay- 
Lussac  on  the  Reactions  of  Gaseous  Bodies.  In  §  5, 
Rem.  4,  it  was  shown  how  the  coefficients  of  a 


47 

chemical  equation  may  be  determined.  It  was  evi- 
dent that  entirely  rational  values  can  always  be  ob- 
tained for  the  coefficients,  and  that  every  chemical 
equation  has  the  form 

pAB  +  qCD  +  .  .  .  =  rAD  +  sBC  +  .  .  ., 

in  which  /,  q,  r,  s  .  .  .  are  whole  numbers. 

Now  if  gaseous  substances  are  represented  in  the 
equation,  it  follows — since  according  to  Avogadro's 
hypothesis  each  molecule  occupies  one  volume — that 
the  volumes  of  these  substances  are  to  one  another  as 
their  respective  formula  coefficients;  and,  since  the  lat- 
ter are  rational  numbers,  the  volumes  stand  to  one 
another  in  ratios  which  may  be  expressed  by  whole 
numbers. 

Problems.  I .  One  liter  of  methane,  CH^  with  the 
required  volume  of  oxygen,  is  burned  completely  to 
carbon  dioxide  and  water.  What  is  the  volume  of  the 
oxygen  and  of  each  of  the  products  of  the  combustion? 

2.  Ten  grams  of  ethyl  alcohol  are  burned  in  air. 
What  is  the  volume  of  the  air  required  and  what  is 
the  volume  of  each  of  the  products  of  combustion? 
(Note.  Air  contains  one-Wh  cf  oxygen  by  volume.) 


CHAPTER  IV. 


THERMOCHEMISTRY. 

§  24.  Law  of  Dulong  and  Petit.  The  product  of 
the  atomic  weight  and  the  specific  heat  is  the  same  for 
all  elements  in  a  solid  state ;  it  is  equal  to  about  6.4. 

REMARK  i.  This  law  was  discovered  in  1818.  It  may 
also  be  expressed  as  follows  :  The  atomic  heat  of  all  solid 
elements  is  a  nearly  constant  quantity. 

REMARK  2.  The  deviation  from  the  value  6.4  is  so  great 
for  certain  elements,  namely,  for  C,  Si,  B,  and  Be,  that 
these  cannot  be  included  under  the  law  of  Dulong  and 
Petit.  However,  the  atomic  heats  of  these  elements  ap- 
proach the  normal  value  if  these  be  measured  at  high  tem- 
peratures. 

At  ordinary  temperatures  : 


Element. 

At.  Wt. 

Spec.  Heat. 

Atomic  Heat. 

9.1 

o  408 

37 

II 

O.2^8 

2  6 

12 

O  12 

I  44 

28.1 

O  1  7O 

4.77 

At  higher  temperatures  : 


Element. 

At.  Wt. 

Spec.  Heat. 

Atomic  Heat. 

Q.I 

o.  58 

5.28 

II 

O.  5 

c  .  e 

12 

O.45Q 

e  .  c 

Silicon  at   2^2°  C 

28.1 

o.  203 

c  .7 

48 


49 


TABLE    OF    THE    ELEMENTS 

WHICH    CORRESPOND    WITH    THE    LAW    OF    DULONG   AND    PETIT. 


Element. 

Atomic  Weigh 
(in  round 
numbers). 

Specific  Heat. 

Product  or  Atomic 
Heat. 

Lithium            •     •  •  • 

7 

o  0408 

6  6 

Sodium       .            ... 

27. 

O    2Q74 

6  76 

Magnesium  ...    •  -  - 

24   4 

O    24QQ 

6  oo 

Aluminium  

27 

o  .  214 

5  80 

Phosphor  us  (yellow) 
Sulphur  (rhomb.)... 
Potassium  

31 
32 

7Q 

O.I74-O.  IgO 
0.1776 

o  165  5 

5-40-5.87 
5-70 

6  47 

Calcium     

4O 

o  169—0  172 

6  74—6  O 

Scandium  

44. 

O.  T  57 

6  7 

Chromium  

52 

o  1216 

6  "32 

Manganese  

cc 

o  1217 

6  69 

Iron   

^6 

o  1138 

6  77 

Cobalt  

cq 

o  1067 

6  •*«; 

Nickel         

CQ 

O    JOQ2 

6  44. 

CoDoer. 

6-3  6 

O.OG7—  O   OQ5 

5Q—  6 

Zinc  

65    4 

O.  OQ56 

6  26 

7° 

O    O7Q 

5c^ 

Arsenic    

75 

o.  0814 

6  ii 

70 

o  0746 

5Q 

Bromine  .... 

80 

o  0847 

6  74 

Zirconium  

9° 

o  0660 

5Q4 

Molybdenum  

96 

IO2 

0.0722 

0.06  I  I 

6.92 
6  2T 

IO3 

0.058 

5  08 

Palladium  
Silver  

106 

108      - 

0.0593 

O.O57O 

6.28 
6  15 

Cadmium  
Indium  

112 

113.5 

0.0567 

O,O565—O  O574 

6.36 

6  42—6  57 

Tin  

118 

0.0562 

6  64 

Antimony  
Tellurium 

1  20 

125 

0.0508 
O   O474 

6.II 

127 

o  0541 

"V4 

6  86 

138.5 

O.O448 

6  20 

Cerium   

140 

0.0448 

6   27 

Tungsten  .  .  . 

184 

O.  O774 

V.4  1 

6   15 

Iridium  

197 

o  0326 

6-IQ 

Platinum    .  .  . 

105 

O   O724 

6  7i 

Gold  

IQ7 

O.O724. 

V.^l 
60  -J 

Osmium.  .  .  . 

191 

o  031  1 

5Q 

Mercury   (solid)  
Thallium  
Lead  

200 

204 

2O7 

0.0319 
0.0336 
O   O7I4 

6.38 

6.86 

6  4.O 

Bismuth  

208 

o  0308 

6  4O 

Thorium    .... 

233 

o  0276 

6  41 

239 

O.O277 

6  65 

It  is  to  be  noted  also  that  the  specific  heats  of  the  allo- 
tropic  modifications  of  a  solid  element  are  different. 

§  25.  Joule's  Law.  An  element  in  a  solid  com- 
pound has  the  same  atomic  heat  as  in  the  solid,  free 
condition. 

REMARK  i.  This  law  was  enunciated  in  1844.  It  may 
also  be  stated  in  the  following  manner  :  The  molecular  heat 
of  a  compound  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  atomic  heats  of 
the  elements  of  which  it  is  composed.  Elements  which  are 
exceptions  to  the  law  of  Dulong  and  Petit  show  similar 
deviations  in  the  cases  of  their  compounds.  The  law  of 
Joule  makes  it  possible  to  determine,  with  reasonable  accu- 
racy, the  atomic  heats  of  such  elements  as  cannot  be  exam- 
ined in  the  free  state.  By  subtracting  the  atomic  heat  of 
silver  from  the  molecular  heat  of  silver  chloride  the  atomic 
heat  of  solid  chlorine  is  found  to  be  from  6  to  6.4. 

In  addition,  the  following  values  have  been  determined 
from  the  molecular  heats  of  compounds  : 


Element. 

Atomic  Weight. 

Atomic   Heat. 

H   dro  en 

I 
I 
16 
14 
19 
35-5 

2-3 
5-9 
4 
6.4? 

6.4 

Hydrogen  (from  palladium-hydrogen) 
Oxygen  .  .  «  •  r  

The  law  of  Joule  is  also  employed  with  good  results  in 
the  case  of  elements  which  cannot  be  prepared  so  pure  or 
in  such  quantities  that  their  atomic  heats  can  be  directly 
determined.  Example  :  From  the  atomic  heat  of  lead  and 
the  molecular  heat  of  PbCO,  the  heat  of  the  group  CO,  is 
obtained  ;  if  this  quantity  be  subtracted  from  the  directly 
determined  molecular  heats  of  BaCO,,  SrCO,,  and  CaCO,, 
the  results  obtained  are  the  atomic  heats  of  Ba,  Sr,  and  Ca. 


In  this    way  the   atomic    heats    of    the  following  elements 
have  been  determined  : 


Element. 

Atomic  Weight. 

Atomic  Heat. 

8*.  4 

6.4 

87  «; 

6    4 

1-77 

6  4 

REMARK  2.  The  following  rule  was  mentioned  by  Neu- 
mann as  early  as  1831  :  Equivalent  quantities  of  chemically 
similar  substances  have  the  same  capacity  for  heat.  Thus, 
for  example,  the  product  of  the  specific  heat  and  the  mo- 
lecular weight  is  very  nearly  constant  in  the  case  of  calcite, 
dolomite,  magnesite,  siderite,  and  calamine. 

REMARK  3.  As  a  proof  of  the  constancy  of  the  molecular 
heat  of  analogous  compounds  the  following  table  is  given  : 


Substance. 

Specific 
Heat. 

Molecular 
Heat. 

Substance. 

Specific 
Heat. 

Molecular 
Heat. 

o  0746 

18    5 

HgCla  

0.0689 

18  7 

CoAsS  

Cu2S 

o.  1070 

O    12 

I7.8 
IQ.  I 

MgCla  
MnCla  

0.1946 
O.  142S 

18.5 
18.0 

FeAsS 

16  e. 

PbCla  

o  0664 

18  «; 

SnCU 

o  1016 

AsS 

O    IIII 

II  .9 

SrCla  

O  .  I  I  QQ 

iy  .& 
I9.O 

CoS      

c  125 

II  .4 

ZnCl2  

0.1362 

18.6 

Ff»S 

H^S 

•  *  J57 
O   O5I  2 

1  1  .y 

II    Q 

AffBr.. 

O  O73Q 

I<J      Q 

NiS 

o  1281 

ii   6 

KBr  

o  1132 

1^    «? 

PbS    

O   O5OQ 

12.2 

NaBr  (impure). 

o.  1384 

14.  q 

c_  c 

10      f\ 

ZnS 

o  1230 

12  .O 

Acl  .  . 

o  0616 

Me 

Cul  

0.0687 

H*I 

AgCl    . 

O   O9  I  I 

J-7  .  I 

Hgl    . 

O.O3Q5 

12  .Q 

CuCl    .  . 

o  i--8q 

1-1.7 

KI  

O.oSig 

13.6 

HffCl 

o  0521 

12.3 

Nal  

O.O868 

13  .0 

ICfl 

LiCl   

•  '  7  Ju 

o  '>-    r 

1  ^'  V 
12.  0 

Cu2O  

O.  Ill 

15.9 

NaCl  
Rhf*1 

o. 

12.5 

HaO  (solid)  

0.474 

8-5 

NH4C1 

O    'iT'? 

20  o 

CuO  

O    142 

ii  ^ 

H^O 

o  0518 

11    2 

BaCla 

o  0^96 

iS  6 

MgO  

O    276* 

II  .O 

CaCla     . 

o  1  642 

18.2 

MnO  

O  .  I  K  7O 

II  .1 

According  to  other  statements  0.2439. 


Substance  . 

Specific 
Heat. 

Molecular 
Heat. 

Substance. 

Specific 
Heat. 

Molecular 
Heat. 

NiO  

o  1623 

12    I 

K2SO4  

o  1901 

•J-3      T 

PbO  

o  0512 

114 

Na2SO4  

O    23  12 

•32    8 

ZnO  

0.1248 

10.  1 

(NH4)2S04  

0.350 

46.2 

A  1   O 

BaSO4  

o.  108 

oc    2 

•friars  

&  c    (~) 

0.2173 

22.3 

CaSO4  

o.  1966 

26    7 

BoOi 

0.1279 

25-3 
16  6 

CuSO4  

0.184 

29.3 

r>:   o 

*J"J.3/4 

r>R    i 

MgSO4  

0.2216 

26  6 

Ff  O 

20.3 

MnSO4  

0.182 

27    5 

cu  r\ 

r>f\     1 

PbSO4  

0.0872 

26.4. 

20-3 

SrSO4  

o.  1428 

26    2 

TO       R 

ZnSO4  

o.  174 

28 

0.159 

13-8 

SiO2  

O    IQI7 

II    5 

SnO2  
TiO2 

0.0933 
O    1  1O1 

14.0 
14  o 

CoSO4  -f7H3O. 
FeS04  +  7H2O. 

0.343 
0.346 

96.4 
96.2 

MgSO4+7H,O. 

0.407 

100.  I 

K2C03  

0.2162 

29.9 

ZnSO4  +  7H2O. 

0.347 

99-7 

NaaCO3  

0.2728 

28.9 

KNO3 

o  2^88 

Rb3C03  

0.123 

28.4 

NaNO3 

24.  i 

23.6 

BaCO3   

o.  1078 

21    2 

W  H4J\U3  

0.455 

36.4 

CaCO3 

o  2085 

2O   9 

BaN2O6 

OT  CO'? 

<JQ       g 

PbCO3 

o  0791 

21    I 

PbN2O6 

O    I  IO 

•?6  j 

SrCO3  

0.1448 

21.4 

SrN2O6  

O.lSl 

38.3 

§  26.  Application  of  the  Two  Laws  to  the  De- 
termination of  Atomic  Weight. — When  an  element 
forms  no,  or  only  a  small  number  of,  volatile  com- 
pounds, the  atomic  weight  cannot  be  determined  from 
the  gas  density.  The  knowledge  of  the  specific  heat, 
however,  leads  to  the  desired  value,  as  is  illustrated 
by  the  following  example : 

The  atomic  weight  of  platinum  is  required.  The 
correct  formula  for  the  chloride  is  not  known;  it  is 
therefore  represented  by  the  formula  Pt^Cl^.  The 
quantitative  composition  may  then  be  expressed  by 

the  formula  Pt^Cl ;   from  the  analysis  it  is  known  that 

i 
35.5    grams    of    chlorine    occur    with    48.6  grams   of 

platinum.     The  specific  heat  of  platinum  has  been  de- 


53 

termined,  and  has  been  found  to  be  0.0324;   therefore 

6.4 
the  atomic  weight  is  of  the  order =  197.5. 

The  fraction  -  shall  be  a  proportion  between  rational 

q 

numbers,  and  cannot  in  fact  be  far  from  -  It  is 

evident  that  this  fraction  is  equal  to  about  J,  and 
therefore  -  is  taken  equal  to  J.  The  formula  of  plat- 
inum chloride  would  then  be  PtCl4  and  the  atomic  weight 
of  platinum  4  X  48.6  =  194.4.  The  accuracy  of  this 
conclusion  is  not  affected  by  the  possibility  that  the 
formula  of  platinum  chloride  may  be  a  multiple  of  PtCl4. 
The  law  of  Joule  may  be  applied  in  the  following 
manner  in  order,  for  example,  to  determine  the  atomic 
weight  of  barium :  I  kilogram  of  lead  combines  with 
0.0582  kilogram  of  carbon  and  0.233  kilogram  of 
oxygen  to  form  lead  carbonate,  the  specific  heat  of 
which  is  0.080.  The  heat  capacity  of  1.2912  kilo- 
grams of  lead  carbonate  is  0.1033  calorie.'55'  The 
capacity  of  I  kilogram  of  lead  is  0.031  Cal.,  so  that 
0.0582  kilogram  of  carbon  and  0.233  kilogram  of 
oxygen  together  have  a  capacity  of  0.0723  Cal.  The 
same  quantities  of  carbon  and  oxygen,  however,  com- 
bine with  0.665  kilogram  of  barium  to  form  0.956  kilo- 
gram of  barium  carbonate.  The  heat  capacity  of  this 
quantity  of  barium  carbonate  is  o.  108  Cal.  X  0.956  = 
o.  1032  Cal.  Therefore  the  capacity  of  0.665  kilogram  of 

*  I  Cal.  denotes  a  large  calorie,  i.e.,  the  quantity  of  heat  which 
is  required  to  heat  I  kilogram  of  water  from  o°  to  i\  A  small 
calorie  is  equal  to  one  one-thousandth  of  this  value  and  is  de- 
noted by  c.  The  quantity  of  heat  equal  to  100  small  calories  is 
denoted  by  K,  In  this  book  all  values  will  be  given  in  large 
calories. 


54 

barium  isO.O3O9Cal.  and  of  I  kilogram  of  barium  0.0465 
Cal.  From  this  the  order  of  the  atomic  weight  is 

*-$—  =  138  (approx.).  In  barium  chloride  35.5  parts 
0.0405 

of  chlorine  are  combined  with  68.5  parts  of  barium. 
If  the  substance  is  given  the  formula  Bad,,  then  the 
atomic  weight  of  barium  is  137,  in  sufficiently  close 
agreement  with  the  value  138. 

§  27.  Heat  of  Formation  and  Heat  of  Decom- 
position of  a  Compound.  Heat  of  Reaction.  En- 
dothermic  and  Exothermic  Reactions.  The  heat  of 
formation  is  the  number  of  calories  which  are  set 
free  (or  absorbed)  when  the  molecular  quantity  of  a 
compound  is  formed  from  the  elements.  For  ex- 
ample, when  78  grams  of  sodium  sulphide  are  formed 
from  46  grams  of  solid  sodium  and  32  grams  of  solid 
sulphur,  and  the  products  of  the  reaction  are  brought 
back  to  the  initial  temperature  of  the  experiment, 
then  the  number  of  calories  set  free  in  the  calorimeter 
by  this  change  is  equal  to  87  calories,  and  this 
quantity  is  the  heat  of  formation  of  sodium  sulphide. 
This  fact  is  denoted  by  the  equation 

Naa,S  =  87  Cal. 

The  meaning  of  the  term  heat  of  decomposition  should 
be  evident  from  the  above. 

The  heat  of  reaction  is  the  quantity  of  heat  which  is 
withdrawn  from  molecular  quantities  of  reacting  sub- 
stances if  after  the  reaction  the  system  is  again  brought 
back  to  the  initial  temperature.  Thus  87  Cal.  is  the 
heat  of  reaction  of  the  change 

2Na  (solid)  +  S  (solid)  =  Na3S  (solid). 


55 

The  heat  of  reaction  is  represented  in  the  following 
manner: 

2Na  (solid)  +  S  (solid)  =  Na,S  (solid)  .   .   .  +  87  Cal. 

NaOH  (dissolved)  +  HC1  (dissolved) 

==  NaCl  (dissolved)  +  H,O  .  .   .   +  13. 7 Cal. 
Na  (solid)  4   HaO  (liquid) 

=  NaOH  (dissolved)  +  H  (gaseous)  .  .    .   +43. 4  Cal. 

REMARK  i.  The  state  of  aggregation  of  the  reacting  sub- 
stances must  in  most  cases  be  stated,  since  the  heat  of  re- 
action is  dependent  on  it.  Thus 

NaOH  (dissolved)  +  HC1  (dissolved) 

=  NaCl  (dissolved)  +  HaO  (liquid)  .  .  .  +  13.7  Cal., 

while 

NaOH  (dissolved)  +  HC1  (gaseous) 

=  NaCl  (dissolved)  +  H,O  (liquid)  .  '.  .  -f  31  Cal.; 

C  (diamond)  -f  Oa  (gaseous) 

—  CO2  (gaseous)  .  .  .  -f  94.3  Cal., 

C  (charcoal)  -f-  Oa  (gaseous) 

=  CO3  (gaseous)  .  .  .  +  97.6  Cal. 

The  physical  state  of  the  substance  is  generally  denoted 
by  printing  the  formulae  in  certain  styles  of  type.  In  this 
book,  however,  it  has  been  considered  preferable  to  mention 
the  physical  condition,  as  has  been  done  in  the  above 
equations. 

An  exothermic  reaction  is  one  in  which  heat  is  set 
free ;  an  endothermic  reaction  is  one  in  which,  on  the 
contrary,  heat  is  absorbed. 

The  reaction 

2  H,  (gas)  +0,  (gas)  =  H,O  (liquid)  .   .   .+  136. 8  Cal. 


56 

is  exothermic,  but 

N2  (gas)  +  3C12  (gas)  =  2NC1,  (liquid)  ...  -  77  Cal. 
is  endothermic. 

REMARK  2.  If  a  reaction  is  to  be  considered  only  from 
a  calorimetric  standpoint,  it  is  not  necessary  to  adhere 
strictly  to  the  molecular  relations.  Thus,  for  example,  it  if 
allowable  to  write  : 

2H  (gas)  +  O  (gas)  =  H2O  (liquid)   .; .  .  +  68.4  Cal. 

REMARK  3.  In  the  case  of  certain  important  reactions 
the  quantity  of  heat  evolved  is  denoted  by  a  special  name. 
Thus,  for  example,  it  is  customary  to  speak  of  the  heat  of 
neutralization. 

§  28.  Calorimetric  Methods.  To  be  suitable  for 
examination  in  a  calorimeter  reactions  must  possess 
one  important  characteristic,  namely:  they  must  pass 
from  the  initial  to  the  final  state  in  a  relatively  short 
period  of  time.  Suitable  reactions  can  be  divided  into 
two  classes:  first,  those  involving  the  formation  and 
the  reciprocal  action  of  salts,  and  the  phenomena  of 
solution  and  dilution;  and  second,  combustion  re- 
actions. 

The  mixing-calorimeter  is  a  vessel,  sometimes  of 
glass,  but  usually  of  platinum,  into  which  the  solution 
of  one  of  the  reacting  substances  is  introduced.  The 
calorimeter  is  protected  from  the  variations  in  temper- 
ature of  its  surroundings  by  an  insulating  jacket,  and 
is  brought  to  the  temperature  of  the  room.  A  sensi- 
tive thermometer  is  inserted  in  the  liquid  and  is  moved 
continually.  A  second  insulated  receptacle,  placed  near 
the  first,  contains  a  small  glass  flask,  likewise  provided 
with  a  thermometer,  and  in  this  flask  is  contained  the 


57 

second  of  the  reacting  liquids.  It  is  only  in  excep- 
tional cases  that  the  mercury  columns  of  the  thermom- 
eters are  motionless ;  but  as  soon  as  the  movement  of 
the  menisci  is  regular,  the  contents  of  the  flask  are 
poured  into  the  calorimeter,  the  whole  is  stirred 
briskly,  the  extreme  position  of  the  thermometer- 
column  is  noted,  and  the  variation  in  temperature 
from  the  extreme  position  is  observed  for  the  first  few 
minutes. 

In  order  to  carry  out  the  calculation  we  must  know: 
the  heat  capacity,  in  water  units,  of  the  liquids,  the 
calorimeter  and  the  thermometer;  the  position  of 
both  thermometers  at  the  moment  of  mixing;  the 
extreme  position  of  the  thermometer  inserted  in  the 
calorimeter ;  and  the  quantities  of  the  reacting  sub- 
stances. In  addition  to  this,  a  correction  must  be 
made  for  the  variations  in  temperature  before  and  after 
mixing. 

REMARK.  In  calorimetric  investigations  of  the  forma- 
tion and  interreaction  of  salts,  the  work  is  conducted 
with  very  dilute  solutions,  which  have  no  appreciable 
heats  of  dilution.  With  such  solutions  it  is  allowable  to 
consider  their  heat  capacity  as  equal  to  that  of  the  water 
contained  in  them.  For  determining  heats  of  dilution,  the 
solution  is  placed  in  the  calorimeter  and  the  glass  flask  is 
filled  with  water. 

The  heat  of  solution  of  a  substance  is  determined 
by  introducing  the  substance  into  the  calorimeter, 
which  in  this  case  is  filled  with  pure  water. 

The  combustion-calorimeter  consists  of  a  vessel  of 
water  containing  another  vessel  in  which  the  combus- 


58 

tion  is  conducted.  Into  this  second  vessel  the  gases 
required  for  the  combustion  are  introduced,  and  the 
arrangement  of  the  apparatus  is  such  that  the  gases 
formed  by  the  combustion,  on  escaping,  transmit  all 
of  their  heat  to  the  water  of  the  calorimeter. 

In  the  explosion  method  the  second  vessel  has  the 
form  of  a  bomb.  This  is  filled  with  compressed  oxy- 
gen and  an  explosion  of  the  contents  is  produced  with 
the  aid  of  an  electric  spark.  This  method  may  be 
used  for  both  liquid  and  gaseous  substances. 

§  29.  Law  of  Lavoisier  and  Laplace.  Every 
compound  has  a  fixed  heat  of  formation,  which  is 
equal  to  its  heat  of  decomposition. 

It  is  only  from  the  truth  of  the  first  part  of  this  law 
that  we  are  placed  in  a  position  to  speak  of  definite 
heats  of  formation.  The  truth  of  the  second  part  is  a 
deduction  from  the  law  of  the  conservation  of  energy. 

§  30.  Law  of  Hess.  The  quantity  of  heat  which 
is  evolved  on  the  transformation  of  one  chemical  sys- 
tem into  another  is  independent  of  the  intermediate 
states  through  which  the  system  passes. 

Special  case.  The  heat  of  formation  of  a  substance 
is  independent  of  its  method  of  formation. 

Second  formulation.  The  evolution  of  heat  which 
accompanies  a  certain  chemical  process  is  always  the 
same,  whether  the  process  takes  place  in  a  single  step 
or  consists  of  a  series  of  phases. 

Example  • 

K  (solid)  +  HC1  (dissolved) 

=  KC1  (dissolved)  +  H  .  .  .  +  61.8  Cal. 


59 

This  process  may  take  place  in  two  reactions: 

K  (solid)  +  «HaO* 
=  KOH  (dissolved)  +  H+(»  -  i)H3O  ...  +48.1  Cal. 

and 

KOH  (dissolved)  +  HC1  (dissolved)  j 

=  KC1  (dissolved)  +  H,O  .  .  .  +  13.7  Cal. 

The  sum  of  the  heats  evolved  in  the  last  two  reac- 
tions is  equal  to  the  heat  evolved  in  the  first. 

REMARK.  This  law  was  enunciated  by  Hess  in  1840.  It 
is  also  called  the  law  of  constant  heat  summation.  It  is  a 
special  case  of  the  law  of  the  conservation  of  energy,  and 
can,  when  so  considered,  be  formulated  as  follows  :  The 
energy  of  a  system  of  substances  is  a  function  of  its  state, 
and  not  of  the  manner  in  which  this  state  is  attained  ;  or 
also,  the  alteration  in  energy  on  the  change  of  a  system 
from  one  state  to  another  is  dependent  only  on  the  initial 
and  final  states,  not  on  the  intermediate  states  through 
which  it  passes. 

§31.  Applications  of  the  Law  of  Hess. 

a.  The  heat  evolved  in  a  reaction  is  equal  to  the  dif- 
ference between  the  heat  of  formation  of  the  products 
and  the  heat  of  formation  of  the  substances  in  the  initial 
condition. 

That  this  highly  important  law  is  to  be  considered 
as  a  deduction  from  the  law  of  Hess  is  evident  from 
the  following: 

The  given  reaction  is 

AB  +  CD  .  .  .  =  AC  +  BD  .  .  .  +  q  Cal., 

in  which  AB,  etc.,  are  compounds  of  the  elements  A, 
B,  C,  and  D.     The  left,  as  well  as  the  right,  member 

*wH3O  denotes  a  large  quantity  of  water. 


6o 

of    the    equation   represents    a    form    of    the  system 
(A+B+C  +  D). 

The  first  form  may  be  represented  by  the  reaction 


..+r  Cal., 
the  second  by 

A+B  +  C  +  D  =  AC  +  BD.  .  .  +  j  Cal. 
According  to  the  method  of  notation  employed  in  §  27, 
r  =  A,  B  +  C,  D,   and  s  =  A,  C  +  B,  D. 

If  we  now  pass  to  the  form  (AC  -f-  BD),  first  pass- 
ing from  the  elements  to  the  form  (AB  -|-  CD),  and 
then  carrying  out  a  double  decomposition  with  the 
latter,  then,  according  to  the  law  of  Hess, 

r  -j-  q  =  s    or    q  —  s  —  r, 
and  finally 

q  =  (A,  C  +  B,  D)  -  (A,  B  +  C,  D). 

REMARK.  If  the  reaction  under  consideration  involves  the 
formation  of  a  compound  from  its  elements,  then  the  heat 
of  reaction  is  the  same  as  the  heat  of  formation  of  the  com- 
pound, and  this  reaction  is  a  special  case  of  the  law  men- 
tioned. Thus  in  the  reaction 

K  (solid)  +  Cl  (gas)  =  KC1  (solid)  .  .  .  +  105.6  Cal. 

the  heat  of  reaction  105.6  Cal.  =  the  heat  of  formation  of 
KC1. 

b.  Determination  of  the  Heat  of  Formation  with  the 
Help  of  the  Above  Law.  This  law  is  of  great  im- 
portance, since  by  it  the  heats  of  formation  may  be 
determined  for  those  substances  which  are  either  not 


6i 

formed  at  all,  or  only  with  great  difficulty,  by  the 
direct  combination  of  their  elements.  If  such  a  sub- 
stance enters  into  a  reaction  which  takes  place  quickly 
and  can  be  examined  in  a  calorimeter,  and  if  the  heat 
of  formation  of  the  other  substances  which  enter  into 
the  reaction  is  known,  then  the  heat  of  formation  of 
the  substance  in  question  can  be  deduced  from  the 
heat  of  the  reaction  and  the  heat  of  formation  of  the 
other  substances. 

Example  : 

Heat  of  Formation  of  KOH.     The  following  reac- 
tion is  known : 

K  (solid)  +  H3O  (liquid)  +  Aq* 

=  KOH  (dissolved)  +  H  (gas)  +  Aq+  48.1  Cal. 

From  the  above  law 

48.1  Cal.  =  K,  O,  H,  Aq  -  H2,  O  (liquid). 
But 

2H  (gas)  +  O  (gas)  =  H,O  (liquid)  .  .  .  +  68.4  Cal. ; 
that  is:  Ha,  O  (liquid)  =  68.4  Cal. 

and  K,  O,  H,  Aq  =  116.5  Cal. 

On  the  solution  of  KOH  in  water  we  find 

KOH  +  Aq  =  KOHAq  .  .  .  +  13.3  Cal., 
which  gives 
K,  O,  H  =  K,  O,  H,  Aq  -  KOH,  Aq  =  103.2  Cal. 

*  Aq  here  denotes  much.  wa(er, 


62 


Heat  of  Formation  of  KC I.  The  direct  formation 
of  potassium  chloride  from  its  elements  cannot  be  ex- 
amined in  the  calorimeter;  the  heat  of  formation  can, 
however,  be  deduced  from  the  following  reaction, 
which  may  be  readily  carried  out  in  the  calorimeter: 

KOH  (dissolved)  +  HC1  (dissolved) 

=  KC1  (dissolved)  +  H,O  .  .  .  +  13.7  Cal. 

According  to  the  rule, 

+  13.7  Cal.  =  K,C1,  Aq  +  H,O  (liquid)  -Cl,  H,  Aq 

-  K,  O,  H,Aq. 

Of  the  quantities  appearing  in  the  equation  only  K, 
Cl,  Aq  is  unknown.  If  the  known  values  are  substi- 
tuted in  the  equation,  we  obtain 

13.7  Cal.  =  K,  Cl,  Aq  +  68.4  Cal.  —  39.3  Cal. 

-  116.5  Cal.; 

therefore         K,  Cl,  Aq  =  +  101.1  Cai. 
But  KC1,  Aq  =  —  4.4  Cal. ; 

therefore  K,  Cl  =  +  105.5  Cal. 

From  the  heats  of  formation  of  KC1,  KOH,  and 
H,O  that  of  KC1O  may  be  easily  calculated  with  the 
aid  of  the  reaction,  readily  examined  in  the  calorim- 
eter: 

2KOH  (dissolved)  +  2C1  (gas) 

=  KCl(dissolved)+KOCl  (dissolved)  .  .  .+25. 4  Cal. 


63 

Heat  of  Formation  of  Ammonia-gas.  The  combus- 
tion of  ammonia-gas  in  oxygen  may  be  readily  ob- 
served in  the  calorimeter: 

2NH8(gas)+30(gas) 

=  2N  (gas)+  3H,O  (liquid)  ...  +  181.2  Cal.  ; 

3H,,  O  (liquid)  =  +  (3  X  68.4  Cal.)  =  +  205.2  Cal.  ; 
therefore 

N,  H,  =  £(205.2  Cal.  -  181.2  Cal.)  =  +  12  Cal. 

Heat  of  Formation  of  Carbon  Monoxide.  This  is 
deduced  from  the  combustion  of  diamond  to  carbon 
dioxide  and  the  combustion  of  carbon  monoxide  to 
carbon  dioxide: 

C  (diamond)  +  2O  (gas)  =  CO,  (gas)  .  .  .  +  94.3  Cal. ; 
CO  (gas)  +  O  (gas)  =  CO,  (gas)  .  .  .  +  68  Cal. ; 
therefore  C,  O  =  C,  O,  -  CO,  O  =  +  26.3  Cal. 

Heat  of  Formation  of  Hydrocarbons.  Of  all  hydro- 
carbons only  acetylene  can  be  prepared  directly  from 
its  elements,  but  this  reaction  is  not  suitable  for  calori- 
metric  determination.  Most  hydrocarbons,  however, 
burn  readily  in  oxygen ;  usually  also  it  is  possible  to 
produce  an  explosion  of  the  two  gases,  and  in  both 
these  cases  the  heats  of  combustion  may  be  measured. 
The  products  of  the  combustion  are  always  carbon 
dioxide  and  water,  the  heat  of  formation  of  both  of 
these  substances  has  been  determined,  and  therefore, 
in  the  calorimetric  equation  for  the  combustion,  the 
only  unknown  quantity  is  the  heat  of  formation  of  the 
hydrocarbon  in  question, 


64 

The  following,  however,  is  an  objection  to  this 
indirect  method  :  The  heats  of  combustion  of  hydro- 
carbons are  large;  their  heats  of  formation,  on  the 
contrary,  are  relatively  small.  As  a  result  of  this 
an  error  (not  avoidable  even  in  the  most  careful 
determinations  of  the  heat  of  formation  and  relatively 
large  in  comparison  to  this  quantity)  is  introduced 
into  the  value  of  the  heat  of  formation,  and  this 
therefore  differs  considerably  from  the  correct  value. 

This  drawback  often  explains  the  variations  in  the 
results  of  the  best  investigators.  Thus  J.  Thomsen 
found  the  heat  of  combustion  of  ethane  to  be  370 
Cal.  ;  Berthelot,  on  the  other  hand,  obtained  the  value 
390  Cal.  —  a  variation  of  5—6  per  cent.  If  the  heat 
of  formation  of  ethane  is  calculated  from  these  two 
values,  that  of  Thomsen  gives  23  Cal.  and  that  of 
Berthelot  4  Cal.,  two  numbers  which  show  great 
divergence. 

The  measurements  of  the  heat  of  combustion  of 
acetylene  show  a  fairly  close  agreement  : 

C,H2  (gas)  +  50  (gas) 

=  2CO,(gas)  +  H20  (liquid)  .  .  .  +  315  Cal.; 


2C,  O,=  +188.6  Cal.;  H,,  O  (liquid)  =  +  68.4  Cal.  ; 
therefore  C,H,  =  —  58  Cal. 

Heat  of  Formation  of  Compounds  which  are  composed 
of  Carbon,  Hydrogen,  and  Oxygen.  The  heats  of  for- 
mation of  these  compounds  are  deduced  from  their 
heats  of  combustion,  the  latter  being  determined  by 


65 

burning  or  exploding  the    compounds   with   oxygen. 
The  same  difficulties  mentioned  above  also  occur  here. 
For  the  heat  of  combustion  of  methyl  alcohol  in  the 
form  of  vapor  Thomsen  found : 

CH40  (vapor) +  30  (gas) 

=  CO,  (gas)  +  2H2O  (liquid)  .  .  .  +  182.2  Cal. ; 

therefore 

C,  H4,  O  (vapor) 

-  182.2  Cal.+  (94.3+  136.8)  Cal.  =  +  48. 9  Cal. 

c.  Application  of  the  Law  for  Predicting  the  Heat 
of  Reaction.  In  the  above  cases  the  heats  of  reaction 
were  used  for  determining  the  heats  of  formation ;  on 
the  other  hand,  the  former  can  be  calculated  if  the 
heats  of  formation  of  the  substances  taking  part  in  the 
reaction  are  known.  And  although  it  is  not  always 
known  whether  the  reaction  is  actually  practicable,  still 
it  can  be  stated  in  advance  how  great  the  heat  of  reac- 
tion would  be  if  the  reaction  did  take  place  according 
to  a  certain  equation. 

If  it  is  known  that 

Ht,  S,  O4,  Aq  =  +  210.9  Cal. 
and  Zn,  S,  O4,  Aq  =  +  248.5  Cal., 

then  in  the  reaction 

Zn  (solid)  +  H2SO4Aq  =  ZnSO4Aq  +  H,  (gas) 

a  quantity  of  heat  equal  to  -f-  37. 6  Cal.  will  be  set  free. 
If  it  is  found  that 

K,  Cl  (solid)  =  +  105. 6  Cal. 
and  K,  I  (solid)  =  +  80, i  Cal., 


66 


then  in  a  -reaction  which  takes  place  according  to  the 
equation 

KC1  (solid)  +  I  (solid)  =  KI  (solid)  +  Cl  (gas), 

a  quantity  of  heat  equal  to  25.5  Cal.  will  be  absorbed. 

REMARK.  In  the  determination  of  the  heats  of  formation 
of  gaseous  substances  the  following  conditions  must  be  ob- 
served :  If  the  total  volume  of  the  products  of  the  reaction 
is  not  the  same  as  that  of  the  substances  in  the  initial  con- 
dition, as  is  the  case,  for  example,  in  the  reactions 

2NH,  (2  liters)  =  N,  (i  liter)  +  3H,  (3  liters), 

2C,H,  (2  liters)  -f  50,  (5  liters) 

—  4CO,  (4  liters)  +  2H,O  (2  liters), 

2H,  (2  liters)  +  Oa  (i  liter)  =  2HaO  (2  liters), 

then  the  experimentally  determined  calorimetric  quantity  is 
a  result,  not  only  of  the  chemical  action,  but  of  the  work 
done  in  the  displacement  of  the  air  on  increase  in  volume. 
If  the  initial  and  final  conditions  are  compared,  it  will  be 
found  that  both  internal  and  external  work  are  performed 
in  this  process.  As  a  result  the  value  of  the  heat  of  forma- 
tion is  often  given  at  constant  pressure,  containing,  in  this 
case,  the  equivalent  of  the  external  work,  and  also  at  constant 
volume,  where  a  correction  for  the  external  work  has  been 
introduced.  Generally,  however,  this  correction  is  of  slight 
importance  in  comparison  with  the  actual  heat  of  formation, 
and  has  therefore  been  neglected  in  the  above  calculations. 

§  32.  Some  General  Results  of  Investigations  on 
Heat  of  Formation.  Stable  and  Unstable  Compounds. 
In  general  those  compounds  are  stable  with  respect  to 
heat  and  shock  whose  heats  of  formation  are  positive, 
and  the  stability  increases  the  greater  the  heat  of 
formation.  A  negative  heat  of  formation  is,  on  the 


67 

contrary,  in  most  cases  an  evidence  of  instability. 
Water  vapor  and  hydrogen  chloride,  the  heats  of 
formation  of  which  are  +  58  Cal.  and  +  22  Cal.  re- 
spectively, are  decomposed  at  high  temperatures  only 
to  a  very  slight  extent,  and  are  entirely  unaffected  by 
pressure  or  shock.  Nitrogen  chloride,  on  the  other 
hand,  with  a  heat  of  formation  of  —  38  Cal.,  is  ex- 
tremely unstable  and  on  the  slightest  jar  decomposes 
into  chlorine  and  nitrogen.  Many  substances  having 
negative  heats  of  formation  behave,  nevertheless, 
under  many  conditions  like  stable  compounds.  Thus, 
for  example,  acetylene,  although  its  heat  of  formation 
is  —  58  Cal.,  may  be  subjected  to  many  operations 
without  undergoing  decomposition.  Nevertheless  this 
substance  has  been  shown  to  be  unstable  under  the 
combined  action  of  a  suddenly  applied  high  pressure 
and  a  high  temperature. 

Substances  having  a  positive  heat  of  formation  and 
undergoing  partial  decomposition  at  high  temperatures 
have  the  property  of  regenerating  themselves  from 
their  decomposition  products  on  cooling;  they  exhibit 
the  phenomenon  of  dissociation  ;  the  alteration  which 
they  undergo  as  a  result  of  the  increase  in  tempera- 
ture is  reversible — i.e.,  one  which  increases  with  an 
increase  in  temperature,  but  which  decreases  when  the 
temperature  is  again  lowered.  The  result  of  this 
action  is  that  when  the  original  temperature  is  again 
reached  the  state  of  the  system  is  the  same  as  it  was 
in  the  beginning.  In  the  case  of  substances  having 
negative  heats  of  formation  the  decomposition,  when 
it  has  once  appeared,  is,  on  the  contray,  complete 


68 


and  is  not  reversible ;  the  term  dissociation  is  not  used 
to  express  the  decomposition  of  this  class  of  bodies. 

REMARK.  The  heat  of  formation  of  a  substance  which 
undergoes  dissociation  must  be  considered  as  a  latent  heat, 
comparable  to  the  internal  latent  heat  of  vaporization  of 
water.  As  a  matter  of  fact  it  is  really  determined  as  an 
actual  quantity  of  heat,  but  nevertheless  it  appears  in  the 
theory  as  a  latent  heat,  i.e.,  as  the  quantity  of  heat  which 
must  be  added  to  the  system  in  order  that  an  alteration  of 
condition  can  take  place  isothermically. 

In  the  study  of  the  phenomenon  of  dissociation,  when 
reactions  which  take  place  at  high  temperatures  are  under 
consideration,  it  is  necessary  to  employ  the  heat  of  forma- 
tion, which  is  determined  at  a  lower  temperature  and  is 
equal  to  the  heat  of  dissociation.  This  is  necessary  since 
the  dissociation  can  be  observed  and  studied  only  at  very 
high  temperatures.  It  is,  however,  very  evident  that  the 
value  of  the  heat  of  formation  is  influenced  by  the  tempera- 
ture at  which  formation  and  decomposition  occur. 

Values  of  the  Heats  of  Reaction.  Compounds  of  a 
halogen  with  different  metals  follow  the  rule  that  the 
heat  of  formation  is  large  for  the  compounds  of  the 
so-called  strongly  positive  metals,  and  is  in  fact  larger 
the  more  positive  the  metal.  In  general  the  chlorides 
have  a  greater  heat  of  formation  than  the  bromides, 
the  bromides  greater  than  the  iodides.  Oxygen  stands 
intermediate  between  chlorine  and  bromine;  sulphur, 
however,  is  exceeded  by  oxygen  and  iodine. 

Strong  acids  in  dilute  solution  all  give  with  strong 
bases  exactly  the  same  value  for  the  heat  of  neutral- 
ization, namely,  +  13.7  Cal. 

The    mixing    of    dilute    solutions    of    neutral    salts 


69 

which  give  no  precipitates  usually  causes  no  evolution 
of  heat  (law  of  t  her  mo-neutrality]. 

The  heats  of  combustion  of  the  hydrocarbons  differ 
for  two  neighboring  members  of  the  series  by  about 
+  158  Cal.  The  same  phenomenon  is  observed  in 
the  case  of  many  homologous  unsaturated  hydrocar- 
bons and  homologous  alcohols;  and,  further,  in  the 
case  of  homologous  fatty  acids  a  constant  increase  in 
the  value  of  the  heat  of  combustion  can  be  observed. 

A  series  of  tables  follow  in  which  special  results  of 
thermochemical  research  are  summed  up. 

Concerning  the  heat  of  combustion  of  organic 
substances  it  is  again  mentioned  that  Thomsen's 
results  generally  differ  considerably  from  those  of 
Berthelot. 

It  must  be  further  noted  that  the  elements  are 
taken  in  those  states  of  aggregation  in  which  they 
normally  occur.  Thus  in  H,  Br  =  +  8-4  Cal.  H  is 
gaseous,  Br  is  liquid,  and  HBr  is  gaseous.  In  HaS 
the  octahedral  sulphur  is  taken.  In  the  case  of  the 
hydrocarbon  compounds  the  carbon  is  always  con- 
sidered in  the  form  of  diamond.  Thus  C,  H,,  Br 
=  +  1 1 .6  Cal.  is  to  be  understood 

C  (diamond)  +  Br  (liquid)  +  3H  (gas) 

=  CH,Br(gas).   .   .  +u.6Cal. 


HEATS    OF   FORMATION    OF   CERTAIN    COMPOUNDS 
THE  METALLOIDS  AT  NORMAL  TEMPERATURE. 


OF 


Substance. 

Formation. 

Heat  Evolved. 

Gaseous. 

Liquid. 

Solid. 

Dissolved. 

HC1 
HBr 
HI 
HaO 
Hap, 

HaS 
HaSe 
HaTe 
NH9 
NHaOH 
H,P 
H,As 
N,0 
NO 
N308 
NO, 
N204 
Na06 
HNO, 

HaSaO, 
SO, 
SOS 
HaS04 
SeOa 
H9Se04 
TeO, 
HaTeO4 
H3POa 
H3P03 
P.O. 
CO, 

C0a 
CO 

C0a 
H3P04 
AsaO, 
As,O6 
BaO, 

H,  Cl 
H,  Br 
H,  I 
Ha,  O 
Ha,0a 
HaO,  0 
Ha,  S 
Ha,  Se 
Ha,  Te 
N,  H, 
N,  Hs,  0 
H8,  P 
H,,  As 
N,.  0 
N,  0 
Na,  O3 

N,  0, 
Na>04 
N,,  05 

H,  N,  O3 
4(Na.  06,  HaO) 
Ha.  Sa,  0, 
S,  Oa 
S,  0, 
S,  O4,  Ha 
Se,  0, 
Se,  04,  Ha 
Te,  Oa 
Te,  03,  Ha  0 
i(Pa,  0,  3H20) 
i(Pa,  03,  3HaO) 
P«,  0. 
C,  Oa 
(C  diamond) 
C,  Oa 
(C  amorph.) 

C,  0 

(C  diamond) 
CO,  O 
H3,  P,  04 
Asa,O, 

Asa,  0. 
Ba.O, 

+  22 

+    8.4 
-    6.1 

+  58 

+  68.4 

+  '69.8 

+     39-3 
+     28.4 
+     I3.I 

+    45-3 
-    23.1 

-f      7-3 
-     16.1 

+    2.7 

-  25.4 

-  35 
+  12 









+    20.4 
+    19.4 

+    4-3 
-  44-1 
-  17-4 
-  21.5 

-      6.8 

—    7-7 

-      2.6 
0 

+     I3.I 

+    29.8 
+    49.1 
+    14-9 
+  145-3 
+    78.8 
+  142.5 
+  210.9 
+    56.3 
+  145-2 
+    77-3 
-f    93.5 
+    37-3 
+  125.2 
+  406 
+    98.2 

+  101.5 

+  41-9 

H-   7-7 

+  71 

+  189.9 

+  103.3 



+    57-2 

4-  94.3 

+  97-6 
+  26.3 
+  68 



-f    37-5 
+  "5.3 
+  370 



+  302.9 
+  154.7 
+  219.4 
+  317.2 

+  305-6 
+  147 
+  225.4 

+  335-a 

HEATS    OF   FORMATION   OF   CERTAIN   COMPOUNDS  OF 
THE  METALLOIDS.— (Continued.) 


Substance. 

Formation. 

Heat  Evolved. 

Gaseous. 

Liquid. 

Solid. 

Dissolved. 

ClaO 
HC10, 
HC104 
BraO 
HBrOs 
1,0, 
HIOS 
HI04 
CSa 

C1I 
C13I 
SaCla 
SOCla 

soacia 

SeaCla 
SeCl4 
TeCU 
PC13 
PC16 
it 

PCUO 
AsCl, 
BC1, 

coo, 

IBr 
SaBra 
PBr, 
PBr6 
AsBr, 
Sala 
Pah 
PI3 
AsI3 

Cla,  0 
H,  Cl,  03 
H,  Cl,  04 
Bra,  O 
H,  Br,  O8 
It,  05 

H,  I,  Oa 
H,  1.04 
C,  S, 

(C  diamond) 
Cl,  I 
IC1,  Cla 

Sa,  Cla 
S,0,  Cl, 
S,  Oa,  Cla 
Se,  Cla 
Se,  C14 
Te,  C14 
P,  C13 
P,  C16 

PC13,  Cla 

P,  C13,  0 
As,  Cla 
B,  Cla 
(B  amorph.) 
C,  0,  Cla 
(C  diamond) 
I,  Br 
Sa,  Bra 
P,  Br, 
P,  Br5 
As,  Bra 
Sa,  I, 
Pa,  U 
P,  la 
As,  I8 

-I7.8 





-  8.4 
+  24 

4-  38.6 

-  16.2 
--  12.3 
--  43-5 
-  55-7 
+  47.6 

+  i83.a 



+     18.3 





4-   45-3 
H-   57-9 

-28.7 

—     22.3 

+      5.8 

+    14-3 
-f    49-8 
+    89.8 

+     22.2 

+  "75"  5 

+  146 

+  71.5 
+  104 

+"ii'.7 

+  '  46.2 
+  77.4 

+  105 
+  29.7 



+  52.9 

+      2.5 

+    I 

+    44-8 





+  59-  1 



+    44-9 
o 

+    19-8 
+    10.9 

+     12-7 





The  heat  of  solution  of  a  substance  is  determined  from  the  differ- 
ence between  the  heats  of  formation  of  the  same  for  the  dry  and  for 
the  dissolved  condition. 


HEATS  OF  FORMATION  OF    CERTAIN  COMPOUNDS  OF 

THE  METALS. 
A.     OXIDES  AND  HALIDES. 


Substance. 

Heat  of  Formation. 

Substance. 

Heat  of  Formation. 

Solid. 

Dissolved. 

Solid. 

Dissolved. 

K,  H,  O 

+  103.2 

+  H6.5 

Ca,  0 

+  131 

+  M9-5 

K3,  0 

.... 

+  164.6 

Sr,O 

+  128.4 

+  J57-7 

Na,  H,0 

-f  101.9 

+  in.  8 

Ba,  O 

+  124.2 

+  158.7 

Naa.  O 

-{-   IOO.2 

+  155.2 

Ca,  03,  H3 

+  214.9 

+  217-9 

Li,  H,  O 

.... 

f  H7.4 

Sr,  O2,H, 

+  214-5 

+  226.1 

N,  H,,  Aq 

.... 

+     20.3 

Ba,  O3)  H3 

+  214.9 

+  227.1 

Mg,  0 

+   144 

.... 

Mg,  02,  H3 

+  217.3 

Al,,  0,,H6 

+  594 

.... 

Ca,  Br3 

+  M0.9 

+  165.4 

Mn,  O,  H30 

+    94.8 

.... 

Ca,I3 

+  107.3 

+  135 

Zn,  O 

+    85.3 

.... 

Ba,  Cla 

+  JQ4-7 

+  196.8 

Zn,  O,  H2O 

+    82.7 

«... 

Ba,  Br2 

+  170 

+  175 

Cd,  O,  H2O 

+    65.7 

.... 

'Sr.Cl, 

+  184.6 

+  I95.7 

Fe,  O,  HaO 

+    68.3 

.... 

Sr,  Bra 

+  157:7 

+  173-8 

Fea,  Oa,  H, 

+  396.4 

.... 

Mg,  Cla 

+  151 

+  186.9 

Ni,  O,  H3O 

+    60.8 

.... 

Zn,  Cl, 

+     97.2 

+  112.  8 

Co,  0,  HaO 

+    63.4 

.  i  .  . 

Zn,  Bra 

+     76 

+    91 

Pb,  O 

+    50.3 

.... 

Zn,  I, 

+    49-2 

+    60.5 

Cu.O 

+    37-2 

.... 

Mn,  Cla 

+   112 

+  128 

Cu3,  O 

+    40.8 

.... 

Fe,  C13 

+     82.1 

+  ioo 

Aga,  0 

5-9 

.... 

Fe,  Br3 

+  78.2 

Hga,  0 

+      22 

.... 

Fe,  I, 

.... 

+  46.4 

Hg,  O 

+      20.1 

.... 

Fe,  C13 

+      96.1 

+  126.1 

Sn,O,  HaO 

+    68.1 

.... 

Al,  Cl, 

+  161 

+  237.8 

Au2,0,,(H20)3 

—    13-2 

.... 

Al,  Br, 

+  II9-7 

+  205 

Pt,0,HaO 

+    17.9 

... 

Al,  I3 

+    70.4 

+  159-4 

Co,  Cl, 

+    76.5 

+  948 

K,  Cl 

+  105.6 

+   JOI.2 

Ni,  Cl, 

+    74-5 

+    93-7 

K,  Br 

+    95-3 

+     90-2 

Hg,  Cl 

+    31-4 

K,  I 
K,  F 

+    80.  1 

4-  109.5 

+    75 
+  H3-I 

Hg,  Br 
Hg,  I 

+    24.1 
+     M.I 

.... 

Na,Cl 

+    97-6 

+    96-4 

Hg,  Cl, 

+    53-3 

+   'so 

Na,  Br 

+    85.8 

+    83.9 

Hg,  Bra 

+    40  5 

Na,  I 

-    69  i 

+    70.3 

Hg,  I, 

+    24.2 

.... 

Na,  F 

f  109 

+  108.4 

Cu,  Cl 

+    32.9 

.... 

N,  H4,  Cl 

H-    75-8 

+    7L9 

Cu,  Br 

+    -5 

.... 

N,  H4)  Br 

+    65.4 

+    61 

Cu,  I 

+    16.3 

.... 

N,  H4,  I 

4-  49-3 

+    45-8 

Cu,  Cl, 

+    51-6 

+    62.7 

Li,Cl 

+    93-8 

+   102.2 

Cu,  Bra 

+    32.6 

+    40.8 

Ca,  Cla 

+  169.8 

+  187.2 

Cd,  Cl, 

+    93-2 

+    96-2 

Cd,  Bra 

+    75.2 

+    75.6 

Au,  Br 

—        O.I 

.... 

Cd,  I, 

+    48.8 

+    47-9 

Au,  I 

—      5-5 

.... 

73 


HEATS  OF   FORMATION  OF    CERTAIN  COMPOUNDS  OF 
THE    METALS.— (Continued). 

A.     OXIDES  AND  HALIDES. — (Continued). 


Keat   of  Formation. 

Heat  of  Formation. 

Substance. 

Solid. 

Dissolved. 

Substance. 

Solid. 

Dissolved. 

Pb,  C12 

+   82.8 

+     76 

Au,  Cl, 

+     22.8 

4-     27.3 

Pb,  Br8 

-f   64.5 

+     54-5 

Au,  Br3 

.... 

5-1 

Pb,  I, 

4-    39-8 

Sn,  C12 

4-     80.8 

4-      81.1 

Ag,  Cl 

H-    29-4 

.... 

Sn,  CU 

4-  127.3 

4-   157-2 

Ag,Br 

+    22.7 

.... 

Pt,  C14 

-    59-8 

4-      79-4 

Ag,  I 

4-    13-8 

.... 

Pt,  Br4 

4-   42.4 

4-     52.3 

Au,  Cl 

4-      5-8 

.... 

B.     SULPHIDES. 


K2,  S 

4-  IOI.2 

4-   III.  2 

Fe,S,«H2O 

4-  23.8 

.... 

K,  H,  S 

4-     62.3 

4-   63.1 

Co,S,wH2O 

4-  19-7 

.... 

Na2,  S 

4-   87 

4-  102 

Ni,S,H20 

4-  17.4 

.... 

Na,  H,  S 

4-    54 

4-    58.4 

Zn.S,«H2O 

4-  39-6 

.... 

Ba,  S 

4-   98.3 

Cd,S,«H3O 

4-  32.4 

.... 

Sr,  S 

4-    97-4 

.... 

Cu,  S 

4-     8.1* 

.  .  .  . 

Ca,  S 

-    89.6 

.... 

Cu2,  S 

4-  18.3 

.... 

Mg,  S 

4-    77-6 

.... 

Hg,  S 

-     4.8* 

.... 

A12,  S3 

4-  122.4 

.... 

Aga,  S 

4-    3.3* 

.... 

Mn,S,  wH,O 

4-    44-4 

.... 

Pb,  S 

4-  18.4 

.  •  .  . 

C.      OXY-SALTS. 

Carbonates  (C  =  diamond). 

Mn,  C,  O3 

4-  210.8 

Ka,  C,  03 

4-  278.4 

4-  284.9 

Cd,  C,  03 

4-  179-2 

.... 

Naa>  C,  O3 

4-  269.9 

4-  275.4 

Ag2,  C,03 

4-  120.2 

.... 

Ba,  C,  03 

4-280.5 

Pb,  C,  O3 

4-  166.9 

.... 

Sr,  C,  03 

4-  277.5 

.... 

K,H,  C,  0, 

4-  232.9 

4-  227.6 

Ca,  C,  03 

4-  267.7 

— 

Na,  H,  C.Os 

4-  227 

4-  223.7 

*Not  certain. 


74 


HEATS   OF  FORMATION    OF  CERTAIN    COMPOUNDS  OF 
THE   METALS.—  (Continued.) 

C.   OXY-SALTS. — (Continued.) 


Heat  of  Formation. 

Heat  of  Formation. 

Substance 

C    K  » 

Solid. 

Dissolved. 

Solid. 

Dissolved 

Sulphates. 

Ca,Na,O8,4HjO 

+  213.8 

+  206.6 

K2,  S,  04 

+  344-6 

+  338.2 

Zn,Na,O6,6H2O 

+  I38.I 

+  132.3 

K,  H,  S,  O4 

+  277-5 

+  273-7 

Cu,N3,O6,6HaO 

+    93 

+     82.3 

Naa,  S,  O4 

+  328.4 

+  329 

Cd,N,,O.,4H,O 

+  121.  1 

+  116.1 

Na,  H,  S,  04 

+  267.8 

4-  266.6 

Pb,  Na,  06 

+  I05-5 

+    97-9 

Na,  H8,  S,  04 

•f-  282.2 

+  279-7 

Ag,  N,  08 

+     28.7 

+    23.3 

Mg,  S,  04 

+  302.3 

+  322.6 

Ba,  S,  O4 

+  338.I 

.... 

Other  salts. 

Ca,  S,  04 

+  318.4 

+  318.4 

Sr,  S,  04 

+  331 

K,  O,  Cl 

+    88.8 

Zn,  S,  O4 

+  230 

+  248.5 

K,  Cl,  O3 

+    95 

+    85 

Mn,  S,  O4 

+  249.9 

+  263.7 

K,  Cl,  04 

+  "3-1 

+  1OI 

Co,  S,  O4 

+  230.5 

K,  Br,  O3 

+    84.1 

+    74-3 

Ni,  S,  04 

i  •  .  . 

+  229.7 

K,  I,  O3 

+  124-5 

+  "7-4 

Fe,  S,  O4 

.... 

+  235.6 

Na,  0,  Cl 

+    83.4 

Cu,  S,  O4 

+  182.8 

+  198.4 

9 

Na,  Cl,  O3 

+"86.8 

+    81.2 

Cd,  S,  04 

+  221.2 

+  231.9 

Naa   S,  O3 

+  260.  5 

+  262.9 

Aga,  S,  O4 

+  167.3 

+  162.8 

Naa,  Sa,  06 

+  398.9 

+  393-5 

Pb,  S,  O4 

+  216.2 

.... 

Naa,  H,  P,   04 

+  413.9 

+  419.5 

* 

N,  H4,  N,  O3 

+    64.9 

+    60.2 

Nitrates. 

K,  Mn,  O4 

+  195 

+  184.8 

Bi,  Cl, 

+    90.6 

K,  N,  03 

+  "9-5 

+  in 

Bi,  O,  Cl 

+    88.2 

«... 

Na,  N,  03 

-1-  in-  3 

+  106.3 

Naa,Pt,Cl66H2O 

+  288.3 

+  277-7 

N,  H4,  N,  0, 

4-    88 

+  8i.s 

K,  C,  N 

+    29.8 

+    26.8 

Ba,   N9,  O6 

+  226.2 

+  216.8 

Na,  C,  N 

+    25.5 

+    25 

Sra,  N,,  08 

+  219.8 

+  215.2 

Hg,  Ca,Na 

-    52 

—    55 

Ca,  N,,  0. 

Mg,Na,0.,6H,0 

+  202.6 

+  210.5 

+  206.6 
+  206.3 

Ag,  C,  N 
AgCN,KCNAq 

—    31-2 

+  "6.5 

Sr,  Ni,  O,,4HaO 

+  227.7 

+  215.2 

K,  O,  C,  N 

+  '  34.3 

+    29.1 

75 


HEATS  OF  COMBUSTION   AND   HEATS   OF   FORMATION 
OF  SOME  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS. 

C  —  diamond. 


Substance. 

Formula. 

Heat  of 
Comb. 

Heat  of 

Formation. 
Vol.  const. 

Observer. 

SATUR/ 

LTED  HYDR< 

CH4 
CaH9 
C3H8 
(CH3)3CH 
(CH3)4C 
C6H14 
(normal) 
C,H16 
(normal) 

ATED   HVDl 

C,H4 
C3H6 
C4H8 
C6H10 
C6H10 
CaH3 
C3H4 

>GEN  DERIV 

CH3C1 

C3H5C1 
C3H7C1 
C4HUC1 
C,H3C1 
CHC13 
CC14 
CH3Br 
CaH8Br 
C3H7Br 
CbHMBr 
C3H5Br 
C,H4Bra 
CH3I 
C2H6I 

>CARBONS. 

+213.8 
+  370.5 
+  529.2 
+  687.2 
+  847.1 
+  989-2 

+  II37-5 
IOCARBON 

+  333-4 
+  4Q2-7 
+  650.6 
-f  807.6 
+  932.8 
+  3i5.o 
+  467-6 

ATIVES. 

+  164.8 

+  32L9 
+  480.2 

+  637.9 
+  286.2 

+     70-5 

+  184.7 
+   341.8 

+  499-3 
+  462.1 

+  201.5 
+  359-2 

+  I6.5 
+  22.1 
+  25-4 
+  29.1 
+  3L5 

+  53-2 

Thomsen 
« 

Stohmann 

Lougui- 
nine 

Thomsen 
if 

« 

Berthelot 
Thomsen 

Thomsen 

Berthelot 
Thomsen 
Berthelot 

Thomsen 
« 

Propane            •  • 

UNSATUB 

s. 

-    12.8 

-    6.0 
-     1-9 
+    3-1 
-27.8 
-  58 
—  48.9 

+  19-2 
+  24-2 
+  27.8 
+  32.2 
-     7-9 
+  20.9 
+  18.4 
+  ii.  6 
+  16.6 

+  21.  1 

+  27.1 
-      9-6 

+  15 
-    4-7 
-    0.6 

Amylene  (gaseous)  

Diallyl  

Allylene    

HALC 

Ethyl           "            

Butyl           "       

Vinyl           "       

Chloroform                      •  •  .  • 

Carbon  tetrachloride      .  .  .  . 

Ethyl           "        

Proovl         " 

Amyl                            

Allyl            " 

Ethylene  bromide  (gaseous) 
Methyl  iodide  .      . 

Ethyl  iodide  

76 


HEATS   OF    COMBUSTION   AND    HEATS   OF    FORMATION 
OF  SOME  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS.—  (Continued.} 


Substance. 

Formula. 

Heat  of 
Comb. 

Heat  of 
Formation. 
Vol.  const. 

Observer. 

ALC 

:OHOLS  (Ga 
CH3OH 
C2H5OH 
C3H7OH 
C4H9OH 
C5HMOH 
C3H5OH 
C3H3OH 
ACIDS. 
CH202 
C2H402 
C3H602 
C10H2002 
C12H2402 
C14H2,02 

seous). 
-f  182.2 
+  340-5 
-f  498.6 
+  658  5 
-h  820.1 
+  464.8 
+  43I-I 

+    69.4 
+  225.4 
+  386.5 
f-  1455.6 
f  1747-6 
+  2052  9 
+  2361.9 
+  2677.8 
4-    60.2 
+  207.3 
+  356.8 
4-  261.8 

INCES. 

+  349-4 
+  659.6 
+   396.8 
-f  281.9 

4-  158.6 
+  259.6 
+  312.1 
+  258.3 
+  420.5 
+  152.2 
4-  298.8 

•  +  787.8 

+  73L9 
+  770.5 
+  771-9 
+  729-5 
+  610  6 

+  1352.7 
4-  678.0 
4-  677.5 

+  47-9 
+  51-5 
+  56 
+  57-5 
+  58 
+  21.6 

-  12.7 

+  92-S 
+  98.6 

+  99-i 

Thomsen 

Thomsen 
Stohmann 

Thomsen 

Stohmann 
Thomsen 

Stohmann 
Thomsen 

Stohmann 

n 

Thomsen 
Stohmann 

Ethyl            '       

Propvl          ' 

Isoamvl       '        

Allvl            '         

Propargyl  "        

„'.       (  Formic   acid...    . 

%  3  •!  Acetic 

O       (  Propionic  "  . 

Capric    acid  



Palmitic  '      

Stearic      '     

C18H3602 
C2H204 
C3H404 
C4HB04 
C4H60« 
HER  SUBSTV 
(CH3)20 
(C2H5)20 
C3H6(OH)3 
C2H40 
CNH 
(CN)2 
CH3CN 
CH3NH2 
(CH3)2NH 
CO(NH2)2 
CH3SH 

CBH6 

C6H5OH 
C7H,02 
C8H«04 
C7H«03 
C4H4S 
C«H1206 
C)2H22On 
CaH.oO. 
C«H1006 

Oxalic       '      

4-'  196.7 

Sucdnic   '      

9 

Or 
Dimethyl  ether  (gaseous)  .  . 
Diethyl 
Glycerine  

+   42.7 
+   565 

Acetaldehyde  (gaseous)...  . 
Hydrocyanic  acid  '         .... 
Cyanogen                 '         .... 
Acetomtrile             '         .... 
Methvlamine            '         .... 
Dimethylamine       '         .... 
Urea  

+  42.5 

-  30.2 

-  71 

—   21.6 

+    5-7 
+    5-6 
+  77-5 
+    5-4 
(  -  17  i 
J     (gas.) 
|  -      9.1 

Mercaptan  (gaseous). 

Benzol    

Phenol  (solid)  

Phthalic    "    

Salicylic    "    

Thiophene  (gaseous)  
Dextrose  

-   26.2 

Cane-sugar  

Starch  

77 


MOLECULAR    HEAT    OF   VAPORIZATION    OF   SOME   ORGANIC 
COMPOUNDS. 


6  4  C 

\1 

Methyl  iodide    .  .    .  . 

6  5  C 

il 

Fthyl  alcohol               • 

Q    8 

Chloroform.  

7.q 

IO   7 

Carbon  tetrachloride.  . 

7.2 

Aldehyde   

6.0 

6.45 

7e 

"     bromide    .  •    • 

7    e 

Chloral 

8  o 

"     iodide        .    .     . 

o  8 

Chloral  hydrate                . 

21    Q 

Ethvlen   bromide.  .  •  . 

8    2 

Formic  acid           •      • 

*  6 

Methyl  alcohol    

8   45 

Acetic       "   

7.2^ 

IO.  I 

Hydrocianic  acid  

e    7 

Valeric  acid  ....    ...... 

10.6 

7.2 

Ether  

6.7 

HEAT    OF    NEUTRALIZATION    OF    BASES. 

The  solutions  contain  two  equivalents  of  base  or  acid  dissolved 
in  400  mols.  of  water.     Many  bases,  however,  are  not  soluble. 


Bases. 

H2S04,  Aq. 

aClH,  Aq. 

2NO,H,  Aq. 

CaH4Oa,Aq. 

2NaOH,  Aq 

31-4 

27-5 

27.4 

26.8 

2KOH,  Aq 

31-3 

27-5 

27-5 

26.6 

2LiOH,  Aq 

31.3 

27.7 

27.8 

.... 

aNHs,  Aq 

28.2 

24.4 

24.6 

23.8 

Ba(OH)2,  Aq 

(36.9) 

27.8 

28.2 

26.8 

Si(OH)2,  Aq 

30.7 

27.6 

27.8 

26.6 

Ca(OH)2,  Aq 

SI-* 

27.6 

26.8 

Mg(OH)a 

3I-I 

27.7 

27.6 

.... 

Mn(OH)2 

26.5 

23.0 

23.0 

22.6 

Ni(OH)a 

26.3 

22.6 

.... 

Co(OH)2 

24.7 

21.  I 

.... 

...» 

Fe(OH)2 

24.9 

21.4 

Zn(OH)2 

23-5 

19.9 

19.9 

18.0 

Cd(OH)2 

23.8 

2O.3 

20.  6 

.... 

Cu(OH)a 

18.4 

14.9 

14.9 

12.8 

PbO 

(23-4) 

(16.8) 

17.8 

15.5 

HgO 

18.9 

6.4 

AgaO 

14-5 

(42.5) 

10.9 

.... 

f  A1(OH)3 

21  .O 

18.6 

.... 

.... 

|Cr(OH)3 

I6.4 

13.7 

.... 

.... 

IFe(OH), 

II.  2 

II.  2 

11.3 

8.0 

SnO 

2.8 

The   numbers  in  parenthesis  denote  the  formation  of  insoluble 
salts.      In  these  cases 
Heat  evolved  =  Heat  of  neutralization  -}-  Heat  of  precipitation. 


NEUTRALIZATION   OF   ACIDS   BY   SODIUM  HYDROXIDE. 
One  molecule  of  the  acid  and  a  equivalents  of  sodium  hydrox- 
ide, both  in  dilute  solution,  are  mixed  together. 


Acids. 

««i 

a  =  i 

a  =  2 

rt  =  3 

a  =  4 

a-6 

HC1 

6.8? 

13  .  74 

13.  74 

HBr 

5.87 

13.75 

13.75 

HI 

6.84 

13.68 

13.68 

HNO3 

6  84 

13.68 

n.68 

HC1O3 

6.88 

13.  76 

13  •  76 

HBrO3 

6.80 

13.78 

13.78 

HIO3 

6    Q 

13.81 

1^.81 

HC1O4 

7.18 

14  .  ac 

M,  qc 

HF 

16.27 

16.27 

H3POa 

7.60 

15.20 

15.40 

CaH4O3 

13  .40 

CH3Oa 

13.41; 

C3H«Oa 

10.48 

HCN 

I  .  VI 

2    77 

2.  77 

HaS04 
H3SO» 

14.6 

I  C      Q 

31.0 
2Q   O 

3LO 

.... 



HaCrG4 
H3PO3 

7.47 

13.13 
14.8 

24-7 

28.4 

28.0 

25.2 



H3P04 
H3As04 
HaCO3 
(COOH)a 
CaH4(COOH)a 
Malic  acid 

7-3 
7.36 

6*.g* 

14.8 
15.0 
ii  .0 
13.8 
12.4 
13.0 

27.1 
27.6 
20.2 
28.3 
24.0 
26.  17 

34-0 

35.9 
20.  6 

24.1 

28^5 

.... 

Tartaric  acid 
Citric  acid 
HaSi03 
HaBO4 

3-2 

6.4 

12.4 
12.67 

4-3 
II.  i 

25.3 
25.4 
5-2 
20.0 

25.8 
38.9 

5-4 

41.7 
20.6 

79 


HEATS  OF  SOLUTION. 

When  one  gram  molecule  of  the  substance  dissolves  in  the  given 
quantity  of  water  at  18°,  then  the  number  of  calories  stated  are  set 
free. 


Substance  Dissolved. 

Quant. 
Water 

Heat 
Evolved 

Substance  Dissolved 

Ouant 
Water 

Heat 
Evolved 

in  mol. 

in  Cal. 

in  mol 

in  Cal. 

NaCl 

200 

-     I.I8 

NaBr4-  2H2O 

2OO 

—     4.7 

KC1 

" 

—     4-4 

NaBr 

K 

—     0.19 

NH4C1 

« 

-    39 

KI 

II 

—    5-1 

BaCl,  +  2HaO 

4OO 

-    4-8 

NaI4-2H3O 

" 

—    4.0 

Bad, 

" 

4-   2.1 

Nal 

«( 

4-    1.2 

CaCl,  -f  6HaO 

•• 

-    4-34 

NaN03 

«« 

—    5.0 

CaCl, 

« 

+  17-4 

KN03 

(« 

-    «-5 

CaBr, 

« 

+  24-5 

NH4N03 

«C 

-    6.3 

Cal, 

«  < 

4-  27.7 

Ba(N08)a 

400 

-     9.4 

MgCla  4-  6HaO 

" 

4-    2.9 

Sr(N03)a4-4H30 

" 

—  12.5 

MgCl3 

" 

4-  35-9 

Sr(N03)a 

1 

-    4-6 

MnClaH-4HaO 

" 

4-    1.5 

Ca(N03)a4-4HaO 

• 

—     7.2 

MnCla 

" 

-f  16.0 

Ca(N03)a 

' 

4-    4-0 

FeCla  +  4HaO 

" 

4-    2.7 

Mg(N03)a  4-  6HaO 

( 

—    4.2 

FeCla 

" 

4-  17-9 

Mn(NO3)a-(-6HaO 

( 

-      6.2 

FeCl3+  i2HaO 

" 

4-  ii.  3 

Zn(NO3)a4-6HaO 

' 

-     5-8 

FeCl3 

<  < 

4-63.3 

Cd(N03)3+4HaO 

«( 

-     5-0 

CoCl2  4-  6HaO 

" 

-    2.9 

Cu(NO3)a  4-  6HaO 

" 

-  10.7 

Cod, 

" 

4-  18.3 

AgN03 

200 

~    5-4 

NiCla  +  6H3O 

V 

—    i.i 

Pb(N03)a 

4OO 

-    7.6 

NiCla 

<  < 

+    IQ  2 

ZnCl, 

<  « 

*\j.  * 
-f   15-6 

NaaSO4  4-  ioHaO 

400 

-  18.76 

ZnBra 

it 

4-is 

NaaSO4 

" 

4-  0.46 

Znl, 

tf 

+  "•3 

K2SO4 

«« 

-   6.4 

CuCla  +  2HaO 

" 

4-    4-2 

(NH4),S04 

«i 

—   2.4 

CuCla 

K 

4-  ii.  i 

CaS044-2H,0 

« 

0.0* 

HgCl, 

H 

-    3-3 

CaS04 

« 

4-   4-7 

PbCl, 

" 

-    6.8 

MgSO4  4-  7H3O 

<  i 

-    3-8 

SnCla  -f  2H,O 

" 

-    5-4 

MgS04 

•' 

4-  20.3 

SnCl, 

« 

4-   0.3 

MnSO44-sHaO 

» 

-f   004 

SnCl4 

300 

4-  29-9 

MnSO4 

ii 

4-  13.8 

AuCl3  4-  2HaO 

-     i-7 

FeS04  4-  7HaO 

•« 

—    4-5 

AuCl3 

" 

4-   4-5 

CoSO44-7HaO 

ii 

-    3-6 

PtCU  4-  4HaO 

" 

-   1.7 

NiSO44-7HaO 

" 

—    4-3 

PtCl4 

" 

4-19-6 

ZnSO44-7HaO 

<  « 

-    4-24 

KBr 

200 

-    5-08 

ZnSO4 

Q 

^^ 

+  18.5 

CdSO44-~  HaO 

<  ( 

4-    6.0 

*  Apparently  weakly  positive 


8o 


HEATS   OF   SOLUTION.     (Continued.) 


Substance 
Dissolved. 

Quantity  of 
Water  in 
Molecules. 

Heat 
Evolved  in 
Calories. 

Substance 
Dissolved. 

Quantity  of 
Water  in 
Molecules. 

Heat 
Evolved  in 
Calories. 

CdSO4 
CuSO4+5H3O 
CuSO4 
Ag2S04 
K2S04,Al2(S04)3-f24H20 
K2SO4,Cr2(SO4)3-f24H2O 

400 

2400 
1600 

+  10.7 
-    2.7 

+  15.8 
-  4-5 

—  20.2 
-22.3 

Heat  of  solut 
pletely  saturat 

NH4C1 
KC1 
NaCl 
(NH4)2S04 
NaN03 
NH4N03 
MgS04+7H90 
!CuCl2+2H20 
|  CaCl2+6H2O 

ion  in 
ed  sol 

com- 
4tion. 

-3.88 
-3-5 
—  O.2 

K2C03 
K2C03-|-3H20 
KHC03 
Na2C03 
Na2CO3-f-ioH2O 
NaHCO3 

400 

:+  6.5 

-  3-8 
-  5-3 
+  5.6 
-16.1 
-  4-3 

1.4 

-2.5 
-3-5 
—4.4 
-3-0 

-8.4 

Problems.  I.  How  great  is  the  quantity  of  heat 
which  is  set  free  on  the  combination  of  100  grams 
of  Na9CO3  with  sufficient  water  to  form  the  hydrate 
NaaC03.ioH20? 

2.  Calculate  the  heat  of  the  reaction  represented  by 
the  equation 

Pb(N03)aAq  +  H2S04Aq  =  PbSO4  +  2HNO3Aq. 

3.  What  is  the  heat  of  reaction  of 
AgN03Aq  +  HClAq  =  AgCl  +HNO3Aq? 

4.  What   is  the  quantity  of  heat  evolved   on  the 
combination    of    C2H4    with    gaseous    bromine,    the 
volume  being  kept  constant  ? 

5.  Calculate   the   quantity   of   heat   set   free   when 
10  grams  of  zinc  is  dissolved  in  dilute  sulphuric  acid. 

6.  What   is   the   heat   of  formation    of   dipropargyl 


8i 


(C6H6)  at  constant  pressure  if  the  heat  of  combustion 
is  equal  to  +  882.9  Cal.  ? 

7.  Berthelot  burned  C,C16  in  the  presence  of  water 
according  to  the  equation 

C2C1.  +  O  +  Aq  =  2CO,  +  6HClAq 

and  found  that  the  quantity  of  heat  set  free  was  equal 
to  -f-  131.2  Cal.  What  is  the  heat  of  formation  of 
C.C1.?  * 

8.  20  cc  of  a  lO-per-cent  solution  of  cupric  chloride 
are   treated  with  an  excess  of  iron-filings    until   the 
copper  is  completely  precipitated.     Calculate  approxi- 
mately the  increase  in  temperature  of  the  water,  con- 
sidering the  specific  gravity,   as  well  as  the  specific 
heat  of  the  liquid,  to  be  equal  to  I,  and  neglecting  the 
value  of  the  heat  of  the  iron  and  the  copper. 

9.  A  calorimeter  contains  350  cc  of  a  tenth-normal 
solution   of   HC1.     With   this   is  mixed  250  cc   of  a 
solution    of    NaOH    containing   sufficient   NaOH    to 
exactly    neutralize    the    HC1    in    the    first    solution. 
Before  mixing  the  temperature  of  the  two  solutions 
is  the  same.     What  will  be  the  increase  in  tempera- 
ture ? 

10.  350  cc  of  a  tenth-normal  H,SO4  solution   are 
mixed  with  250  cc  of  a  fifth-normal  NaOH  solution  at 
the  same  temperature.     What  is  the  increase  in  tem- 
perature ? 

§  33.  Principle  of  Greatest  Work.  Substances 
which  enter  into  chemical  reaction  with  one  another 
when  brought  together  under  normal  conditions  tend 
to  produce  those  systems  which  are  formed  with  the 
maximum  evolution  of  heat. 


82 

Differently  formulated.  Of  the  possible  reactions 
in  which  a  system  of  substances  can  take  part,  that 
one  results  in  which  the  greatest  quantity  of  heat  is 
set  free. 

Examples.  In  a  system  composed  of  potassium, 
chlorine  and  iodine,  KC1  and  not  KI,  is  formed,  since 

K+  I  =  KI  .   .   .   80. 1  Cal., 
while          K  +  Cl  =  KC1  .   .   .    105.6  Cal. 

The  system  (KI  -f-  Cl)  would  change  to  the  system 
(KC1  +  I),  since 

KI  +  C1  =  KC1  +  I  .   .   .  25.5  Cal. 

Acids  and  bases  act  on  one  another  because  the 
formation  of  salts  is  attended  by  the  evolution  of 
heat ;  for  example, 

KOHAq+HClAqnr  KClAq+HaO  .  .  .  +13.7  Cal. 

Gaseous  chlorine  does  not  decompose  water-vapor, 
since  at  100°  the  reaction  would  be 

H90(gas)  +  2Cl(gas) 

=  2HC1  (gas)  +  O  (gas)  ...    -  14  Cal. 

This  equation  is  evident  from  the  following: 

Ht,  O  (gas)  at  100°  =  +  58  Cal. 
and  H,  Cl  (gas)  =  +  22  Cal. 

At  ordinary  temperatures,  however,  liquid  water  is 
decomposed,  though  very  slowly,  by  chlorine,  for 

H3O  (liquid)  +  2C1  (gas)  +  Aq 

=  2HClAq  +  O  (gas)  .  ,  .  +  10  Cal., 


83 

since 

H,  Cl  (gas)  =  +22  Cal.,      HC1,  Aq  =  +  17.2  Cal., 

and  H2,  O  (liquid)  =  +  68.4  Cal. 

Copper  does  not  replace  iron  in  a  solution  of  ferrous 
chloride,  the  reverse  substitution  taking  place,  how- 
ever, since 

Fe  (solid)  +  CuCl,Aq 

=  FeClaAq+Cu  (solid)  .    .   .   +37.3  Cal. 

REMARK.  This  principle  was  first  enunciated  by  J.  Thorn- 
sen,  but  soon  after  renounced.  It  was  later  taken  up  by  Ber- 
thelot,  who  defended  it  for  thirty  years.  Its  application  is 
extremely  wide-reaching  and  important,  notwithstanding  the 
appreciable  errors  which  it  often  involves.  The  fundamen- 
tal idea  of  this  principle  is  that  chemical  action  takes  place 
only  when  the  change  through  which  the  system  passes  is 
accompanied  by  the  evolution  of  heat.  This  principle  of 
course  holds  only  for  reactions  which  take  place  at  low 
temperatures;  and  Van't  Hoff  has  in  fact  shown  that  its 
validity  is  greater  the  nearer  the  absolute  zero  is  ap- 
proached. 

The  enunciation  of  this  principle  involves  a  difficulty 
since  it  is  conditionally  assumed  that  the  substances,  of 
their  own  free  reciprocal  action,  shall  react  without  the  in- 
fluence of  an  external  influence,  an  external  energy.  Un- 
der ordinary  conditions,  however,  external  influences  do 
exist,  namely,  the  temperature  and  the  pressure  of  the  sur- 
roundings. It  should  be  stated  here  that  the  universal 
application  of  this  principle  was  very  recently  renounced 
by  Berthelot  himself. 

§  34.  Application  of  the  Principle  of  Greatest 
Work. 

a.  Law  of  Simultaneously  Occurring  Reactions.     A 


84 

reaction  takes  place  the   more  readily  if  its  ^roaucts 
can  immediately  enter  into  another  reaction. 

REMARK.  This  law  covers  the  action  of  elements  in  the 
so-called  nascent  state,  as  well  as  the  phenomena  which 
were  originally  attributed  to  predisposed  affinities.  The 
law  may  be  deduced  from  the  principle  of  greatest  work, 
since  the  second  reaction  involves  a  certain  evolution 
of  heat,  which  is  added  to  that  of  the  first.  As  a  result 
the  heat  of  reaction  is  raised  ;  from  a  negative  heat  it 
may  increase  to  a  positive  one,  from  one  of  low  positive 
value  to  one  of  higher  value,  so  that  finally  the  total  heat 
of  reaction  may  be  equal  to  a  large  number  of  calories. 

First  Example.  As  already  stated,  chlorine 
has  no  action  on  water-vapor,  but  does  react  with  liquid 
water.  In  the  latter  case  the  HC1  formed  can  dissolve 
immediately  in  water,  which  process  considerably  in- 
creases the  quantity  of  heat  evolved. 

This  action  takes  place  slowly.  If,  however,  the 
conditions  are  such  that  the  HC1  or  the  oxygen  may 
immediately  on  their  formation  enter  into  a  chemical 
reaction,  the, decomposition  of  the  water  is  much  more 
rapid. 

Thus  the  reaction 

H2O  (Hquid)+2Cl+Aq=2HClAq+O  .  .  .  +10  Cal. 
proceeds  slowly,  while  the  reaction 

HaO  (liquid)  +  SOaAq  +  2C1  (gas) 

=  H9SO4Aq  +  2HClAq  .   .   .   +  73.7  Cal. 

quickly  takes  place. 

The  latter  reaction  is  an  example  of  the  action  of 
oxygen  in  the  nascent  state,  and  may  perhaps  be  ex- 
plained by  the  assumption  that  this  element  is  set 


85 

free  in  the  form  of  atoms,  and  these  act  immediately, 
before  combining  to  form  molecules.  This  explana- 
tion may  be  the  correct  one,  but  it  is  nevertheless 
certain  that  the  small  heat  of  reaction  of  the  change 

H,O  +  C12  =  2HClAq  4.  O  ...  -f  10  Cal. 
is  considerably  increased  by  the  heat  of  the  reaction 
SO,Aq  +  O  =  H2SO4Aq   .    .    .    +  63.7  Cal. 

In  the  above  case  the  second  reaction  is  produced 
by  the  oxygen;  under  proper  conditions,  however,  the 
hydrochloric  acid  may  take  part  in  this  second  action. 
Thus,  when  KOH  is  dissolved  in  the  solution,  the  fok 
lowing  reaction  takes  place: 

KOHAq+  HClAq  =  KClAq  +  H2O  .  .  .  +  13.7  Cal. 
The  two  reactions  combined  would  then  give 
2KOHAq  +  Cl2  =  2KClAq-f-H20+0  .  .  .  +37-4  Cal. 

This  equation  is,  however,  not  yet  complete,  since 
the  oxygen  combines  with  KC1,  with  the  formation  of 
KC10: 

KClAq  +  O  =  KClOAq  ...    -  12  Cal., 
making  the  total  reaction 
2KOHAq  +  Cl2  (gas) 

=  KClAq  +  KClOAq  +  H,O  .   .   .  +25. 4  Cal. 

The  formation  of  KC1O  causes  a  decrease  in  the 
heat  of  reaction.  In  fact  this  decrease  is  considerably 
greater  than  the  heat  resulting  from  the  action  of 
chlorine  on  water;  nevertheless  the  fact  that  a  second- 
ary reaction  like  the  formation  of  KC1O  can  take 
place  must  be  considered  as  a  defect  in  logic  existing 
in  the  principle  itself,  since  with  these  exceptions 


86 

reactions  of  this  nature  may  be  included  under  one 
general  rule. 

Second  Example.  Manganese  dioxide  and 
dilute  sulphuric  acid  do  not  react  with  one  another 
according  to  the  scheme 

MnO9  (solid)  +  HaSO4Aq  =  MnSO4Aq  +  H,O  +  O. 

If,  however,  oxalic  acid  be  added,  the  reaction 
takes  place  immediately,  the  oxalic  acid  being  oxi- 
dized to  carbon  dioxide  and  water.  The  first  reaction 
is  presumably  attended  by  a  negative  heat  of  reaction ; 
the  second  increases  this  by  the  high  heat  of  com- 
bustion of  oxalic  acid. 

In  a  similar  manner  the  action  of  sulphuric  acid  on 
potassium  permanganate  is  made  possible  by  the 
presence  of  oxalic  acid. 

Third    Example.     In  the  reaction 

H9O  +  Aq  +  2l  =  2HIAq  +  O 

a  quantity  of  heat  equal  to  42  calories  is  absorbed. 
As  a  result  of  this  water  is  not  decomposed  by 
iodine  according  to  the  above  equation.  The  decom- 
position, however,  takes  place  immediately  if  the 
conditions  are  such  that  the  oxygen  can  oxidize  SO, 
with  the  formation  of  HaSO4,  Na2SaO3  with  the  forma- 
tion of  Na2S4O6  and  Nal,  or  arsenious  acid  with  the 
formation  of  As,OB. 

b.  The  Prediction  of  Reactions.  The  following  rules 
are  often  confirmed: 

I.  A  and  B  will  combine  if  A,  B  =  +  q  Cal.     For  if 

A,  B  =  +  q  Cal., 
then  A+B  =  AB  .   .  .  +  q  Cal., 


$7 

and  the  system  (A  +  B)  will  tend  to  change  to  the 
form  AB,  and  the  form  (A  +  B)  will  be  unstable. 

Example.      KC1  is  formed  directly  from  K  and 
Cl;  and  K,  Cl  =  +  105.6  Cal. 

2.  A  and  B  will  not  combine  without  the  action  of 
some  external  energy  if  A,  B  =  —  q  Cal.,  for  in  this 
case 

A+B  =  AB  .   .   .   —  0Cal., 

and  the  system  (A  +  B)  will  remain  in  this  form. 

Example.     Chlorine  and  nitrogen  do  not  com- 
bine directly;  NC13  =  -  38.5  Cal. 

3.  A  will  displace  B  from  its  compounds  with  C  if 
(A,  C  —  B,  C)  =  +  ^  Cal.,  since  in  this  case 

A  +  BC  =  AC  +  B  .   .  .   +  q  Cal., 

and  the  system    (A  -f-  B  +  C)  tends  to  pass    to  the 
form  (AC  +  B),  the  form  (A  +  BC)  being  unstable. 
Example. 

KI  (solid)  +  Cl  (gas) 

=  KC1  (solid)  +  I  (solid)  .   .   .   +  25.5  Cal. ; 

K,  Cl  =  +  105  Cal.,     K,  I  =  +  80. i  Cal. 

The  reverse  reaction  takes  place  only  under  special 
conditions. 

4.  AB  and  CD  enter  into  a  double  decomposition: 

AB  +  CD  =  AC  +  BD, 
if  (A,  C+B,  D)>(A,  B  +  C,  D); 

that  is,  if 

(A,  C  +  B,  D)  -  (A,  B  +  C,  D)  =  +  q  Cal., 


88 

since  in  this  case  the  form  (AC  +  BD)  is  the  more 
stable  form  of  the  system  (A  +  B  +  C  +  D). 

c.  Experimental  Proof  of  the  Above  Rules.     If  only 
those  reactions   are   considered   which    take    place    at 
ordinary  temperatures  or  at  temperatures  approaching 
these,   the   above  rules  will  be  fairly   well   confirmed 
in  practice.     The  heat   of  formation   of    chlorides  is 
greater  than  that  of  the  corresponding  bromides  and 
iodides,  and  bromine  and  iodine  are  in  fact  generally 
displaced   from   their    compounds  by  chlorine.     The 
heats  of  formation  of  compounds  of  the  metals  with 
halogens  follow  the    rule    that    these  are  greatest  in 
the  cases  of  the  strongly  positive  metals,  and  decrease 
with  the  positive  properties  of  the  metals;    practical 
experience  agrees  with  the  rule,  the  weakly  positive 
metals  being  displaced  from  their  compounds  by  those 
which  are  more  strongly  positive.      The  formation  of 
salts  from  acids  and  bases   is  a  double  decomposition, 
in  which  the  sums  of  the  heats  of  formation  of  the 
products  are  greater  than  those  of  the  substances  in 
the  initial  states,  and  as  a  matter  of  fact  the  forma- 
tion of  salts  of  this  nature  takes  place  without  diffi- 
culty. 

d.  Formation  of  Compounds  with  Negative  Heats  of 
Formation.     The  formation  of  such  compounds  is  ren- 
dered   possible    by    their   appearance    as    secondary 
products  in  a  reaction   in  which  the  other  products 
have  high  heats  of  formation.      In  such  cases,  to  be 
sure,  the  heat  of  reaction  need  not  be  relatively  great; 
still  it  can  be  positive  and  would  be  greater  if  the 
secondary  products  were  not  formed. 


89 

Examples. 

Formation  of  Potassium  Hypochlorite  (see  p.  85). 

Formation  of  Nitrogen  Trichloride. 

N,  C13  =  -  38  Cal. 

This  substance  is  formed  when  chlorine  is  led  into 
a  solution  of  ammonium  chloride: 

NH4ClAq  +  6C1  =  4HClAq  +  NC13  ; 
N,  H4,  Cl,  Aq  =  +  7i.9CaL; 
4C1,  H,  Aq  =  +  156.8  Cal. 


The  heat  of  reaction  is  therefore  -|-  46.9  Cal. 

e.  Explosive  Substances  and  Mixtures.  Systems 
whose  heat  of  reaction  is  great  will  generally  undergo 
alteration.  Generally,  also,  if  in  such  a  system 
the  reaction  is  started  at  any  one  point,  sufficient 
heat  will  be  there  developed  to  raise  the  material  in 
the  immediate  neighborhood  to  the  temperature  at 
which  the  reaction  takes  place;  as  a  result  of  this  the 
reaction  is  propagated  throughout  the  entire  mass. 
When  this  propagation  takes  place  with  great  velocity 
and  is  accompanied  by  a  great  increase  in  pressure, 
the  result  is  known  as  an  explosion.  It  is  often  possi- 
ble to  start  the  reaction  at  one  point  by  a  strong 
pressure  or  shock. 

Explosive  substances  (compounds)  are  substances 
the  formation  of  which  is  accompanied  by  the  ab- 
sorption of  much  heat,  and  which  produce  gaseous 
products  on  their  explosion.  This  is  the  case  with 
nitrogen  trichloride,  nitroglycerine,  and  acetylene. 


90 

These  substances  decompose  when  subjected  to  pres- 
sure at  any  one  point,  since  the  pressure  starts  the 
reaction  at  this  point  and  it  is  then  communicated  to 
the  entire  mass.  The  pressure  which  induces  the 
explosion  is  not  the  same  for  all  substances.  Ni- 
trogen chloride  and  nitroglycerine  decompose  when 
subjected  to  a  very  slight  shock;  acetylene,  on  the 
contrary,  requires  a  very  strong  one. 

Explosive  mixtures  contain  components  the  reac- 
tion between  which  develops  much  heat,  gaseous 
products  being  at  the  same  time  formed.  Examples 
of  such  mixtures  are  gunpowder  and  oxyhydrogen- 
gas. 

The  force  of  an  explosion  depends  upon  the  velocity 
of  propagation  of  the  reaction,  upon  the  heat  evolved, 
and  upon  the  nature  of  the  products  formed.  The  ex- 
plosion is,  moreover,  the  more  violent  when  the  ex- 
ploding substance  is  a  liquid  or  a  solid  and  the  products 
are  gaseous,  since  in  this  case  the  increase  in  pressure 
is  due  not  only  to  the  increase  in  temperature,  but 
also,  and  in  fact  chiefly,  to  the  change  from  the  solid 
or  liquid  to  the  gaseous  state :  a  given  weight  of  the 
substance  occupying  a  given  space,  before  the  reaction 
as  a  liquid  or  solid  and  immediately  after  as  a  gas. 
This  alteration  in  condition  alone  causes  a  pressure 
the  magnitude  of  which  is  not  far  from  a  thousand 
atmospheres,  and  this  value  is  further  increased  by 
the  high  temperature.  These  statements  are  true  for 
nitrogen  trichloride,  nitroglycerine,  and  gunpowder. 

The  values  of  the  pressure  and  temperature  of  an 


explosion  when  calculated  from  the  theory  give 
larger  numbers  than  are  found  by  actual  experiment. 
The  reasons  for  this  are  that  the  reactions  are  not  com- 
plete, and  that  the  values  for  the  heats  of  reaction  and 
specific  heats  of  the  products  used  in  the  calculation 
are  determined  at  temperatures  and  pressures  entirely 
different  from  those  at  which  the  explosion  takes 
place. 

§  35.  Causes  for  the  Starting  of  Reactions.  Sub- 
stances which  enter  into  reaction  with  one  another 
can  often  remain  mixed  together  for  a  long  period 
without  any  reaction  taking  place,  the  starting  of  the 
reaction  requiring  certain  special  conditions.  This  is 
especially  true  in  the  case  of  substances  having  nega- 
tive heats  of  formation;  without  special  provocation 
they  do  not  undergo  any  alteration. 

Examples.  Oxyhydrogen-gas  at  ordinary  tem- 
peratures, gunpowder,  acetylene,  a  mixture  of  metallic 
iron  and  sulphur. 

The  causes  which  induce  the  reaction  are  not  always 
the  same:  sometimes  it  is  a  shock,  as  in  the  case  of 
fulminate  of  mercury,  NC13,  and  nitroglycerine; 
sometimes  the  application  of  fire,  as  with  gunpowder 
and  oxyhydrogen-gas;  and  again  the  action  of  light 
is  sufficient,  as  in  the  case  of  a  mixture  of  hydrogen 
and  chlorine. 

Occasionally  the  entire  mass  of  the  substance  or 
mixture  must  be  heated,  and  then  the  reaction,  hav- 
ing once  started,  continues  without  the  application  of 
further  heat.  A  case  of  this  sort  is  the  formation  of 
chloroform  from  chloride  of  lime,  calcium  hydroxide, 
alcohol,  and  water. 


92 

§  36.  Criticism  of  the  Principle  of  Greatest  Work. 
This  principle  may  be  very  extensively  applied  to 
reactions  which  take  place  under  normal  conditions 
of  temperature  and  pressure,  and  especially  to  the 
cases  of  the  reactions  of  such  substances  as  show  great 
stability  on  increase  of  temperature. 

One  difficulty,  however,  has  already  been  men- 
tioned: the  appearance  of  endothermic  reactions  as 
results  of  complicated  actions  which,  taken  as  a 
whole,  are  exothermic  (comp.  §  34,  a  and  d}. 

The  general  applicability  of  this  principle  is  very 
much  impaired  by  numerous  other  important  consid- 
erations, which  will  now  be  mentioned. 

§  37.  Endothermic  Reactions  which  take  place 
at  Normal  Temperatures.  The  following  chemical 
reaction  is  endothermic : 

NaFAq+HClAq  =  NaClAq+HFAq   .    .    .    -2.3  Cal. 

Also  in  many  other  cases  heat  is  absorbed  if  the 
solution  of  an  acid  be  mixed  with  the  solution  of  a 
salt.  It  is  not  necessary,  however,  to  consider  only 
the  strictly  chemical  change,  since  the  distinction 
between  chemical  and  physical  processes  is  not  always 
clear,  and,  what  is  of  still  more  importance,  the 
theory  upon  which  the  principle  of  greatest  work  is 
based  holds  equally  good  for  alterations  in  the 
physical  condition.  The  existence  of  many  endother- 
mic physical  processes  which  take  place  spontane- 
ously may  be  readily  demonstrated. 

Freezing- mixtures.  Snow  and  sodium  chloride 
mixed  together  at  o°  give  a  liquid,  a  salt  solution,  the 
temperature  of  which  lies  a  number  of  degrees 


93 

below  o°.  Crystallized  sodium  sulphate  (Glauber's 
salt)  and  concentrated  hydrochloric  acid  when  mixed 
absorb  an  appreciable  quantity  of  heat. 

In  both  these  cases  the  action  is  spontaneous  and 
strongly  endothermic. 

The  Solution  of  Salts  in  Water.  Most  salts  dissolve 
in  water  with  the  absorption  of  heat.  However,  this 
action  is  self-inducing,  i.e.,  takes  place  of  its  own 
accord. 

REMARK.  Salts  which  form  crystalline  compounds  with 
water  usually  dissolve  in  water  with  the  absorption  of  heat 
only  when  they  are  introduced  in  the  form  of  the  com- 
pounds containing  the  same  number  of  molecules  of  water 
with  which  they  crystallize  at  ordinary  temperatures. 

The  Evaporation  of  Liquids.  Many  liquids  evap- 
orate at  normal  temperatures,  absorbing  at  the  same 
time  an  appreciable  quantity  of  heat,  known  as  the 
heat  of  vaporization.  Water,  alcohol,  and  ether  are 
such  liquids.  This  process  is  endothermic  and  takes 
place  spontaneously. 

§  38.  Mass  Action.  Very  often  an  element  C  can 
cause  the  decomposition  of  a  compound  AB — although 
A,  B  >  A,  C — if  the  quantity  of  C  is  very  great  in 
proportion  to  the  quantity  of  AB.  This  is  true  in  the 
case  of  double  decompositions. 

Examples,  i.  A  small  quantity  of  potassium 
chloride  is  decomposed  by  a  large  quantity  of  bro- 
mine, with  the  formation  of  potassium  bromide,  not- 
withstanding the  fact  that 

K,  Cl  =  105.5  Cal.,     while     K,  Br  =  +  95  Cal 


94 

2.  Ethyl  alcohol  and  acetic  acid  mixed  in  molecular 
proportion  form  ethyl  acetate,  but  only  two-thirds  of 
the  alcohol  and  acid  enter  into  this  reaction,  the  other 
third  remaining  in  the  form  of  the  unaltered  materials. 
If,    however,    more    alcohol    or    acid   be   added,    the 
quantity  of  the  ethyl  acetate  is  increased.      The  heat 
of  reaction  in  this  case  is  nearly  equal  to  zero. 

3.  Dilute   hydrochloric    acid  mixed  with   a    dilute 
solution   of  sodium  sulphate  partially  decomposes  the 
salt,   an  endothermic  reaction  taking  place,  and  this 
reaction  proceeds  further  if  more  acid  is  added. 

§  39.  Dissociation.  Compounds  which  are  formed 
at  ordinary  temperatures  by  an  exothermic  reaction 
are  generally  decomposed  at  very  much  higher  tem- 
peratures (comp.  §  32).  This  decomposition,  how- 
ever, is  an  endothermic  reaction. 

REMARK.  Investigations  of  the  phenomena  of  dissocia- 
tion were  first  carried  out  by  Georges  Aime  (1837)  and 
later  by  Henri  Sainte  Claire  DeVille  (1857). 

Examples.  Water,  hydrogen  chloride,  and 
carbon  dioxide  are  partially  decomposed  at  high  tem- 
peratures. Ammonium  chloride  and  many  other  am- 
monium salts  decompose  into  acid  and  ammonia-gas. 
Calcium  carbonate  gives  off  carbon  dioxide  on  heat- 
ing. The  so-called  efflorescence,  the  spontaneous  loss 
of  water  from  hydrated  salts,  may  be  considered  as  a 
dissociation  phenomenon. 

§  40.  The  Principle  of  Variable  Equilibrium. 
This  principle  includes  many  of  the  exceptions  to  the 
principle  of  greatest  work  which  have  been  mentioned. 

If  a  chemical  system  of  a  certain  form  changes  to 
another  form  by  a  reversible  process,  then  at  every 


95 

temperature  each  of  the  two  forms  will  be  present  in 
a  fixed  concentration.* 

If  the  transformation  of  the  form  A  into  the  form  B 
takes  place  with  the  evolution  of  heat,  then  an  increase 
of  temperature  will  cause  an  increase  in  the  quantity  of 
matter  in  the  form  A. 

If  A  changes  to  B  with  the  absorption  of  heat,  then 
an  increase  of  temperature  will  cause  an  increase  in  the 
quantity  of  matter  in  the  form  B. 

If  the  transformation  of  A  into  B  takes  place  with- 
out any  caloric  ejfect,  then  an  increase  in  temperature 
will  in  no  way  alter  the  distribution  of  the  system  be- 
tween the  two  forms  as  they  exist  at  normal  tempera- 
tures. 

REMARK.  This  principle  was  introduced  into  chemistry 
in  1884  by  Van't  Hoff. 

Examples.  Dissociation  Phenomena.  The  phe- 
nomena of  dissociation  mentioned  above  are  examples 
of  exothermic  reactions,  into  which,  however,  at 
higher  temperatures  endothermic  considerations  also 
enter.  Water  is  formed  from  hydrogen  and  oxygen 
with  the  evolution  of  a  large  quantity  of  heat;  at  high 
temperatures,  however,  a  part  of  the  water  dissociates 
according  to  the  equation 

2H,0  (vapor)  =  2H3  (gas)  +  O,  (gas)  ...   -  58  Cal. 
The  reaction 

CaO  +  CO2  =  CaC03 

*  Another  rule  applies  to  condensed  equilibrium  (see  §  45,  c). 


96 

is  exothermic,  but  at  higher  temperatures  the  reaction 
CaCO3  =  CaO  +  CO, 

takes  place,  and  this  is  endothermic:  —  30.8  Cal. 

Salt  Solutions.  Good  examples  are  also 
found  in  the  phenomena  accompanying  the  dissolving 
of  salts. 

When  a  saturated  solution  of  a  salt  (comp.  §  52)  is 
in  contact  with  the  salt,  the  system  (salt  +  water) 
exists  in  two  forms:  solid  salt  and  salt  solution. 

On  heating,  the  concentration  of  the  solution 
changes:  it  either  increases  or  decreases,  only  in 
special  cases  does  it  remain  constant. 

In  most  cases  the  concentration  increases  with  the 
temperature — for  example,  in  the  case  of  KNO,, 
Na2SO4ioH2O,  CuSO45H,O.  The  salts  dissolve  with 
the  absorption  of  heat,  an  endothermic  reaction  takes 
place,  and  as  a  result  of  this  reaction  that  form  of  the 
system  results  in  which  on  an  increase  of  temperature 
an  increased  quantity  of  the  reacting  substance  ap- 
pears (comp.  §  53,  Rem.  i). 

The  concentration  decreases  in  the  case  of  ethyl 
acetate  and  calcium  sulphate.  These  substances, 
whose  solution  in  water  is  an  exothermic  process, 
separate  from  the  solvent  on  an  increase  in  tempera- 
ture; that  form  of  the  system  which  results  from  an 
exothermic  action  decreases  in  quantity  when  the 
temperature  is  raised. 

The  concentration  of  a  saturated  solution  of  sodium 
chloride  is  but  very  slightly  affected  by  the  tempera- 
ture; the  heat  of  solution  of  this  salt  is  in  fact  very 
nearly  equal  to  zero. 


97 

Formation  of  Esters.  The  formation  of 
ethyl  acetate  and  water  from  ethyl  alcohol  and  acetic 
acid  is  a  strictly  chemical  example  of  a  reaction  which 
proceeds  without  caloric  effect.  At  normal  tempera- 
ture only  two-thirds  of  the  molecular  quantities  of  the 
mixed  substances  are  converted  into  the  second  form; 
at  high  temperatures  this  reaction  takes  place  very 
rapidly,  but  the  quantities  of  the  original  substances 
which  take  part  in  it  are  neither  greater  nor  less  than 
at  the  normal  temperature. 

REMARK.  The  principle  of  greatest  work,  if  viewed  from 
the  standpoint  of  the  principle  of  variable  equilibrium,  may, 
according  to  Van't  Hoff,  be  briefly  summed  up  as  follows: 
the  principle  of  greatest  work  is  the  more  correct  the  nearer 
the  temperature  of  the  reaction  approaches  the  absolute 
zero;  at  the  absolute  zero  it  is  of  universal  validity.  The 
frequent  confirmation  of  the  principle  at  normal  tempera- 
ture is  due  to  the  fact  that  this  temperature,  in  comparison 
with  the  highest  attainable  temperature,  is  not  far  removed 
from  the  absolute  zero. 

It  may  also  be  said  that  at  the  absolute  zero  no  disso- 
ciation takes  place. 

§  41.  Chemical  Equilibrium.  The  principle  of 
greatest  work  prescribes  the  complete  transformation 
of  reacting  substances,  and  requires  the  existence  of 
a  single  form  for  every  chemical  system — namely,  that 
form  which  is  produced  with  the  greatest  evolution  of 
heat. 

As  already  mentioned,  this  condition  is  contradicted 
by  a  number  of  circumstances,  including  the  endo- 
thermic  reactions  which  take  place  at  normal  tempera- 
tures, the  action  of  the  chemical  mass,  the  phenomenon 


98 

of  dissociation,  and  the  phenomenon  of  variable 
equilibrium. 

All  of  these  different  facts  may  be  summed  up  in 
one  general  theory,  called  the  theory  of  chemical 
equilibrium.  The  elements  of  this  theory  may  be 
stated  as  follows: 

Reacting  substances  do  not  enter  completely  into  a 
transformation,  the  quantity  of  unaltered  material 
depending  upon  the  relative  quantities  of  the  reacting 
substances,  upon  the  pressure,  and  upon  the  tempera- 
ture. 

The  elements  of  this  theory  may,  however,  be 
differently  stated.  A  chemical  system  can  exist  in 
more  than  a  single  form;  generally  the  different  forms 
exist  side  by  side,  and  the  system  is  distributed 
between  them  in  quantities  which  depend  upon  the 
mass  of  the  substances,  the  pressure,  and  the  tem- 
perature. 

The  expression  equilibrium  of  the  forms  is  derived 
from  the  fact  that  the  final  state  of  the  system  is 
to  be  considered,  not  as  a  state  of  rest,  but  as  a  state 
of  motion ;  a  continual  transformation  and  re-formation 
of  the  different  forms  taking  place,  but  the  actual 
quantity  of  each  of  the  forms  existing  at  any  one 
moment  being  always  the  same.  When  this  condition 
arises,  then  the  quantities  of  the  forms  stand  to  one 
another  in  a  fixed  relation. 

§  42.  Graphic  Representation.  If  AB  and  CD 
enter  into  a  double  decomposition,  then  in  the  final 
state  of  the  system,  besides  a  fixed  quantity  of  AC 
and  BD,  a  certain  quantity  of  AB  and  CD  will  also  be 


99 

present.     The  final  state  of  the  system  can  be  repre- 
sented by  the  equation 

AB  +  CD  =  x(AC  +  BD)  +  (i  -  *)(AB  +  CD). 

In  this  manner  both  the  qualitative  and  quantitative 
relations  may  be  shown.  If  also  the  formation  and 
re-formation  is  to  be  expressed,  then  the  equation  is 
written 

CDAC 


It  is  evident  that  both  simple  decompositions  and 
substitutions  can  be  represented  in  this  manner: 

AB  t;  A  +  B  ;     AB  +  C  ^  AC  +  B. 

Examples.  I.  The  elements  hydrogen  and 
oxygen  combine  to  form  water,  but  may  also  exist  in 
the  form  (hydrogen  -f-  oxygen).  At  high  tempera- 
tures both  forms  can  exist  side  by  side,  and  the  state 
of  the  system  may  be  thus  represented  : 


2H,  +  O,  =  2xU,0  +  (i  -  *X2H.+  O,). 

2.  Action  of  nitric  acid  on  sodium  sulphate: 

NaaS04Aq  +  2HN03Aq  ^  2NaNO3Aq  +  HaSO4Aq 
and 

Na,S04Aq  +  2HNO3Aq  =  f(H2SO4Aq  +  2NaNO9Aq) 
+  i(Na3S04Aq  +  2HNO3Aq). 

3.  The  colorless  nitrogen  tetroxide  decomposes  on 
increase     in     temperature    and    decrease    in  pressure, 
forming  the  colored  modification: 


100 


4.  Calcium  carbonate  on  heating  is  decomposed 
into  calcium  oxide  and  carbon  dioxide: 

CaCO3  ^  CaO  +  CO,. 

§  43.  Proof  of  the  Existence  of  Equilibrium 
between  Simultaneous  Reactions.  That  a  final 
state  of  equilibrium  must  exist  between  the  two  re- 
actions. 

Form  A  =  Form  B     and     Form  B  =  Form  A 

follows  from  the  fact — which  is  indeed  the  character- 
istic of  equilibrium  reactions — that  the  final  state  of 
the  system  is  independent  of  the  form  in  the  initial 
condition. 

When  ethyl  alcohol  is  mixed  with  acetic  acid  in 
molecular  quantities,  the  final  state  attained  is  the 
following: 

KC.H.O  +  C.H.O.)  +  KC,H,OCSHSO  +  H,O). 

The  same  result  is  obtained,  however,  when  ethyl 
acetate  and  water  are  mixed  in  molecular  quantities. 

From  this  it  is  evident  that  not  only  the  molecules 
C2H6O  and  C2H4O2  but  also  the  molecules  of  the  ester 
and  the  water  act  on  one  another.  And  there  is  no 
reason  for  believing  that  this  action  ceases  when  the 
permanent,  final  state  is  reached. 

With  relation  to  these  facts  equilibrium  reactions 
are  also  often  called  reciprocal  reactions  in  contradis- 
tinction to  reactions  which  proceed  only  in  one  direc- 
tion. Although  it  is  possible  that  all  reactions  are 
under  certain  conditions  reciprocal,  nevertheless  these 
conditions  have  not  been  observed  in  all  cases.  It  is 


101 

also  a  fact  that  in  many  cases  the  existence  of  a  recip- 
rocal reaction  at  all  temperatures  is  assumed  from  the 
observation  of  the  existence  of  such  a  reaction  at 
certain  definite  temperatures.  A  very  evident  disso- 
ciation of  water-vapor  can  be  observed  at  high  tem- 
peratures; at  lower  temperatures,  however,  a  dissocia- 
tion cannot  be  detected.  It  is  nevertheless  assumed 
that  it  exists,  although  the  quantity  of  the  dissociation- 
products  is  infinitely  small. 

§  44.  The  Three  Kinds  of  Chemical  Equilibrium. 

a.  Homogeneous  Equilibrium.     This  term  is  applied 
to  equilibrium  between  substances  which  form  physi- 
cally  homogeneous   mixtures,    viz.,  water- vapor  and 
oxyhydrogen-gas;    N2O4    and     2NO2;    Na,SO4Aq  -f- 
HNO.Aq  +  HNaSO4Aq  +  NaNO3Aq,  etc. 

b.  Heterogeneous  Equilibrium.     This  expression  is 
used    in   the   case  of  equilibrium  between  substances 
which  are  not  in  the  same  states  of  aggregation;  for 
example, 

CaCO,  (solid)  ^  CaO  (solid)  +  COa  (gas), 
KNO,  (solid)  ^  KNO,  (dissolved), 

NaaSO4ioHaO(sol.)^NaaSO49HQO(sol.)+HaO(vapor). 

c.  Condensed  Equilibrium.      This  denotes:   equilib- 
rium between  substances  which  are  all    solid    or   all 
liquid,    but   are  not   mixed;    or  part   solid   and   part 
liquid,  but  not  mixed. 

Examples.   Monoclinic  sulphur <""*  Qrthorhombic 
sulphur. 

NaaSO4ioH,O  (solid)  ^  NaaSO4  (sol.)  +  ioHaO  (liq.). 


IO2 

§  45-   Effect  of  Temperature  on  Equilibrium. 

a.  On  Homogeneous  Equilibrium.  The  state  of  a 
system  of  two  substances  which  are  in  equilibrium 
with  one  another,  at  a  certain  temperature  and  at  a 
certain  pressure,  is  determined  by  the  relative  quanti- 
ties of  both  forms  present. 

The  relation  of  the  two  substances  to  one  another 
is  further  dependent  upon  the  temperature  of  the  sys- 
tem and  stands  in  a  direct  relation  to  the  heat-toning* 
which  accompanies  the  transformation  of  the  one  form 
into  the  other. 

The  laws  which  govern  the  relation  between  the 
quantities  of  the  substances  entering  into  the  trans- 
formation and  the  temperature  and  heat  of  transfor- 
mation are  the  same  as  the  rules  given  under  the 
principle  of  variable  equilibrium  in  §40. 

REMARK.  In  the  case  of  homogeneous  equilibrium  the 
relative  quantities  of  both  forms  can  generally  be  deter- 
mined from  the  specific  gravity  of  the  system.  If  the 
weight  of  one  liter  of  nitrogen  tetroxide  at  a  certain  tem- 
perature and  pressure  be  determined, — it  being  known  what 
this  value  would  be  if  the  space  were  filled  with  N3O4,  and 
also  if  it  were  filled  with  NOa, — then  the  composition  of  a 
mixture  which  would  correspond  to  the  observed  weight 
can  be  calculated. 

In  the  case  of  reactions  between  solutions  of  acids  and 
salts  the  quantities  which  enter  into  the  transformations, 
and  also  the  equilibrium  relations,  can  be  calculated  from 
the  results  of  calorimetric,  volumetric,  and  optical  investiga- 
tions. J.  Thomsen  determined  the  heat  evolved  on  mixing 
solutions  of  salts  and  acids,  and,  by  comparing  this  heat- 

*  Heat-toning  is  the  thermal  effect  measured  in  calorimetric 
units. 


103 

toning  with  that  which  would  appear  if  the  decompositions 
were  complete,  was  able  to  calculate  the  quantities  of  sub- 
stances which  had  actually  undergone  decomposition.  W. 
Ostwald  determined  the  specific  gravities  and  indices  of 
refraction  of  mixed  solutions,  as  well  as  the  corresponding 
values  for  the  separate  solutions  of  the  salts,  acids,  and 
products  of  the  reactions,  and  used  these  values  for  calcu- 
lating the  extent  of  the  decomposition. 

There  are  also  other  special  methods. 

b.  Effect  of  Temperature  on  Heterogeneous  Equilib- 
rium. When  a  condensed  form  is  in  contact  with  a 
dilute  form, — a  solid  or  liquid  body  in  contact  with  a 
gas,  vapor,  or  solution, — the  equilibrium  of  the  system 
is  not  determined  by  a  certain  distribution  of  the  sys- 
tem between  two  forms,  but  by  a  fixed  concentration  of 
the  dilute  form.  If  the  latter  is  a  gas  or  a  vapor,  then 
this  fixed  concentration  is  manifested  through  a  certain 
pressure,  known  as  the  dissociation-pressure,  which  is 
independent  of  the  quantity  of  the  substance  existing 
in  the  condensed  form. 

The  concentration  increases  with  the  temperature  if 
the  heat-toning  of  the  transformation  of  the  condensed 
into  the  dilute  form  is  negative;  if  the  latter  is  positive, 
then  the  condensation  decreases  in  accordance  with  the 
principle  of  variable  equilibrium  (§  40) . 

An  example  is  furnished  by  the  decomposition  of  cal- 
cium carbonate,  which,  if  heated  in  an  inclosed  space, 
dissociates  into  calcium  oxide  and  carbon  dioxide  until 
the  gas  reaches  a  certain  pressure.  Other  examples  are 
furnished  by  hydrated  salts,  which  have  a  certain  vapor- 
tension,  depending  on  the  temperature;  and  also  by 
saturated  solutions  of  salts  (§  40). 


104 

c.  Effect  of  Temperature  on  Condensed  Equilibrium. 
At  a  fixed  pressure  this  type  of  equilibrium  occurs  at 
only  a  single  temperature,  and  the  quantities  of  the 
substances  appearing  in  the  coexistent  forms  are  indefi- 
nite; at  96°  rhombohedral  and  monoclinic  sulphur 
exist  side  by  side  in  arbitrary  quantities.  On  an  in- 
crease in  temperature  the  equilibrium  vanishes,  and  the 
change  of  one  form  into  the  other  takes  place  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  rule  given  in  §  40 ;  that  form  appear- 
ing which  is  produced  from  the  other  with  the  absorption 
of  heat. 

In  the  case  of  condensed  systems  the  conditions  are 
such  that  the  two  forms  can  only  coexist  at  a  single 
temperature,  above  which  one  form,  and  below  which 
the  other  form,  is  stable.  The  temperature  at  which 
both  forms  appear  is  called  the  temperature  of  trans- 
formation or  the  transformation-point. 

§  46.  Effect  of  Pressure  on  Equilibrium. 

a.  Effect  on  Homogeneous  Equilibrium.  When  a 
gaseous  homogeneous  mixture  of  reacting  substances 
has  attained  a  state  of  equilibrium  and  the  tempera- 
ture remains  constant,  an  increase  in  the  pressure 
causes  a  change  of  the  transformed  quantities,  and 
that  form  results  which  is  produced  from  the  other  by 
a  decrease  in  the  number  of  molecules. 

Briefly  stated,  the  system,  oh  an  increase  in  pres- 
sure, tends  to  pass  over  into  the  more  condensed 
form. 

Example. 

N9o4 1;  2  NO,. 


The  compression  of  this  system  causes  an  increase 
in  the  quantity  of  the  N3O4. 

A  special  case  is  illustrated  by  the  equimolecular 
reaction 


In  such  a  reaction  the  condition  of  equilibrium  is 
not  affected  by  the  pressure,  if  this  is  not  too  great. 

b.  Effect  of  Pressure  on  Heterogeneous  Equilibrium. 
When  the  dilute  form  is  a  gas,  an  increase  in  the 
pressure  at  constant  temperature  does  not  have  a 
permanent  effect  on  the  equilibrium: 

CaCO3  (solid)  ^  CaO  (solid)  +  COa  (gas). 

At  constant  temperature  an  increase  in  the  pressure 
of  the  carbon  dioxide  —  corresponding  to  an  increase 
in  the  concentration  of  the  carbon  dioxide  —  causes 
the  formation  of  CaCO,,  which  continues  until  the 
pressure  has  attained  its  original  value. 

The  same  behavior  has  been  observed  in  the  case 
of  hydrated  salts:  compression  of  the  vapor  causes  the 
recombination  of  the  vapor  with  the  dehydrated  salt. 

For  salts  which  are  in  contact  with  their  saturated 
solutions  the  rule  applies  that  an  increase  in  pres- 
sure increases  the  quantity  of  dissolved  material,  if 
the  total  volume  of  the  salt  and  the  water  required 
for  its  solution  is  greater  than  the  volume  of  the  solu- 
tion, or,  what  amounts  to  the  same  thing,  if  the 
process  o(  solution  is  accompanied  by  a  contraction  in 
volume. 

In  such  cases  the  rule  also  applies,  that  on  increase 


io6 

in  pressure  the  system  tends  to  pass  into  the  more 
condensed  form. 

c.  Effect  of  Pressure  on  Condensed  Equilibrium. 
In  cases  of  equilibrium  of  this  nature  the  relation 
between  the  quantities  of  the  two  forms  is  not  directly 
dependent  on  the  pressure,  if  the  temperature  is  con- 
stant, since  at  the  temperature  of  transformation  the 
two  forms  exist  side  by  side  in  arbitrary  quantities. 
The  temperature  of  transformation,  however,  is  altered 
by  an  increase  in  pressure,  and  is  in  most  cases 
lowered. 

§  47.  Effect  of  Chemical  Mass  on  Equilibrium. 
The  influence  of  this  factor  is  evident  only  in  the  case 
of  homogeneous  equilibrium.  An  increase  in  the 
quantity  of  one  of  the  reacting  substances  increases 
the  products  of  that  reaction  which  is  promoted  by 
the  presence  of  the  substance  added. 

In  the  reaction 

Alcohol  -f-  acid  <"""*  Ester  -|-  water 

the  formation  of  the  ester  is  promoted  by  an  increase 
in  the  quantity  of  the  acid  and  also  by  an  increase  in 
the  quantity  of  the  alcohol.  The  addition  of  water, 
on  the  contrary,  retards  the  formation  of  the  ester. 

REMARK  i.  If  the  action  of  one  of  the  substances  is 
impeded,  this  is  equivalent  to  a  decrease  in  its  mass.  For 
example:  In  the  formation  of  esters  the  reaction  is  pro- 
moted by  leading  a  current  of  hydrogen  chloride  through 
the  mixture  of  acid  and  alcohol.  The  hydrogen  chloride 
combines  with  the  water,  and  the  action  of  the  latter  on  the 
ester  is  thus  checked. 

REMARK  2.  The  idea  of  mass  action  was  brought  for- 
ward by  Berthollet  in  the  beginning  of  the  present  century. 


107 

In  later  chemistry  the  first  important  application  of  this 
idea  was  made  by  Guldberg  and  Waage  (1867). 

§  48.  Analogy  between  Changes  in  Physical  and 
Chemical  State.  An  insight  into  the  laws  of  chemical 
equilibrium  is  obtained  by  a  consideration  of  the  condi- 
tions under  which  a  substance  changes  its  physical  state. 

Water  can  be  solid,  liquid  and  vaporous,  and  the 
transformation  of  one  of  these  forms  into  the  others  is 
accompanied  by  certain  thermal  effects.  These  trans- 
formations are  influenced  by  temperature  and  pressure, 
and  they  are  reversible;  a  change  in  condition,  caused 
by  an  alteration  in  pressure  or  temperature,  is  repro- 
duced when  the  temperature  and  pressure  are  again  re- 
established. 

A  state  of  equilibrium  exists  in  the  case  of  the  physi- 
cal forms:  at  o°  ice  is  in  equilibrium  with  water,  below 
o°  ice  is  in  equilibrium  with  vapor,  above  o°  water  is  in 
equilibrium  with  vapor. 

Increase  in  temperature  leads  to  the  appearance  of 
that  physical  form  the  production  of  which  is  accompa- 
nied by  the  absorption  of  heat  (principle  of  variable 
equilibrium,  §  40).  Ice  on  heating  is  converted  into 
water.  In  this  transformation  a  considerable  quantity 
of  heat,  called  the  latent  heat  of  fusion,  is  absorbed. 

Water  on  heating  forms  vapor  of  increasing  density 
and  pressure;  this  vapor  is  formed  with  the  absorption 
of  heat,  the  latent  heat  of  vaporization. 

The  system 

Water  -f-  Vapor 

is  in  equilibrium  according  to  the  equation 
Water  ^~>  Vapor, 


io8 

and  furnishes  a  case  analogous  to  that  of  heteroge- 
neous equilibrium.  The  state  of  equilibrium  is  such 
that  at  a  certain  temperature  the  density  and  pressure 
of  the  vapor  have  a  fixed  and  definite  value.  Com- 
pression does  not  permanently  affect  these  values, 
since  when  this  occurs  the  vapor  changes  to  liquid 
water,  and  the  original  pressure  is  again  established. 
A  condensed  equilibrium  exists  at  o°  in  the  case  of 

Ice  ^  Water. 

By  an  increase  in  pressure  the  temperature  of  trans- 
formation (corresponding  in  this  case  to  the  freezing 
point)  is  lowered. 

§  49.   Berthollet's  Law. 

Principle.  I.  When  two  substances  A  and  B,  each 
of  which  can  enter  into  a  reaction  with  a  third  sub- 
stance, C,  are  present  in  a  homogeneous  mixture 
together  with  C,  then  there  will  exist  in  the  final  state 
neither  AC  only  nor  BC  only,  but  AC  and  BC  will 
occur  in  a  state  of  equilibrium,  their  relative  quantities 
depending  on  the  mutual  affinities,  as  well  as  on  the 
chemical  masses,  of  A  and  B. 

2.  If  the  substances  AC  and  BC  are  either  insoluble 
or  only  very  slightly  soluble  in  the  liquid,  then  they 
will  separate  out,  and  the  substances  which  remain 
dissolved  in  the  liquid  will  tend  to  establish  a  new 
state  of  equilibrium,  thereby  causing  the  formation  of 
fresh  quantities  of  AC  or  BC. 

BertJiollef s  First  Laiv.  When  dissolved  substances 
by  their  mutual  action  bring  about  the  formation  of 
an  insoluble  substance,  then  the  reaction  will  proceed 
until  the  reacting  substances  are  entirely  decomposed. 


Example.  Silver  nitrate  and  hydrochloric  acid 
are  completely  converted  into  silver  chloride  and  nitric 
acid. 

Bertholle? s  Second  Law.  When  the  reacting  sub- 
stances form  a  volatile  compound,  then  the  reaction 
proceeds,  until  the  Original  substances  have  undergone 
complete  transformation,  the  volatile  substance  being 
continuously  eliminated. 

Example.  Calcium  carbonate  is  completely  de- 
composed by  dilute  hydrochloric  acid,  carbon  dioxide 
being  formed;  sodium  chloride  is  completely  decom- 
posed by  sulphuric  acid,  with  the  formation  of 
hydrogen  chloride. 

REMARK.  These  laws  were  published  in  "  Essai  de  sia- 
tique  chimique  "  (1804). 

Explanation.  Berthollet's  laws  correspond 
with  modern  theory,  since  they  state  the  existence  of 
an  equilibrium  between  two  forms,  and  since  they  in- 
troduce the  idea  of  mass  action  into  the  consideration. 
The  influence  of  temperature  and  pressure,  however, 
are  not  taken  into  account,  and  in  addition  to  this  the 
thermal  effect  of  the  alteration  in  form  is  entirely  neg- 
lected. 

Nevertheless  these  laws  are  of  great  practical  value, 
since  they  include  many  reactions  which  take  place 
under  normal  conditions  and  since  they  in  most  cases 
apply  to  the  reactions,  which  are  met  with  in  the  ordi- 
nary course  of  laboratory  work.  They  are  lacking, 
however,  in  logical  rigor,  since  the  conditions  of  in- 
solubility and  volatility  with  respect  to  the  liquid  are 
not  sharply  defined.  From  the  first  law  it  cannot  be 
predicted  that  AgCN  will  dissolve  in  KCN,  nor  that 


no 

AgCl  will  be  decomposed  by  KCN.  The  second  law 
does  not  explain  why  sulphide  of  iron,  but  not  sul- 
phide of  copper,  is  decomposed  by  hydrochloric  acid; 
the  first  law  furnishes  no  explanation  as  to  why,  in  a 
mixture  of  ferrous  chloride  and  cupric  chloride  dis- 
solved in  acidified  water,  sulphide  of  copper  and  not 
sulphide  of  iron  is  precipitated  by  hydrogen  sulphide. 
Problems  of  this  sort,  however,  can  often  be  solved 
with  the  help  of  the  principle  of  greatest  work. 

§  50.  Watt's  Principle.  When  a  space,  in  which 
at  two  points  different  but  constant  temperatures  are 
maintained,  contains  a  liquid  at  these  points,  then  the 
vapor  of  the  liquid  moves  to  the  point  of  lower  tempera- 
ture ;  at  this  point  it  condenses,  and  in  the  end  the 
liquid  will  be  found  only  at  this  point  of  lower  tem- 
perature, the  space  then  being  filled  with  vapor, 
the  pressure  of  A\hich  is  equal  to  the  maximum 
vapor  pressure  of  the  liquid  at  the  lower  tempera- 
ture. 

Example.  If  water  be  heated  to  boiling,  in  a 
still  which  is  connected  with  a  receiver  cooled  to  o°, 
the  vapor  passes  over  into  the .  receiver;  there  it  will 
be  transformed  almost  completely  into  liquid,  and 
finally  all  the  water  will  have  passed  into  the  receiver, 
and  the  space  within  the  still  will  be  filled  with  vapor 
at  a  pressure  of  4  mm. 

Explanation.  Water  at  100°  is  in  equilib- 
rium with  water  vapor  having  a  pressure  equal  to  I 
atmosphere;  water  at  o°  is  in  equilibrium  with  vapor 
the  density  of  which  corresponds  to  a  pressure  of 
4  mm. 

In  A  the  vapor  pressure  has  a  constant  value  equal 


Ill 

to  I  atmosphere,  in  B,  however,  this  value  cannot 
exceed  4  mm.  Since  the  tendency  of  the  vapor  from 
both  vessels  is  to  fill  the  space  offered  to  it,  the  cool 
vapor  is  forced  back  by  the  hot  vapor,  since  the 
pressure  of  the  latter  is  much  greater  than  that  of  the 
former.  The  hot  vapor  therefore  passes  into  B,  where 
it  is  mostly  converted  into  liquid,  since  in  B  only 
vapor  having  a  pressure  of  4  mm  can  exist.  It  is 


1  Athm 


100?- 


evident  that  this  transfer  will  cease  only  when  all 
liquid  has  disappeared  from  A,  and  when  a  pressure 
of  4  mm  exists  at  all  points  in  the  enclosed  space. 

Application  . 

Distillation,  A  liquid  is  separated  from  a  non- 
volatile substance  with  which  it  is  mixed,  by  heating 
the  mixture  in  a  vessel,  and  connecting  this  vessel 
with  a  cooled  receiver.  The  vapor  of  the  volatile 
liquid  passes  over  into  the  receiver  and  there  con- 
denses, while  the  non-volatile  substance  remains  in 
the  distilling  vessel. 

In  this  manner  water  can  be  separated  from  dis- 
solved salts. — Thus  also  nitric  acid  is  separated  from 
the  mixture  which  results  on  adding  sulphuric  acid  to 
sodium  nitrate,  this  operation,  causing  the  complete 


112 

decomposition  of  the  mixed  materials;  since  the 
equilibrium  existing  in  the  mixture  first  formed  is 
destroyed  by  the  removal  of  nitric  acid,  and  the  ten- 
dency towards  the  formation  of  a  new  state  of  equilib- 
rium results  in  the  formation  of  fresh  quantities  of 
nitric  acid. 

Fractional  Distillation.  A  mixture  of  liquids,  when 
heated  in  a  distillation  apparatus,  produces  vapor, 
which  at  first  consists  chiefly  of  the  vapor  of  the  most 
volatile  liquid.  As  a  result  this  substance  is  present 
in  the  distillate  in  a  purer  state  than  in  the  original 
mixture.  If  the  vapor  which  has  condensed  to  a 
liquid  be  again  distilled,  then  the  first  portion  of  this 
distillate  will  be  a  purer  product  than  the  liquid 
obtained  in  the  previous  operation.  By  fractional 
distillation,  however,  an  absolutely  pure  product  can- 
not be  obtained  ;  first,  because  by  each  distillation 
the  quantity  of  admixed  substance  becomes  indeed 
smaller,  but  does  not  entirely  disappear;  secondly, 
since  in  many  cases  a  mixture  is  finally  formed,  which 
without  alteration  in  composition  may  be  converted 
into  vapor  and  again  condensed.  This  takes  place 
because  the  boiling-point  of  this  mixture  is  both  lower 
than  the  boiling-point  of  its  components  and  also 
lower  than  that  of  a  mixture  of  different  composition. 
The  result  is  that  on  distillation  first  the  mixture 
having  the  lowest  boiling-point  and  later  the  other 
mixtures  pass  over  into  the  distillate.  The  same 
behavior  is  observed  in  cases  where  a  certain  mixture 
has  a  boiling-point  which  is  higher  than  that  of  its 
components  and  than  that  of  a  mixture  of  different 
composition.  In  such  cases  the  more  volatile  mix- 


tures  first  pass  over,  and  the  least  volatile  remain 
behind  in  the  distilling  vessel. 

The  occurrence  of  such  mixtures  of  constant  com- 
position as  are  mentioned  above  is  the  explanation  of 
why  ethyl  alcohol  cannot  be  separated  from  water  by 
fractional  distillation,  a  mixture  containing  94  per  cent 
of  alcohol  and  6  per  cent  of  water  distilling  over. 
It  is  also  impossible  to  concentrate  aqueous  hydro- 
chloric acid  beyond  a  certain  point,  the  concentration 
of  the  vapor  continually  approaching  that  of  the  liquid 
remaining  in  the  retort,  until  finally  the  vapor  and 
liquid  have  the  same  composition,  this  composition 
remaining  unaltered  on  further  distillation. 

The  composition  of  the  unaltered  mixture  passing 
over  is  dependent  on  the  pressure,  and  therefore  such 
a  mixture  can  not  be  considered  a  chemical  com- 
pound. 

A  very  important  instance  of  fractional  distillation 
is  found  in  the  purification  of  mineral  oils  by  distilla- 
tion. 

Liquefaction  of  Gases  under  their  own  Pressure.  If 
one  arm  of  a  closed  tube  bent  at  an  angle  in  the  middle 
contains  crystals  of  chlorine  hydrate  (Cl2ioH2O),  and 
the  other  arm  be  placed  in  a  cooling  mixture,  then,  if  the 
arm  containing  the  chlorine  hydrate  be  cautiously 
heated,  chlorine  will  be  evolved  and  will  pass  over  into 
the  cooler  end.  If  an  excess  of  the  gas  is  present,  a 
point  will  be  reached  where  the  pressure  of  the  gaseous 
chlorine  slightly  exceeds  its  maximum  pressure  at  the 
temperature  of  the  cooling  mixture,  and  the  chlorine 
will  therefore  liquefy  in  that  end  of  the  tube.  From 


this  point  distillation  will  continue,  in  accordance  with 
Watt's  principle. 

Ammonia-gas  can  also  be  liquefied  by  a  similar 
process,  the  solid  compound,  ammonium  silver  chlo- 
ride, being  heated  in  a  closed  tube,  one  end  of  which 
dips  into  a  freezing-mixture. 

The  temperature  of  the  freezing-mixture  must,  of 
course,  be  lower  than  the  critical  temperature  of  the 
gas. 

Applications  of  the  Theory  of  Points  of  Transforma- 
tion. As  has  been  already  stated,  a  substance  which 
is  in  contact  with  its  vapor  in  an  inclosed  space  in 
which  more  than  one  temperature  exists,  tends  to 
pass  to  that  form  of  the  system  in  which  the  vapor 
has  the  lowest  pressure.  Further,  when  more  than 
one  form  can  exist  at  the  lowest  temperature,  the 
system  tends  to  assume  that  form  the  vapor  pressure 
of  which  is  the  lowest.  Liquid  water  can,  under  cer- 
tain conditions,  exist  below  o°,  in  contact  with  vapor 
having  a  definite  temperature  and  pressure.  But  ice 
also  is  in  equilibrium  with  vapor  below  o°.  For  every 
temperature  below  o°,  however,  the  vapor  pressure  of 
water  is  greater  than  that  of  ice.  Therefore,  when 
ice  and  liquid  water  coexist  at  any  temperature 
below  o°,  the  vapor  will  distill  from  the  water  to  the 
ice,  and  will  be  transformed  into  ice.  Also  above  o° 
ice  and  water  cannot  form  a  stable  system  (comp. 

§48). 

At  o°,  however,  the  vapor  of  both  water  and  ice 
has  the  same  density  and  the  same  pressure;  therefore 
at  this  temperature  the  coexistence  of  both  forms  is 


possible,  while  at  higher  temperatures  only  one  form 
is  stable. 

The  freezing-point  of  water  is  therefore  the  trans- 
formation-point of  the  condensed  equilibrium: 

Ice  (+  vapor)  ~^_  Water  (+  vapor). 

By  a  similar  course  of  reasoning  the  conclusion  may 
be  reached  that  at  a  certain  temperature  rhombo- 
hedral  and  monoclinic  sulphur  can  exist  side  by  side, 
since  above  this  temperature  the  one  only,  below 
this  temperature  the  other  only,  of  the  two  forms  is 
stable. 

§51.  Watt's  Principle  applied  to  Matter  at  Nor- 
mal Temperature.  The  soundness  of  Watt's  law  is 
established  by  two  facts.  First:  A  condensed  sub- 
stance constitutes  with  its  vapor  a  stable  system,  since 
a  certain  pressure  and  density  correspond  to  every 
definite  temperature.  Secondly:  No  equilibrium  exists 
if  two  systems  of  different  density  and  different  pressure 
are  present  in  the  same  inclosed  space;  the  vapor, 
under  such  conditions,  passing  from  the  region  of 
higher  pressure  to  the  region  of  lower  pressure. 

In  the  previous  paragraph  those  cases  were  consid- 
ered where  the  differences  in  density  and  pressure  were 
caused  by  differences  in  temperature.  It  is  evident, 
however,  that  the  transfer  of  matter  in  the  form  of 
vapor  can  also  occur  when  the  differences  of  vapor  pres- 
sure are  due  to  other  causes.  The  principle  of  Watt 
may  be  still  further  expanded,  and  may  be  stated  as 
follows: 

When  in  any  given  space  there  are  two  centres, 
characterized  by  a  difference  in  pressure  of  the  vapor 


n6 

of  one  and  the  same  substance  in  contact  with  a  con- 
densed form  of  this  substance,  the  vapor  of  the  sub- 
stance will  pass  from  the  centre  of  higher  to  the  centre 
of  lower  pressure. 

A  tendency  to  establish  an  equality  of  pressure  exists 
in  the  system  comprising  the  two  centres. 

Example.  If  pure  water  and  a  salt  solution  are 
contained  in  an  inclosed  space,  water  vapor  will  pass 
from  the  pure  water  to  the  solution. 

Application. 

Hygroscopic  Salts  and  Acids.  By  hygroscopic  salts 
and  acids  are  meant  such  substances  as  are  strongly 
soluble  in  water;  their  saturated  solution  is  in  equi- 
librium with  vapor  the  pressure  of  which  is  much 
lower  than  that  of  pure  water  at  the  same  tempera- 
ture. When  water  is  contained  in  an  inclosed  space 
in  which  a  substance  of  this  nature  is  also  present, 
vapor  passes  from  the  water  to  the  substance,  since  a 
small  quantity  of  water  brought  into  contact  with  this 
substance  forms  on  its  surface  a  very  concentrated 
solution;  this  solution  has  a  very  low  vapor  pressure 
and  constitutes  a  centre  of  low  pressure,  to  which  the 
vapor  of  the  pure  water  continually  passes,  i.e.,  dis- 
tills over  at  normal  temperature. 

Since  the  vapor  pressure  of  all  salt  solutions  is  lower 
than  that  of  pure  water,  such  solutions  will  therefore 
attract  to  them  the  vapor  of  pure  water.  The  vapor 
pressures  of  solutions  of  difficultly  soluble  substances 
are  only  very  slightly  lower  than  that  of  water;  the  dis- 
tillation will  therefore  take  place  very  slowly. 

The  atmosphere  always  contains  water  vapor,  the 


density  and  pressure  of  which  vary  greatly  with 
different  localities  and  at  different  times.  If  a  salt 
solution  be  exposed  to  the  air  it  absorbs  water  vapor 
if  its  own  vapor  pressure  be  lower  than  that  of  the 
water  vapor  in  the  atmosphere :  in  such  cases  the  solu- 
tion is  said  to  exert  a  hygroscopic  action.  The 
hygroscopic  action  of  very  soluble  salts  is  consider- 
able. On  the  surface  of  such  substances  the  moist  air 
forms  a  film,  consisting  of  a  very  concentrated,  satu- 
rated solution,  which  produces  a  centre  of  low  vapor 
pressure.  As  soon  as  this  centre  is  created,  the  water 
vapor  of  the  atmosphere,  the  pressure  of  which  ordi- 
narily exceeds  that  of  the  salt  solution,  passes  to  this 
centre.  Fresh  quantities  of  the  solution  are  formed, 
and  this  remains  saturated  and  has  a  very  low  vapor 
pressure,  so  long  as  an  excess  of  the  undissolved  salt 
remain^.  When  the  salt  has  completely  dissolved, 
then  the  solution  continues  to  absorb  water  vapor 
until  the  dilution  reaches  the  point  where  the  vapor 
pressure  of  the  solution  is  equal  to  that  of  the 
atmosphere. 

REMARK.  These  considerations  do  not  apply  in  the 
case  of  hygroscopic  action  of  a  purely  chemical  nature,  as 
for  example  that  of  P2OB.  P3OB  is  not  in  equilibrium  with 
water  vapor  at  any  pressure,  since  it  forms  with  it  a  com- 
pound H3PO4.  It  maybe  said,  however,  that  P2O6  repre- 
sents a  centre  the  vapor  pressure  of  which  is  equal  to  zero. 
The  same  is  true  for  anhydrous  calcium  chloride;  the  first 
hygroscopic  action  of  this  salt  being  confined  to  the  forma- 
tion of  the  hydrated  salt,  CaCla.6HaO,  the  salt  in  the  mean- 
time constituting  a  centre  with  the  vapor  pressure  zero; 
later  a  saturated  solution  is  formed. 

The    saturated    solutions    of    slightly   soluble    sub- 


stances  do  not  exert  any  hygroscopic  action,  their 
vapor  pressures  being  greater  than  the  pressure  of  the 
water  vapor  of  the  atmosphere.  Such  solutions  lose 
water  vapor  until  no  more  water  remains. 

The  Deliquescence  of  Solid  Substances  in  the  Air.  It 
is  now  not  difficult  to  determine  what  substances  de- 
liquesce in  the  air.  They  are  those  substances  the  sat- 
urated solutions  of  which  at  normal  temperatures  have 
a  vapor  pressure  less  than  the  pressure  of  the  atmos- 
pheric water  vapor;  if  their  vapor  pressure  is  greater 
than  the  vapor  pressure  of  the  atmospheric  water,  then 
the  substances  do  not  deliquesce,  but,  on  the  contrary, 
when  they  are  moist  they  dry  in  the  air. 

In  general,  therefore,  deliquescence  is  a  property  of 
readily  soluble  substances. 

Potassium  carbonate  deliquesces,  because  a  trace  of 
water  forms  with  it  a  small  quantity  of  a  saturated  and 
very  concentrated  solution  having  a  very  low  vapor  pres- 
sure, more  water  vapor  being  continually  absorbed  by 
this  solution.  Potassium  sulphate,  on  the  contrary, 
does  not  deliquesce,  since,  although  it  may  perhaps  be 
already  moist,  it  can  form  only  a  very  dilute  solution 
the  vapor  pressure  of  which  is  greater  than  the  tension 
of  the  atmospheric  water  vapor,  and  therefore  the  sul- 
phate will  lose  water  vapor  in  the  air. 

Pure  sodium  chloride  is  but  slightly  soluble  and 
does  not  deliquesce.  Commercial  sodium  chloride, 
however,  generally  contains  small  quantities  of  very 
soluble  magnesium  chloride,  and  since  this  latter  sub- 
stance deliquesces,  the  sodium  chloride  itself  appears 
to  be  hygroscopic. 

Sodium  nitrate  (Chili  saltpeter)  is,  at  normal  tern- 


peratures,  very  readily  soluble  in  water,  potassium 
nitrate  (potassium  saltpeter)  but  very  slightly.  The 
Chili  saltpeter  is  so  hygroscopic  that  it  cannot  be  used 
in  the  manufacture  of  gunpowder,  while  potassium 
saltpeter  is  very  well  suited  to  this  purpose.  The 
difference  in  solubility  of  the  two  salts  is  the  basis  of 
the  method  for  preparing  potassium  nitrate  from 
sodium  nitrate  according  to  the  reaction : 

NaNO3  +  KC1  =  KNO3  +  NaCl. 

Hot  solutions  of  NaNO,  and  KC1  are  mixed  and 
boiled,  the  potassium  nitrate  remaining  dissolved  in 
the  hot  water.  On  cooling  it  crystallizes  out,  since  it 
is  only  slightly  soluble  in  cold  water.  The  solubility 
of  sodium  chloride  in  hot  and  cold  water  is,  however, 
about  the  same;  the  sodium  chloride  therefore  remains 
in  solution.  The  same  conditions  that  make  potassium 
saltpeter  suitable  for  the  manufacture  of  gunpowder 
also  make  it  possible  to  prepare  this  saltpeter  from 
sodium  nitrate  and  potassium  chloride. 

The  Efflorescence  of  Hydrated  Salts.  As  already 
stated,  a  hydrated  salt  is  at  a  given  temperature  in 
equilibrium  with  water  vapor  of  a  definite  density  and 
pressure.  For  every  salt,  as  for  pure  water,  there  is 
a  certain  characteristic  table  of  vapor  pressures.  A 
hydrated  salt  at  a  certain  temperature  therefore  repre- 
sents a  centre  of  definite  vapor  tension. 

When  at  normal  temperature  the  vapor  tension  of 
the  salt  exceeds  that  of  the  atmospheric  water  vapor, 
then  the  crystals  will  lose  water  in  the  air  and  will 
effloresce.  If,  however,  the  vapor  tension  of  the 
crystals  is  exceeded  by  that  of  the  atmospheric  vapor, 


120 

then  the  crystals  will  lose  no  water,  or,  as  it  may  be 
more  correctly  stated,  the  water  lost  will  be  imme- 
diately replaced  by  the  atmospheric  vapor,  and  the 
crystals  will  not  effloresce. 

Example.  Sodium  sulphate  (Glauber's  salt)  efflo- 
resces, calcium  sulphate  (gypsum)  does  not  effloresce. 
If  fresh  crystals  of  both  salts  are  exposed  to  the  air, 
their  identity  can,  after  a  short  time,  be  readily 
determined,  since  the  first  will,  but  the  second  will 
not,  have  effloresced. 

REMARK  2.  In  the  above  considerations  it  is  assumed 
that  the  relative  amount  of  water  in  the  air  is  nearly  con- 
stant. It  is  clear,  however,  that  when  the  amount  of  water 
is  small  many  substances  will  not  deliquesce,  but  will  efflo- 
resce, while  when  the  amount  of  water  is  large  the  same  sub- 
stances will  deliquesce  and  not  effloresce. 


CHAPTER  V. 
SOLUTIONS. 

§52.  Definitions.  Many  substances  can  form  with 
water  a  homogeneous  liquid  mixture;  a  mixture  of 
this  sort  is  called  a  solution. 

REMARK.  Water  is  not  the  only  liquid  which  can  dis- 
solve substances  ;  in  this  book,  however,  chiefly  aqueous 
solutions  will  be  considered. 

A  solution  is  saturated  at  a  certain  temperature  if, 
when  brought  in  contact  with  the  substance  a  quan- 
tity of  which  it  already  contains,  no  further  quantities 
of  the  substance  pass  into  the  solution.  If  the  solu- 
tion contains  more  of  the  substance  than  is  required  to 
form  a  saturated  solution,  then  the  solution  is  super- 
saturated. Supersaturation  can  only  occur  when  the 
solution  is  not  in  contact  with  solid  particles  of  the  dis- 
solved substance;  since  this  would  immediately  cause 
the  separation  of  a  part  of  the  substance  contained  in 
the  solution,  and  the  strength  of  the  solution  would  be 
reduced. 

A  saturated  solution  of  a  substance  in  contact  with 
the  same  substance  in  the  undissolved  state  represents, 
at  a  constant  temperature,  a  system  of  stable  equilib- 
rium. With  most  substances  the  quantity  of  material 
which  can  be  dissolved  is  greater  the  higher  the  tem- 

121 


122 

perature.  There  are  other  substances,  however,  the 
solubilities  of  which  decrease  with  an  increase  in  tem- 
perature. 

Examples.  Potassium  nitrate,  sodium  nitrate, 
sodium  sulphate,  and  many  other  salts  are  more  solu- 
ble in  warm  water  than  in  cold.  Calcium  sulphate 
and  ethyl  acetate,  on  the  contrary,  are  least  soluble 
in  hot  solutions.  Sodium  chloride  is  about  equally 
soluble  in  cold  and  warm  water. 

§  53.  General  Laws  of  Solubility.  The  coefficient 
of  solubility  of  a  substance  is  the  number  of  grams  of 
the  substance  which  at  a  given  temperature  will  dis- 
solve in  100  grams  of  water. 

For  the  relation  between  solubility,  temperature, 
and  heat  of  solution  see  §  40. 

REMARK  i.  It  should  be  noted  that  the  expression  *  heat 
of  solution  '  mentioned  in  paragraph  40  denotes  the  quantity 
of  heat  which  is  evolved  when  a  substance  dissolves  to 
form  an  almost  saturated  solution,  corresponding  therefore 
to  the  heat  of  solution  in  nearly  saturated  solution. 

The  solubility  of  solids  and  liquids  is  only  very 
slightly  affected  even  by  very  great  pressures.  Com- 
pare §  46. 

REMARK  2.  The  relations  between  solubility  and  pres- 
sure, and  between  solubility  and  temperature,  only  hold 
when  the  water  and  the  dissolved  substance  do  not  mix  in 
all  proportions.  Alcohol,  for  example,  has  no  coefficient  of 
solubility,  since  it  mixes  with  water  in  all  proportions. 

Gases,  which  are  but  slightly  soluble  in  water,  fol- 
low the  law  of  Henry;  their  solubility  at  a  fixed  tem- 
perature is  proportional  to  the  pressure. 

§  54.  Solubility  of  Hydrates.      Salts    containing 


133 

water  of  crystallization  conform  to  the  rule  that  each 
hydrate  has  its  particular  solubility.  It  is  therefore 
possible  for  a  solution  to  be  saturated  with  respect  to 
several  different  substances,  namely,  to  different 
hydrates.  A  concentrated  solution  of  sodium  sulphate, 
prepared  at  40°,  and  afterwards  cooled  to  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  room,  is  not  only  saturated  with  respect 
to  (i.e.,  deposits  crystals  not  only  on  contact  with) 
NaaSO4ioH,O,  but  also  with  respect  to  Na,SO47HaO. 
This  fact  makes  it  difficult  to  determine  in  what 
state  a  dissolved  salt  is  present  in  a  solution.  This, 
however,  is  certain :  that  one  hydrate  in  contact  with 
the  solution  represents  a  system  of  stable  equilibrium. 

REMARK.  The  relation  between  the  solubility  of  a  salt 
and  the  temperature  is  generally  represented  by  a  diagram, 
in  which  the  temperatures  appear  as  abscissas  and  the  solu- 
bilities as  ordinates.  In  such  a  diagram  the  solubilities  are 
not  those  of  hydrates,  but  of  quantities  of  anhydrous  salts 
present  in  100  parts  of  water.  The  solubility  is  often  taken 
as  the  quantity  of  anhydrous  salt  which  is  present  in  100 
parts  of  solution.  In  the  diagram  on  page  124  the  coefficient 
of  solubility  is,  however,  the  one  first  mentioned. 

§  55.  Osmosis.  If  a  solution  is  contained  in  a 
vessel,  through  the  walls  of  which  water,  but  not  the 
dissolved  substance,  can  pass,  and  the  vessel  is  placed 
in  water,  then  water  will  pass  from  the  outside 
through  the  walls  of  the  vessel  into  the  solution 
(osmosis). 

The  property  of  partial  permeability  is  possessed 
by  many  vegetable  and  animal  membranes;  but 
osmosis  has  been  most  accurately  studied  by  the  use 
pf  artificially  prepared  semipermeable  membranes. 


I24 


The  passage  of  water  through  the  walls  of  the  ves- 
sel can  be  prevented  by  applying  a  pressure  to  the 
solution.  Such  a  pressure,  in  equilibrium  with  the 


10 


20 


30 


70 


ao 


40  50  60 

TEMPERATURE 

force  exerted  by  the  water  in  passing  into  the  solution, 
is  equal  to  the  osmotic  pressure. 

The  osmotic  pressure  increases  with  the  concentra- 
tion and  temperature  of  the  solution. 

§  56.  Osmotic  Phenomena  in  Dilute  Solutions. 
If  a  solution  is  contained  in  a  cylinder  into  one  end 
of  which  a  piston  is  fitted,  the  other  end  being  closed 


100 


125 

by  a  semipermeable  membrane  and  surrounded  by 
water,  the  solution  may  be  compared  to  a  gas  which 
is  contained  in  a  cylinder  closed  at  one  end,  and  kept 
in  equilibrium  with  the  atmosphere  by  a  frictionless 
piston  at  the  other.  If  the  piston  be  raised,  then  the 
dissolved  substance  expands, — that  is,  water  passes  in 
through  the  membrane  from  the  outside, — the  volume 
of  the  solution  increases,  and  the  osmotic  pressure 
falls.  If  the  piston  be  now  pressed  into  the  cylinder, 
then  water  passes  out  through  the  membrane,  the 
volume  of  the  solution  diminishes,  and  the  osmotic 
pressure  becomes  greater.  If  the  system  be  heated, 
and  the  piston  be  held  at  one  position,  then  the 
pressure  on  the  piston  must  be  increased,  and  the 
osmotic  pressure  becomes  correspondingly  higher. 

Both  concentrated  and  dilute  solutions  are  in  this 
respect  analogous  to  gases.  Dilute  solutions,  more- 
over, show  a  complete  quantitative  agreement  with 
gases,  as  has  been  shown  by  Van't  Hoff  (1886). 
When  a  dilute  solution  is  contained  in  a  cell  with  a 
semipermeable  membrane,  and  the  cell  is  placed  in 
water,  then  the  solution  follows  the  laivs  of  Boyle  and 
Gay-Lussac  and  the  law  of  Avogadro. 

Further,  for  solutions  of  one  and  the  same  substance: 

At  constant  temperature  the  osmotic  pressure  is 
proportional  to  the  concentration; 

At  constant  volume  the  osmotic  pressure  is  propor- 
tional to  the  absolute  temperature. 

For  solutions  of  different  substances: 

Under  conditions  of  equal  temperature  and  equal 
concentration  the  osmotic  pressure  is  inversely  pro- 
portional to  the  molecular  weight;  or; 


126 

Solutions  of  the  same  molecular  concentration  * 
have  at  the  same  temperature  an  equal  osmotic  pres 
sure.  And  lastly: 

The  osmotic  pressure  of  a  dissolved  substance  at  a 
certain  temperature  and  concentration  is  equal  to  the 
gas  pressure  which  the  same  substance  in  a  gaseous 
state  would  exert  at  the  same  temperature  and  con- 
centration. 

Example.  The  following  osmotic  pressures 
have  been  observed  in  solutions  of  cane-sugar  at 
14°  C: 

Per  Cent  Solution.  Osmotic  Pressure. 

i 535  mm 

2    I0l6      " 

4  2082     " 

6 3075     " 

If  cane-sugar  could  exist  as  a  gas,  then  at  a  con- 
centration of  10  grams  per  liter  and  at  a  temperature 
of  14°  its  pressure  would  be 

760  X22.32  X  -ffff  X  ffj  mm  =  521  mm. 

REMARK.  It  is  evident  that  the  molecular  quantity  of  the 
dissolved  substance  can  be  calculated  from  the  osmotic 
pressure  of  a  solution  of  known  concentration  (compare 
§  21,  Rem.  i). 

§  57.  Experimental  Basis.  This  is  partly  found 
in  measurements  of  the  osmotic  pressure.  Such 
measurements,  however,  involve  considerable  diffi- 
culty, and  it  is  found  almost  impossible  to  prepare 

*The  molecular  concentration  is  the  number  of  molecular 
quantities  of  the  substance  in  one  liter  of  the  solution, 


127 

membranes  which  are  absolutely  impervious  to  the 
dissolved  substances. 

Important  data  are,  however,  found  in  the  phe- 
nomena which  stand  in  close  relation  to  the  osmotic 
pressure,  as  has  been  pointed  out  by  Van't  Hoff. 
These  phenomena  are  the  lowering  of  the  freezing- 
point,  the  elevation  of  the  boiling-point,  and  the  decrease 
in  the  vapor  pressure. 

a.  Lowering  of  the  Freezing-point.  It  has  long 
been  known  that  the  freezing-point  of  water  is  low- 
ered by  the  addition  of  a  soluble  compound.  This 
lowering  is,  within  certain  limits,  proportional  to  the 
concentration  of  the  solution.  According  to  the 
theory  of  osmotic  pressure,  this  pressure  is  propor- 
tional to  the  number  of  molecules  dissolved  in  a  liter, 
and  also  for  one  and  the  same  substance  the  lowering 
of  the  freezing-point  is  proportional  to  the  concen- 
tration, while  for  the  solutions  of  different  substances, 
but  of  equal  concentration,  the  lowering  is  inversely 
proportional  to  the  molecular  weights  of  the  dissolved 
substances. 

REMARK  i.  If  the  depression  of  the  freezing-point  fora 
one-per-cent  solution  of  any  substance  in  a  given  solvent 
be  determined,  then  the  depression  produced  by  dissolving 
a  molecular  quantity  of  the  same  substance  in  TOO  grams  of 
the  given  solvent  can  be  calculated,  it  being  assumed  that 
such  a  solution  would  be  possible  and  that  it  would  obey 
the  law  for  dilute  solutions.  The  value  of  the  result  ob- 
tained is  purely  fictitious,  but  is  of  great  assistance  in  ex- 
perimental work  and  is  known  as  the  molecular  depression 
for  the  given  solvent.  The  molecular  depression  of  the 
freezing-point  depends  upon  the  nature  of  the  liquid,  and 
is  the  same  for  all  dissolved  substances  (compare  §  58). 


128 

REMARK  2.  The  constant  for  the  molecular  depression 
of  the  freezing-point  has  a  different  value  for  every  solvent. 
Van't  Hoff  has  pointed  out  the  fact  that  a  direct  quantita- 
tive relation  exists  between  this  constant  and  the  latent 
heat  of  fusion  of  the  solvent,  so  that  either  one  of  the  two 
quantities  can  be  calculated  from  the  other. 

b.  Elevation  of  the  Boiling-point.      For  the  same  dis- 
solved substance  the  elevation  of  the  boiling-point  is 
proportional  to  the  concentration. 

For  equally  concentrated  solutions  of  different  sub- 
stances the  elevation  of  the  boiling-point  is  inversely 
proportional  to  the  molecular  weights  of  the  substances. 

c.  Decrease  in  the    Vapor  Pressure.      Similar   rules 
apply  to  the  lowering  of  the  vapor  pressure  of  solvents. 

REMARK  3.  The  above  rules  may  be  summed  up  as  fol- 
lows :  the  osmotic  pressure,  depression  of  the  freezing-point, 
elevation  of  the  boiling-point  and  decrease  in  vapor  pres- 
sure are  equally  great  for  solutions  which  contain  an  equal 
number  of  molecules  dissolved  per  liter  in  the  same  solvent. 

REMARK  4.  The  molecular  quantity  of  the  dissolved 
substance  can  be  determined  from  any  one  of  the  three 
rules  given.  The  depression  of  the  freezing-point  method 
is,  however,  the  one  most  generally  used. 

Many  substances  the  molecular  weights  of  which  had 
been  previously  determined  have  given  similar  values  when 
examined  by  the  more  recent  methods.  Nevertheless 
the  molecular  weight  is  to  a  certain  extent  dependent  on 
the  nature  of  the  solvent. 

REMARK  5.  Important  osmotic  phenomena  may  be  ob- 
served in  the  case  of  living  organic  cells. 

If  a  plant-cell  be  brought  into  a  salt  solution  osmosis 
takes  place.  The  protoplasm  which  surrounds  the  liquid, 
the  sap  of  the  cell,  under  normal  conditions  adheres  to  the 
cell-wall,  and  acts  as  a  semipermeable  membrane,  permit- 
ting only  water,  but  not  the  substances  dissolved  in  the  sap 


I29 

or  the  watert  to  pass  through.  According  as  the  salt  solu- 
tion used  is  more  or  less  concentrated,  the  sap  of  the  cell 
will  absorb  water  or  send  out  water  through  the  protoplasm. 
A  certain  concentration  of  the  salt  solution  must  naturally 
exist  which  is  in  equilibrium  with  the  sap,  so  that  the  solu- 
tion does  not  remove  water  from  the  sap,  nor  does  the  sap 
remove  water  from  the  solution.  At  this  concentration  the 
sap  and  the  solution  have  an  equal  osmotic  pressure;  they 
are  isosmotic  or  isotonic.  The  solutions  of  different  salts  are 
isotonic  and  of  e.qual  osmotic  pressure  when  they  are  in 
equilibrium  with  the  sap  of  the  same  cell.  Stronger  solu- 
tions withdraw  all  water  from  the  cell.  The  elastic  pro- 
toplasm contracts  and  breaks  loose  from  the  rigid  wall  of 
the  cell.  This  phenomenon,  known  as  plasmolysis,  is  ob- 
served by  the  use  of  a  microscope. 

The  isotonic  coefficient  of  a  substance  is  the  osmotic 
pressure  of  its  aqueous  solution  when  this  has  the  same 
molecular  concentration  as  a  potassium  nitrate  solution,  the 
osmotic  pressure  of  which  is  arbitrarily  chosen  as  3.  The 
isotonic  coefficient  of  cane-sugar  is  1.88;  therefore  a  solu- 
tion of  cane-sugar  is  isotonic  with  a  sodium  nitrate  solution 
when  the  molecular  concentration  of  the  former  stands  to 
the  concentration  of  the  latter  in  the  proportion  3  :  1.88 
(H.  de  Vries). 

Equal  osmotic  pressures  are  observed  in  the  cases  of 
equiniolecular  solutions  of  various  neutral  organic  com- 
pounds and  organic  acids.  The  behavior  of  blood-cor- 
puscles is  very  similar  to  that  of  plant-cells,  and  was  first 
investigated  by  Bonders  and  Hamburger.  The  latter 
worked  out  a  method  for  the  determination  of  molecular 
weights  which  was  based  upon  phenomena  observed  in  the 
course  of  the  investigation. 

§  58.  Exceptions.  The  methods  for  the  determi- 
nation of  the  molecular  weight  described  in  this 
chapter  lead  in  the  case  of  a  large  number  of  sub- 


130 

stances  to  results  which  are  not  in  accord  with  the 
general  osmotic  theory.  These  substances  comprise 
the  strong  acids,  the  strong  bases  and  salts.  Atten- 
tion was  called  by  Arrhenius  (1887)  to  the  rule  that 
exceptions  occur  in  the  cases  of  all  substances  which 
are  electrolytes. 


CHAPTER    VI. 
ELECTROCHEMISTRY. 

§  59.  Definitions.  A  chemical  compound  which 
in  the  dissolved  or  melted  condition  conducts  the  elec- 
tric current  is  called  an  electrolyte. 

If  an  electric  current  is  passed  through  the  aqueous 
solution  of  an  electrolyte,  certain  chemical  changes  are 
produced.  The  processes  called  electrolysis. 

The  point  at  which  the  positive  electricity  enters  the 
solution  is  called  the  anode;  the  point  at  which  it  leaves, 
the  cathode.  Both  anode  and  cathode  are  known  as 
the  electrodes. 

The  little  particles  charged  with  electricity  which 
collectively  constitute  a  molecule  of  the  electrolyte  are 
called  the  ions  of  the  latter. 

The  ions  which  during  electrolysis  move  to  the 
anode  are  called  the  anions;  those  which  move  toward 
the  cathode,  the  cathions. 

§  60.  Electrolytic  Dissociation.  When  an  elec- 
trolyte dissolves  in  water  a  part  of  its  molecules  split 
up  into  ions.  This  process  is  called  electrolytic  dis- 
sociation. 

131 


133 

If  the  solution  takes  place  in  a  large  volume  of 
water,  i.e.,  if  the  solution  is  very  dilute,  all  of  the 
molecules  are  split  up  into  ions.  In  such  a  solution 
the  electrolyte  is  present  only  in  the  form  of  ions. 

Examples.       Potassium     chloride     in     aqueous 

solutions  is  partly  split  up  into  the  ions   K  and  Cl; 

4-  |     - 

potassium  nitrate  into  K    and  NO3;  sulphuric  acid  ac- 

-t-  +    + 

cording  to  the  dilution  into  H  and  HSO4  or  into  H,  H 

and  SO4;  potassium  acetate  into  K  and  C2H3O2. 

REMARK.  Clausius  was  the  first  to  put  forward  the  hy- 
pothesis that  electrolytes  on  passing  into  solution  in  water 
partly  split  up  into  their  ions.  If  such  a  solution  is  elec- 
trolyzed,  then  the  ions,  which  at  first  move  in  all  directions 
through  the  solution,  will  be  guided  by  the  current,  the 
cathions  to  the  cathode  and  the  anions  to  the  anode. 

The  action  of  the  current  on  the  electrolyte  is  therefore 
not  the  decomposition — since  the  electrolyte  is  already  de- 
composed into  its  ions  in  the  solution — but  the  transporta- 
tion of  the  ions  to  the  electrodes. 

Later  (1887)  Arrhenius  chose  this  hypothesis  as  a  starting- 
point  and  founded  upon  it  his  theory  of  electrolytic  dis- 
sociation. 

Since  the  ions  are  charged  with  electricity  they  can  exist 
in  water  without  action  on  it.  A  normal  potassium  atom 
would  instantly  decompose  water ;  a  charged  potassium 
atom  (potassium  ion),  however,  is  neutral  in  its  action  to- 
wards water  until  the  electric  charge  which  it  bears  has 
been  removed  from  it,  as  occurs  when  it  comes  in  contact 
with  the  cathode. 

§61.  Faraday's  Law.  This  can  be  stated  as 
follows:  The  movement  of  electricity  in  electrolytes 


133 

takes  place  only  with  the  simultaneous  movement  of 
the  ions. 

Chemically  equivalent  quantities  of  different  ions 
move  with  equal  quantities  of  electricity. 

If  equal  quantities  of  electricity  pass  through  solu- 
tions of  different  electrolytes,  for  example,  silver  nitrate 
and  copper  sulphate,  then,  according  to  Faraday,  the 
weights  of  silver  and  copper  ions  which  move  through 
these  solutions  with  this  quantity  of  electricity  will 
stand  to  each  other  in  the  ratio  of  the  chemical  equi- 
valent weights  of  silver  and  copper;  i.e., —  :  — — . 

During  electrolysis,  when  the  transported  ions  are 
discharged  at  the  electrodes  and  the  silver  and  copper 
ions  pass  into  the  neutral  condition,  the  weights  of  the 
metals  deposited  will  stand  in  the  ratios  of  their  chem- 
ical equivalent  weights. 

REMARKS.  Experiment  has  demonstrated  that  when  in 
one  second  the  unit  quantity  of  electricity  (one  coulomb) 
passes  through  a  solution  of  a  silver  salt,  in  this  time  there 
will  be  deposited  1.118  milligrams  of  metallic  silver.  This 
quantity  is  called  the  electrochemical  equivalent  of  silver. 

From  these  data,  by  applying  Faraday's  law,  the  electro- 
chemical equivalent  of  every  other  ion  can  be  calculated. 

Thus,  for  example,  the  electrochemical  equivalent  of  lead 
(x)  is  obtained  from  the  equation 

TTo  .        _  I07*93  .   206.9 . 

A  •  A  1  O    •    «^v     — — 

I  2 

x  =  1.071. 

§62.  Conductivity  of  Organic  and  Inorganic 
Compounds.  In  general,  organic  compounds  in  aque- 


134 

ous  solutions  are  poor  conductors  and  similar  solutions 
of  inorganic  compounds  are  good  conductors.  Solu- 
tions of  strong  acids  in  water  conduct  better  than  solu- 
tions of  weak  acids;  organic  acids  in  solutions  conduct 
to  a  perceptible  extent  only  when  greatly  diluted. 
Organic  salts  are  good  conductors. 

The  exceptions  mentioned  in  §  58  are  not  observed, 
or  at  most  the  variations  from  the  general  law  are  only 
slight,  when  solvents  other  than  water  are  used. 

§  63.  Some  Laws  Governing  Electrolytic  Dis- 
sociation. 

a.  This  dissociation  increases  with  the  dilution,  and 
with  increasing  dilution  approaches  a  maximum  value. 

Example.  Potassium  chloride  in  fairly  con- 
centrated solutions  is  partially  dissociated  into  the 
ions  K  and  Cl.  The  state  of  the  system  is  therefore 


The  degree  of  dissociation,  at  a  certain  temperature 
and  concentration,  has  a  fixed  value.  With  increas- 
ing dilution  x  decreases  and  (i  —  x)  increases,  until 
finally  when  infinite  dilution  is  reached  all  the  mole- 
cules of  KC1  have  dissociated  into  ions. 

b.  In  the  case  of  strong  acids  and  bases  and  their 
salts,  in  general  in  the  cases  of  substances  which 
enter  into  strong  reactions,  the  dissociation  is  nearly 
complete  in  fairly  concentrated  solutions. 

The  reactions  of  analytical  chemistry  are  chiefly 
reactions  between  ions. 


135 

Example.  The  formation  of  silver  chloride 
from  silver  nitrate  and  sodium  chloride  takes  place 
according  to  the  equation: 


+ 


+ 


Na|ClAq  +  Ag   NO3Aq=:AgCl(solid)+Na  NO3Aq. 

REMARK  i.  At  first  thought  it  might  appear  remarkable 
that  such  bodies  as  HC1,  NaOH,  and  KC1  exist  in  solution 
chiefly  in  the  form  of  ions.  It  must  be  remembered,  how- 
ever, that  these  substances  enter  most  readily  into  reactions, 
and  the  ability  to  enter  into  reaction  depends  upon  the 
readiness  with  which  the  substances  interchange  their  con- 
stituents. 

REMARK  2.  The  existence  of  electrolytic  dissociation 
explains  why,  for  example,  chlorine  does  not  always  show 
the  same  reactions.  According  to  the  theory  of  Arrhenius 
the  reactions  are  not  reactions  between  atoms,  but  between 

+  |    -  Al- 

iens.    Therefore  K|C1O3  with  AglNO3  will  not  form  AgCl, 

since  the  reaction  involves  the  ion  C1O8,  and  not  the  atom 
Cl. 

REMARK  3.  The  part  played  by  phenol-phthaline  in 
volumetric-analysis  titrations  is  explained  by  the  theory  of 
Arrhenius. 

Phenol-phthalein  is  a  substance  of  very  complex  con- 
stitution and  contains  two  phenol  residues,  the  radicals 
C6H4OH.  These  groups  impart  to  the  substance  to  a  cer- 
tain degree  the  properties  of  an  acid,  so  that  phenol-phtha- 
lein  may  be  considered  as  an  organic  acid  of  the  character 
RH.  Like  all  organic  acids,  this  substance  in  aqueous 
solutions  is  but  very  slightly  dissociated,  a  condition  which 
is  quite  different  in  the  case  of  its  salts.  On  neutralization 
with  a  base  a  salt  RK  is  formed,  and  this  salt  is  dissociated 


136 


into  the  ions  R  and  K.  The  red  color  observed  when  phe- 
nol-phthalein  is  used  as  an  indicator,  is  therefore  due  to  the 
formations  of  the  ions  R  from  the  non-dissociated  substance 
RH. 

That  this  explanation  is  correct  is  proved,  first,  by  the 
fact  that  all  soluble  bases  produce  with  phenol-phthalein 
the  same  red  coloration,  and,  secondly,  by  the  fact  that  the 
red  coloration  is  extremely  weak  in  alcoholic  solutions  —  alcohol 
almost  completely  retarding  electrolytic  dissociation  (§  58), 
—  but  becomes  much  more  intense  when  the  alcoholic  solu- 
tion is  diluted  with  water. 

c.  With  respect  to  the  osmotic  pressure  and  the 
corresponding  phenomena  each  ion  has  the  value  of  a 
molecule,  since  each  ion  moves  about  in  the  liquid  as 
an  independent  unit. 

This  rule  explains  the  appearance  of  exceptions  to 
the  theory  of  osmotic  pressure  as  enunciated  by  Van't 
Hoff.  An  example  illustrating  this  will  be  given  : 

As  previously  stated,  the  condition  of  potassium 
chloride  in  an  aqueous  solution  is  the  following: 


If  n  molecules  of  KC1  were  originally  introduced  into 
the  solution,  then  the  above  equation  would  become 


The  number  of  separate  particles  existing    in  the 
solution  is  therefore  not  n,  but  is  equal  to 

n(i  —  x)  +  2x  =  n(\  +  x). 

Since  the  osmotic  pressure  is  proportional  to  the 
number  of  dissolved    molecules,   and  since    each  ion 


137 

acts  as  a  separate  individual  particle,  the  value  of  the 
osmotic  pressure  is  a  result  of  the  action  of,  not  n 
molecules,  but  n(i  4-  x)  particles. 

The  value  of  x  increases  with  increasing  dilution 
and  approaches  the  maximum  value  i.  Therefore  at 
extreme  dilution  the  value  of  the  osmotic  pressure  is 
twice  as  great  as  that  prescribed  by  theory. 

These  considerations  also  apply  to  the  phenomena 
of  the  depression  of  the  freezing-point,  etc, 

If  the  depression  of  the  freezing-point  is  determined 
for  a  solution  of  potassium  chloride  of  certain  concen- 
tration, the  value  thus  obtained  may  be  compared 
with  that  which  would  be  obtained  if  no  dissociation 
took  place,  and  the  value  of  x  may  be  calculated. 
This  follows  since  the  relation  between  the  observed 
value  and  the  theoretical  number  is,  according  to  the 
above  explanation,  (i  +  x]. 

§  64.  Proof  of  the  Theory  of  Electrolytic  Disso- 
ciation. 

a.  The   exceptions   to   the   general   law  of  osmotic 
pressure  appear  in  the  case  of  electrolytes. 

This  fact  has  already  been  mentioned, 

b.  The  variation  is  greater  with  greater  dilution. 

c.  The  degree  of  dissociation,  calculated  from  the 
depression    of   the    freezing-point,    is   equal    to    that 
determined  from  the  conductivity  of  the  solution. 

According  to  the  theory  of  Arrhenius  the  ions  con- 
duct the  electricity  in  a  solution,  the  undissociated 
molecules  taking  no  part  in  this  process.  To  deter- 
mine the  degree  of  dissociation,  at  a  certain  concen- 
tration, the  conductivity  of  the  solution  at  this  con- 
centration is  compared  with  the  conductivity  of  a 


138 

solution  of  the  same  substance  at  infinite  dilution ;  in 
the  latter  case  the  conductivity  reaches  its  maximum 
value.  From  these  data  the  number  of  free  ions  and 
the  degree  of  dissociation  at  the  given  concentration 
can  be  calculated. 

REMARK.  The  conductivity  must  always  be  reduced  to 
a  fixed  concentration  of  the  solution  ;  since  although  the 
dissociation  increases  with  the  dilution,  the  concentration 
of  the  dissolved  substance  decreases  at  the  same  time. 

The  degree  of  dissociation,  as  determined  from  the 
conductivity  of  the  solution,  is  the  same  as  that  cal- 
culated from  the  depression  of  the  freezing-point. 

d.  The  law  of  thermoneutrality  (compare  §  32). 
The  mixing  of   dilute   salt  solutions  produces   no 

thermal  effect.  This  fact  is  readily  explained  by  the 
theory  of  dissociation;  since  in  dilute  solutions  the 
salts  are  almost  completely  dissociated,  and  when  they 
are  mixed  no  alteration  in  their  condition  takes  place. 

Na  |  ClAq  +  K  |  NO.Aq, 
both  before  and  after  mixing,  is  a  solution  of  the  ions 

(Na,  Cl,  K,  N~O8)  in  water. 

e.  The  neutralization  of  a  strong  base  by  a  strong 
acid  always  gives  the  same  heat-toning. 

Hydrochloric  acid,  nitric  acid,  hydrobromic  acid, 
and  hydriodic  acid,  when  in  dilute  solution,  give  for 
molecular  quantities  nearly  the  same  quantity  of  heat, 
-(-13.7  Cal.  For  example, 

HClAq  +  KOHAq  =  KClAq  +  HaO  .  .  .  +  13.7  Cal. 


139 

According  to  the  theory  of  electrolytic  dissociation, 
this  reaction  must,  however,  be  expressed  as  follows: 

H  |  ClAq  +  K  |  OHAq 

=  K  |  ClAq  +  H30  .   .   .  +  13-7  Cal. 

Therefore  the  thermal  effect  of  mixing"  the  two  solu- 
tions is  due  solely  to  the  formation  of  water  from  its 
ions.  The  heat  of  formation  of  water  from  its  ions  is 
accordingly  equal  to  -f-  13.7  Cal. 

Since  the  strong  bases  and  the  strong  acids  are  all- 
most  entirely  dissociated  into  their  ions  by  water,  the 
only  action  on  mixing  the  solutions  is  in  all  cases  the 
formation  of  water  from  its  ions,  and  therefore  the 
thermal  effect  is  in  all  cases  the  same 


CHAPTER   VII. 
PHENOMENA   OF    LIGHT. 

§  65.  Colored  Flames.  Many  salts  introduced 
into  a  nonluminous  gas-flame  impart  to  the  flame  a 
coloration  which  is  characteristic  of  the  metal  of  the 
salt.  Sodium  salts  color  the  flame  yellow,  potassium 
salts  violet,  barium  salts  green.  In  analytical  chem- 
istry this  coloration  is  used  to  identify  many  metals. 

Often,  however,  the  color  effect  is  not  sufficient  for 
the  identification  of  an  element,  since  the  characteris- 
tic color  of  one  element  may  be  masked  by  that  of 
another,  and  indeed  the  intense  yellow  color  of 
sodium  is  almost  never  absent.  It  is  therefore  neces- 
sary to  analyze  the  effect,  and  to  separate  the  light 
into  its  components.  A  rough  method  for  accomplish- 
ing this  is  by  the  use  of  cobalt  glass  or  an  indigo 
prism;  these  allow  the  potassium  light,  but  not  the 
sodium  light,  to  pass  through  them,  and  it  is  thus 
possible  to  identify  the  color  of  potassium  in  a  mix- 
ture of  it  with  sodium. 

§  66.  The  Spectroscope.  The  analysis  of  the  light 
by  means  of  the  spectroscope  is,  however,  much  more 
accurate.  In  this  apparatus  a  ray  of  light  from  the 
flame  passes  through  a  narrow  slit  and  falls  on  a  glass 
prism.  The  action  of  the  prism  on  the  ray  of  complex 

140 


141 

light  passing  through  it  is  such  that  this  ray  is  broken 
up  into  a  series  of  other  rays,  each  of  which  consists  of 
light  of  a  single  wave-length  (i.e.,  of  a  single  simple 
color),  and  these  simple  rays  issue  from  the  prism  at 
different  angles.  It  is  therefore  possible  to  observe  the 
separate  components  of  the  original  complex  light,  and 
in  the  spectroscope  this  is  done  by  placing  a  small  tele- 
scope in  the  path  of  the  simple  rays.  The  action  of 
the  prism  on  the  ray  of  complex  light  depends  upon 
the  fact  that  lights  of  different  wave-lengths  have 
different  coefficients  of  refraction. 

Every  coloration  imparted  to  the  flame  by  a  metal 
in  the  vaporous  condition  consists  of  a  definite  num- 
ber of  different  kinds  of  light  of  certain  wave-lengths. 
The  observation  of  these  different  kinds  of  light  and 
the  determination  of  their  wave-lengths  furnishes  an 
accurate  means  for  determining  the  presence  of  metals 
in  the  flame. 

REMARK  i.  While  the  light  emitted  by  luminous  vapors 
consists  of  but  relatively  few  simple  components,  the  spec- 
trum (i.e.,  the  collection  of  simple  rays)  of  glowing  solid  or 
liquid  bodies  consists  of  a  continuous  series  of  different 
kinds  of  light. 

Generally  the  spectrum  of  only  the  free  metal  is 
observed  when  a  salt  is  introduced  into  the  flame,  the 
constituents  of  the  flame  decomposing  and  reducing 
the  compounds  of  the  metal.  When  salts  and  oxides 
vaporize  in  the  flame  without  decomposition,  then 
other  spectra  are  obtained. 

REMARK  2.  According  to  an  investigation  made  by 
Pringsheim,  the  luminosity  of  the  metals  is  not  dependent 
on  the  temperature,  but  on  the  chemical  action  of  the 


flame  on  the  salt   or   the  oxide,  therefore  on  the   reduc- 
tion. 

For  many  metals  the  temperature  of  the  gas-flame 
is  not  sufficiently  high  to  convert  them  into  luminous 
vapor.  In  such  cases  electrodes  are  prepared  from 
these  metals,  and  electric  sparks  are  allowed  to  pass 
between  them.  By  the  action  of  the  spark  small 
quantities  of  the  metals  are  removed  from  the  poles 
and  converted  into  vapor. 

The  spectrum  of  a  gaseous  substance  is  obtained  by 
introducing  the  gas  into  a  tube  under  diminished 
pressure  and  passing  through  it  the  current  from  an 
induction-coil;  the  gas  is  heated  to  glowing  and  the 
color  is  analyzed  by  the  spectroscope. 

Since  the  light  of  every  vaporous  element  is  com- 
posed of  a  series  of  rays  of  definite  wave-length,  cer- 
tain lines  in  the  spectrum  are  characteristic  of  certain 
elements,  and  the  discovery  of  new  lines  may  lead  to 
the  identification  of  a  new  element.  As  a  matter  of 
fact  a  number  of  elements  have  been  discovered  in 
this  manner  by  the  use  of  the  spectroscope, — namely; 
caesium,  indium,  gallium,  and  germanium. 

REMARK  3.  Characteristic  phenomena  appear  in  the 
spectroscopic  investigation  of  salts  of  the  so-called  rare 
earths—  earths  of  the  didymium  group,  of  the  erbium  group, 
and  of  the  yttrium  group.  On  the  basis  of  a  well-founded 
theory  on  the  nature  of  these  earths  it  does  not  necessarily 
follow,  but  it  is  nevertheless  possible,  that  these  substances 
are  mixtures  of  different  oxides,  and  do  not  consist  of  a 
single  oxide  only. 

§  67.  Absorption  Phenomena.  The  light  which 
we  call  white  is  in  reality  very  complex  and  consists  of 


H3 

rays  of  all  possible  wave-lengths.  White  light  gives  a 
continuous  spectrum,  that  is,  a  spectrum  which  is  not 
broken  up  into  lines  of  especial  brilliancy  or  intensity, 
but  which,  on  the  contrary,  shades  off  uniformly  from 
infra-red  to  ultra-violet.  When  white  light  is  allowed 
to  pass  through  the  luminous  vapor  of  an  element,  the 
vapor  absorbs  from  the  white  light  those  components 
which  the  vapor  itself  is  able  to  emit^  and  as  a  result  the 
spectrum  of  the  white  light  is  found  to  contain  a  series 
of  dark  lines  which  correspond  to  the  bright  lines  in 
the  spectrum  of  the  vaporous  element.  Also  non- 
luminous  vapors  show  a  similar  property  of  absorption. 
These  facts  play  an  important  part  in  the  explana- 
tion of  the  dark  lines  which  appear  in  the  solar  spec- 
trum. Many  of  the  dark  lines  in  the  solar  spectrum 
correspond  to  the  bright  lines  of  certain  luminous 
elements.  From  these  facts  Kirchoff  deduced  the 
following  hypothesis:  The  sun  consists  of  a  solid 
or  liquid  nucleus  which  is  surrounded  by  an  atmos- 
phere of  luminous  vapor.  The  nucleus  emits 
white  light,  and  when  this  light  reaches  the  earth 
it  is  destitute  of  those  rays  which  have  been  ab- 
sorbed by  the  solar  atmosphere.  The  dark  lines  of 
the  solar  spectrum  correspond  to  elements  which  exist 
in  the  solar  atmosphere,  but  which  must  be  present 
in  the  nucleus  also.  Since,  however,  many  of  the 
dark  lines  of  the  solar  spectrum  correspond  to  the 
bright  lines  in  the  spectrum  of  the  light  emitted  by 
the  luminous  vapor  of  terrestrial  elements,  it  may 
safely  be  assumed  that  the  earth  and  sun  are  largely 
composed  of  the  same  elements.  The  fixed  stars 
also  give  a  spectrum  containing  dark  lines. 


144 

§  68.  Photochemical  Action.  In  the  phenomena 
of  light  which  have  been  described  the  substances 
which  absorb  the  light  undergo  no  chemical  alteration. 
There  are,  however,  a  large  number  of  cases  known 
where  the  action  of  the  light  on  the  illuminated  body 
produces  an  alteration  which  is  of  a  purely  chemical 
nature.  A  consideration  of  these  cases  leads  to  the 
following  general  laws: 

a.  All  kinds  of  light  from  infra-red  to  ultra-violet 
are  capable  of  exerting  a  photochemical  action. 

REMARK  i.  The  assumption  that  only  violet  light  can 
produce  chemical  action  is  incorrect.  The  most  evident 
photochemical  action  in  nature,  the  decomposition  of  the 
atmospheric  carbon  dioxide  under  the  influence  of  the 
green  chlorophyll  of  plants,  is  due  chiefly  to  the  yellow  con- 
stituents of  sunlight.  It  is  also  incorrect  to  speak  of  certain 
kinds  of  light  as  being  especially  active  from  a  chemical 
standpoint,  since  every  kinds  of  light  can  produce  certain, 
characteristic  chemical  action. 

b.  Photochemical  action  is  exerted  only  by  those 
rays  which  are  absorbed  by  the  illuminated  substance. 

REMARK  2.  The  reverse  of  this  law,  that  absorption  is 
necessarily  associated  with  chemical  action,  is  not  true. 

c.  The  nature  of  the  illuminated  substance  deter- 
mines the  nature  of  the  chemical  action.      Red  light, 
however,    exerts    chiefly    an    oxidizing,    violet    light 
chiefly  a  reducing,  action  on  compounds  of  the  metals. 
The  reciprocal  action  of  metalloids  is  generally  pro- 
moted by  violet  light. 

d.  The  readiness  with  which  a  substance  is  affected 
by  rays  of  a  certain  wave-length  is  increased  by  the 
admixture  of  other  substances    which    absorb   these 
rays. 


145 

e.  A  substance  is  usually  more  readily  decomposed 
by  light  if  it  be  mixed  with  other  substances  which 
can  combine  with  the  products  of  the  decomposition. 

REMARK  3.  The  explanation  of  this  fact  is  that  the 
removal  of  the  decomposition-products  prevents  the  re- 
formation of  the  original  substance. 

§  69.  Photochemical  Extinction.  Photochemical 
extinction  is  that  phenomenon  which  is  exhibited  when 
rays  which  pass  through  a  medium  which  is  sensitive 
to  light  are  weaker  in  their  chemical  action  when  they 
pass  through  a  second  layer  of  the  same  medium,  this 
weakening  not  being  assignable  to  a  purely  optical 
absorption. 

Example.  Light  which  has  passed  through  a 
mixture  of  equal  parts  of  chlorine  and  hydrogen  in  a 
layer  of  given  thickness  has  a  much  more  feeble  chem- 
ical action  than  that  which  has  passed  through  a  layer  of 
chlorine  of  half  the  thickness,  although  the  optical 
absorption  is  in  both  cases  the  same. 

When  the  chemical  action  of  light  reaches  its  great- 
est intensity,  not  immediately  after  absorption,  but 
after  a  certain  time  has  elapsed,  the  phenomenon  is 
called  photochemical  induction. 

REMARK.  The  combination  of  hydrogen  with  chlorine 
is  explained  by  assuming  that  these  gases  do  not  act  directly 
upon  one  another,  but  combine  through  the  agency  of 
water-vapor,  with  which  an  intermediate  compound  is  first 
formed.  It  is  possible  that  the  reactions  are  the  following: 

H20  +  Clt  =  C1.0  +  Ha; 
2H3  +  Cl,0  =  H,0  -f  2HC1. 


146 

An  appreciable  time  would  be  required  before  a  quantity 
of  ClaO  would  be  formed  sufficient  to  produce  the  second 
reaction. 

This  hypothesis  is  founded  on  the  fact  that  a  mixture  of 
moist  chlorine  and  hydrogen  is  much  more  sensitive  to  light 
than  a  dry  mixture  of  the  same  gases. 

§  70.  Development  and  Fixing  of  a  Photo- 
graphic Image.  In  all  the  various  photographic 
methods  the  light  acts  for  only  a  short  time  on  the 
sensitive  plate,  and  in  this  time  no  visible  image  is  pro- 
duced. After  the  exposure,  when  the  plate  is  treated 
with  a  so-called  developer,  the  image  gradually  ap- 
pears. In  the  modern  methods  of  photography  the  de- 
veloper is  a  reducing  substance  which  reduces  the  silver 
salt  of  the  sensitive  plate,  this  reduction  occurring  only 
at  those  points  where  the  light  has  acted  and  has  pro- 
duced a  latent  image. 

REMARK.  The  explanation  of  the  process  of  develop- 
ment is  purely  hypothetical,  and  depends  upon  the  process 
of  daguerreotyping,  which  has  not  been  practised  for  many 
years.  Daguerre  (1838)  exposed  a  silver  plate,  weakly 
iodized  on  the  surface,  for  several  seconds  to  the  action  of 
light.  In  this  period  no  visible  picture  was  produced,  and 
Daguerre  then  brought  the  surface  of  the  plate  into  contact 
with  the  vapor  of  mercury.  This  vapor  was  precipitated 
most  rapidly  on  those  points  of  the  plate  where  the  light 
had  caused  the  decomposition  of  the  silver  iodide  with  the 
formation  of  slight  traces  of  silver,  and  as  a  result  the  sur- 
face of  the  plate  became  rougher  at  those  points. 

On  the  basis  of  these  facts,  it  may  be  assumed  that  in 
the  modern  methods  of  development  the  developer  first 
attacks  the  sensitive  surface  of  the  plate  at  those  points 
where  partial  decomposition  has  already  taken  place.  The 
silver  bromide  of  the  silver-bromide  gelatine  plates,  partially 


147 

decomposed  by  light,  concentrates  the  action  of  the  de- 
veloper at  those  points  where  the  decomposition  has  already 
begun,  and  at  those  points  a  more  rapid  reduction,  and 
accordingly  a  more  rapid  separation  of  silver,  takes  place. 

It  must  be  clearly  understood  that  this  explanation  is  of 
a  very  hypothetical  nature. 

When  the  image  is  developed,  it  is  made  perma- 
nent or  fixed.  The  plate  is  immersed  in  a  solution  of 
some  substance  v/hich  dissolves  the  undecomposed 
portion  of  the  sensitive  material  and  thus  removes  it. 

By  this  process,  however,  only  a  so-called  negative 
is  obtained  :  the  high  lights  of  the  object  photographed 
have  sent  out  many  rays,  have  caused  a  strong  sep- 
aration of  silver,  and  have  produced  a  dark  image;  the 
shadows,  on  the  contrary,  have  produced  a  lighter 
image.  A  positive  is  obtained  by  placing  the  nega- 
tive plate  on  a  piece  of  sensitive  paper  and  exposing 
this  to  the  light;  the  relations  of  light  and  shadow  are 
now  exactly  reversed. 

§  71.  Color  Photography.  Lippmann  in  1891 
succeeded  in  photographing  the  solar  spectrum  in  its 
natural  colors.  The  sensitive  film  which  he  exposed 
to  the  light  was  backed  by  a  layer  of  mercury.  The 
light-waves  passed  through  the  film  and  were  reflected 
back  by  the  surface  of  the  mercury;  the  reflected 
waves  interfered  with  the  direct  waves  and  formed 
standing  waves.  The  wave-lengths  of  these  waves  is 
extremely  small,  and  accordingly  a  large  number  of 
crests  and  nodes  were  formed  in  the  sensitive  film, 
the  decomposition  of  the  silver  salts  reaching  a  maxi- 
mum at  the  crests  and  being  equal  to  zero  at  the  nodes. 
The  films  were  developed  and  fixed  in  the  usual 


148 

manner,  and  layers  of  reduced  silver  were  formed  in 
the  sensitive  film.  The  distances  between  the  layers 
of  silver  were  equal  to  one-half  the  wave-length  of  the 
color  which  produced  them.  When  the  film  was 
viewed  by  white  light,  the  layers  of  silver  caused  inter- 
ference phenomena,  and  therefore  reflected  light  of  a 
color  corresponding  to  that  by  which  they  had  been 
produced. 


CHAPTER   VIII. 
THE   PERIODIC   SYSTEM. 

§  72.  Definition.  The  periodic  system  is  a  group- 
ing of  the  elements  which  depends  upon  the  law 
that  the  properties  of  the  elements,  so  far  as  these 
may  be  expressed  by  numbers,  are  periodic  functions 
of  their  atomic  weights. 

REMARK  i.  The  quantity  A  is  a  function  of  the  quan- 
tity B,  if  they  alter  simultaneously,  and  if  to  every  value  of 
B  there  corresponds  one  or  more  values  of  A.  Thus  A  is  a 
function  of  B  in  the  following  equations  : 

A  =  3B; 
A  =  Bn; 


A  =  arc  sin  B. 

A  is  aperiodic  function  of  B  if  on  a  continuous  increase 
in  the  value  of  B  the  value  of  A  is  the  same  at  regular  in- 
tervals. Thus  in  the  equation 

A  =  sin  B 

A  is  a  periodic  function  of  B,  since  for  every  value  of  B  A 
has  a  certain  value;  A  will,  however,  have  the  same  value 
if  B  is  360°  or  720°  or  n  times  360°  greater,  and  accordingly 
for  every  interval  of  360°  A  again  receives  the  same  value. 
This  interval  is  called  a  period,  and  the  series  of  values 

149 


150 

which  A  receives  while  B  is  passing  through  an  interval  is 
also  called  a  period. 

REMARK  2.  The  basis  of  the  periodic  system  is  the 
periodic  function.  Nevertheless  the  periodicity  is  not  as- 
sociated with  mathematical  exactitude  with  a  period  of 
definite  interval.  The  theory  may  therefore  be  brought 
into  closer  agreement  with  the  facts  if  it  be  stated  that  when 
the  elements  are  arranged  in  the  order  of  their  increasing 
atomic  weights  they  may  be  separated  into  definite  groups, 
and  the  properties  of  any  one  group  can  be  found  recurring 
in  the  others  at  certain  stated  positions. 

REMARK  3.  A  relation  between  the  properties  of  the 
elements  and  their  atomic  weights  has  long  been  sought,  it 
having  been  observed  that  a  mathematical  relation  exists 
between  the  atomic  weights  of  those  elements  which,  from 
their  general  properties,  form  a  natural  group  or  family. 
Thus  the  atomic  weight  of  strontium  is  approximately  the 
mean  of  the  atomic  weight  of  calcium  and  the  atomic 
weight  of  barium;  the  atomic  weight  of  sodium  is  approxi- 
mately the  mean  of  the  atomic  weights  of  lithium  and 
potassium.  Zeuner  (1857)  divided  the  elements  known  at 
that  time  into  triads. 

In  the  years  1862  and  1863  de  Chancourtois  and  New- 
lands  attempted  to  carry  out  a  classification  of  the  elements 
according  to  their  atomic  weights;  the  latter  pointed  out 
that  similar  properties  appeared  in  the  case  of  every 
eighth  element  in  the  series.  This  was  known  as  the  law  of 
octaves. 

In  the  year  1869  attention  was  first  called,  by  Mendelejeff 
and  Lothar  Meyer,  to  the  periodicity  of  the  properties  with 
respect  to  the  atomic  weights,  and  by  them  a  system  was 
established  in  which  the  idea  of  periodicity  was  rigidly 
applied.  This  system  is  the  one  at  present  in  use. 

§  73.  Graphic  Representation.  If  in  a  plane 
points  are  so  determined  with  respect  to  two  axes  that 


the  abscissas  are  proportional  to  the  atomic  weights 
and  the  ordinates  are  proportional  to  some  property 
of  the  elements  which  may  be  expressed  by  numbers, 
and  the  points  thus  determined  are  connected  by 
straight  lines,  a  broken  curve  is  obtained  which  rises 
and  falls  in  a  series  of  waves.  The  characteristics  of 
the  particular  property  under  consideration  in  one 
wave  recur  in  the  other  waves  at  corresponding  posi- 
tions. The  periodic  variation  of  the  physical  proper- 
ties of  the  elements  is  most  strikingly  shown  in  the 
graphic  representation  of  the  atomic  volume. 

An  undulating  curve  of  this  nature  is  therefore  a 
graphic  representation  of  the  periodic  system. 

§  74.  Tabular  Representation.  If  the  groups  of 
kindred  elements  in  a  horizontal  row  are  arranged 
one  below  the  other,  then  the  periodic  system  is 
obtained  in  the  form  of  a  table.  Passing  from  left  to 
right,  the  elements  follow  their  atomic  weights,  and 
the  properties  which  appear  in  one  of  the  horizontal 
rows  will  be  found  to  occur  again  in  other  rows  in 
analogous  positions.  As  a  result  the  elements  having 
similar  properties  are  found  in  the  same  vertical  row.* 

§  75.  Small  and  Large  Periods.  In  the  case  of 
the  first  two  periods,  each  of  which  contains  7  ele- 
ments, the  agreement  of  the  corresponding  members 
is  very  great.  The  third  period  begins  with  potas- 
sium, which  corresponds  with  sodium;  but  between 
potassium  and  rubidium,  with  which  the  fourth  period 

*  In  the  back  of  this  book  there  is  given  a  table  of  the  elements 
arranged  chiefly  according  to  the  scheme  proposed  by  Lothar 
Meyer,  from  which,  however,  the  table  given  by  Mendelejeff  does 
not  materially  differ. 


152 

begins,  there  are  16  elements,  and  after  rubidium 
1 6*  elements  must  be  passed  before  caesium,  an  ele- 
ment showing  great  analogy  to  potassium  and  rubid- 
ium, is  reached.  In  this  case  two  periods  of  17 
elements  each  must  be  assumed,  and  as  a  matter  of 
fact  these  groups  of  17  may,  with  respect  to  most  of 
their  properties,  be  considered  as  independent  periods. 
They  are  therefore  called  large  periods,  in  contradis- 
tinction to  the  small  periods  which  are  formed  by  the 
groups  Li — Fl  and  Na — Cl. 

The  large  periods  fall  with  respect  to  certain  prop- 
erties into  two  groups  of  seven  elements,  in  which  a 
slight  analogy  to  the  small  periods  can  be  observed; 
the  remaining  three  elements  show  no  analogy  and  are 
therefore  placed  in  a  separate  column.  In  Lothar 
Meyer's  table  the  first  large  period  is  formed  by  the 
third  and  fourth  horizontal  rows;  the  first  seven  ele- 
ments of  the  first  row  form  the  first,  the  seven  ele- 
ments of  the  second  row  form  the  second,  group.  The 
chief  analogy  with  the  small  periods  is  shown  when 
the  large  periods  are  considered  entire;  the  secondary 
analogy,  that  of  valence,  appears  in  each  of  the 
groups. 

§  76.  Variation  of  Physical  Properties  in  Periods. 
Not  only  does  there  exist  the  mentioned  regularity 
in  the  recurrence  of  the  properties  of  the  elements, 
but  also  the  variation  of  the  properties  of  the  elements 
in  one  and  the  same  period  may  often  be  included  un- 
der a  general  rule.  In  general  the  physical  properties, 


*  The  existence  of  an  element  having  an  atomic  weight  of  about 
loc  is  here  assumed. 


153 

when  these  can  be  expressed  by  numbers,  attain  a 
maximum  or  a  minimum  in  the  middle  of  a  period. 

The  specific  gravity  (in  the  solid  state)  increases 
until  the  middle  of  the  period  is  reached,  there  attains 
a  maximum,  and  then  decreases. 

The  atomic  volume  (the  quotient  of  the  atomic 
weight  and  the  specific  gravity  in  the  solid  state) 
decreases  to  the  middle  of  the  period,  there  reaches 
a  minimum,  and  then  increases. 

If  the  relation  between  the  atomic  volume  and  the 
atomic  weight  is  graphically  represented  by  means  of 
a  curve  (compare  §  73),  a  series  of  waves  are  obtained 
which  very  clearly  express  the  idea  of  periodicity  of 
the  properties.  Other  properties  are  also  represented 
by  the  position  of  elements  on  this  curve.  The  rising 
portions  of  the  waves,  including  the  lowest  points, 
contain  the  difficultly  fusible  and  nonvolatile  elements ; 
the  descending  portions  contain  those  elements  which 
are  readily  fusible  and  volatile. 

The  atomic  heat,  which  for  most  elements  is  a  nearly 
constant  quantity  (§  24),  can  also  be  considered  as 
one  of  the  magnitudes  included  under  the  periodic 
law,  in  so  much  as  its  variation  is  nearly  zero  in  the 
case  of  all  the  periods.  If,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
atomic  volume,  the  relation  between  the  atomic  heat 
and  the  atomic  weight  be  represented  graphically,  a 
straight  line  is  obtained. 

The  elements  which  do  not  correspond  to  the  law 
of  Dulong  and  Petit  are  found  in  the  first  and  second 
periods,  a  certain  regularity  being  observable  in  their 
variations ;  the  atomic  heat  becomes  lower  to  the  middle 
of  the  peripd  and  then  increases. 


154 

The  valence  increases  in  the  first  and  second  hori- 
zontal rows  from  I  to  4,  and  then  falls  again  to  i. 
(The  valence  is  here  determined  from  the  hydrogen 
and  hydrocarbon  compounds  and,  in  case  such  com- 
pounds are  not  formed  by  the  element,  is  deduced 
from  the  chlorine  compounds.)  On  the  right-hand 
side  of  the  system  are  found  those  elements  which 
have  more  than  one  valence,  and  while  the  lowest  falls 
from  4  to  I  the  highest  rises  from  4  to  7,  as  is  seen 
in  the  case  of  the  oxygen  compounds. 

In  the  large  periods  the  existence  of  a  double 
periodicity  with  respect  to  the  valence  may  be  ob- 
served. From  potassium  to  manganese  the  valence 
increases  from  I  to  7,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  case  of 
the  salt-forming  oxides  (K2O — Mn2O7),  and  in  the 
same  period  a  second  series  is  formed  from  copper  to 
bromine  (Cu3O — Br2O7).  Each  two  rows  show  a 
secondary  analogy  with  the  small  periods,  and  upon 
this  fact  is  based  the  arrangement  of  the  large  periods 
in  Lothar  Meyer's  table,  in  which  the  three  elements 
which  in  their  valence  show  no  analogy  to  the  ele- 
ments in  the  small  periods  are  placed  in  a  separate 
column. 

Still  other  properties  of  the  elements  are  more  or 
less  accurately  expressed  in  the  periodic  system,  but 
the  most  important  cases  have  been  mentioned. 

§  77.  Application  of  the  Periodic  System. 

a.   Correction  of  the  Atomic    Weights.     Since    the 
general   properties  of   an  element  are   related   to   its 
atomic  weight,  these  properties  may,  like  the  atomic  , 
weight,  be  used  for  determining  the  position  of  the 
element  in  the  periodic  system.     The  introduction  of 


155 

the  natural  system  has  therefore  resulted  in  the  case 
of  a  number  of  elements  in  an  alteration  of  their 
atomic  weights.  Indium,  for  which  the  atomic 
weight  75.6  was  adopted,  must  from  its  general  prop- 
erties occupy  a  position  between  tin  and  cadmium; 
therefore  the  atomic  weight  of  this  element  has  been 
doubled  and  increased  to  113.4.  Also  the  metals  of 
the  platinum  group  have  been  reinvestigated,  and  the 
values  of  their  atomic  weights  have  been  found  to 
agree  with  the  position  which  had  been  assigned  to 
them  from  a  consideration  of  their  properties. 

REMARK  i.  For  nickel  and  cobalt,  however,  as  well  as 
for  tellurium,  the  atomic  weights  most  recently  determined 
do  not  correspond  to  the  positions  of  these  elements  in  the 
natural  system. 

b.  Predicting  the  Existence  of  Undiscovered  Elements. 
Many  vacancies  may  be  noticed  in  the  table ;  it  is  to 
be  expected  that  these  should  be  occupied  by  elements 
which   are    still   undiscovered    and   which   from   their 
atomic  weights  and  general  properties  are  entitled  to 
these  positions.     It  is  therefore  possible  to  predict  in 
advance   the   atomic   weight  and    properties    of   such 
elements.      Expectations    of   this    sort    have    already 
been  realized   in   the  case  of  gallium,  scandium,  and 
germanium. 

c.  Determination  of  the  Atomic   Weights.     As  was 
explained  in  a,  the  determination  of  the  position  of 
an  element  in  the  system  leads  to  the  fixing  of  the 
magnitude  of  its  atomic  weight,  and  this  quantity  can 
then  be  corrected  with  the  help  of  analytical  data. 

d.  The  Unit  of  the  Elements.     The  fact  that  many 
properties  of  the  elements  are  so  closely  related  to  a 


I56 

purely  mathematical  property,  the  atomic  weight,  has 
given  much  encouragement  to  the  idea,  which  has 
already  been  the  subject  of  considerable  speculation, 
that  the  elements  may  be  considered  as  formed  by  the 
condensation  of  a  single  primordial  substance.  Prout 
suggested  (1817)  that  all  the  atomic  weights  were  mul- 
tiples of  the  atomic  weight  of  hydrogen.  The  more 
accurate  analyses  of  later  investigators  have  shown 
that  the  atomic  weights  are  in  no  way  equal  multiples 
of  this  unit,  and  that  no  simple  least-common-divisor 
can  be  discovered  for  the  atomic  weights. 

It  is  nevertheless  noteworthy  that  the  atomic 
weights  of  many  elements  are  very  near  whole  num- 
bers. 

REMARK  2.  The  methods  for  determining  atomic  weight 
are  therefore: 

1.  The  analysis  of  molecular  quantities  of  the  compounds 
of  the  element. 

The  molecular  quantity,  or  the  magnitude  of  the  gram 
molecule,  is  determined: 

a.  From  the  gas  density  and  Avogadro's  hypothesis. 

b.  From  the  osmotic  pressure  of  solutions  of  the  com- 
pounds and  the  corresponding  magnitudes — i.e.,  the  depres- 
sion of  the  freezing-point,  the  elevation  of  the  boiling-point, 
etc. 

c.  From  special  considerations  on  the  constitution  of  the 
compounds. 

NOTE:  The  method  a  is  the  most  important. 

2.  Application  of  the  law  of  Dulong  and  Petit  and  the 
law  of  Joule. 

3.  Application  of  the  periodic  system. 

Each  of  the  three  methods  gives  the  value  of  the  atomic 
weight  with  only  relative  accuracy;  its  exact  value  must  be 


is; 

determined  by  the  analysis  of  compounds  of  the  particular 
element  under  consideration, 

§  78.   Closing  Remarks  on  the  Periodic  System. 

The  elements  helium,  neon,  argon,  krypton,  and  xenon, 
discovered  by  Rayleigh  and  Ramsay,  judging  from 
the  determinations  thus  far  made,  have  the  atomic 
weights  4,  20,  39.9,  81.8,  and  128,  respectively. 

The  position  of  these  elements  in  the  periodic  system 
has  not  yet  been  satisfactorily  determined  and  a  discus- 
sion of  their  significance  cannot  be  entered  into  at  this 
point. 


SHORT-TITLE     CATALOGUE 

OP  THE 

PUBLICATIONS 

OF 

JOHN   WILEY    &    SONS, 

NEW  YORK. 
LONDON:   CHAPMAN  &  HALL,  LIMITED. 


ARRANGED  UNDER  SUBJECTS. 


Descriptive  circulars  sent  on  application.  Books  marked  with  an  asterisk  are 
sold  at  net  prices  only,  a  double  asterisk  (**)  books  sold  under  the  rules  of  the 
American  Publishers'  Association  at  net  prices  subject  to  an  extra  charge  for 
postage.  All  books  are  bound  in  cloth  unless  otherwise  stated. 


AGRICULTURE. 

Armsby's  Manual  of  Cattle-feeding i2mo,  $i  75 

Principles  of  Animal  Nutrition 8vo,  4  oo 

Budd  and  Hansen's  American  Horticultural  Manual: 

Part  I. — Propagation,  Culture,  and  Improvement izmo,  i  50 

Part  II. — Systematic  Pomology i2mo,  i  50 

Downing's  Fruits  and  Fruit-trees  of  America 8vo,  5  oo 

Elliott's  Engineering  for  Land  Drainage i2mo,  i  50 

Practical  Farm  Drainage I2mo,  i  oo 

Green's  Principles  of  American  Forestry I2mo,  i  50 

Gr,otenfelt's  Principles  of  Modern  Dairy  Practice.     (Woll.) I2tno,  2  oo 

Kemp's  Landscape  Gardening I2mo,  2  50 

Maynard's  Landscape  Gardening  as  Applied  to  Home  Decoration i2mo,  i  50 

Sanderson's  Insects  Injurious  to  Staple  Crops i2mo,  i  50 

Insects  Injurious  to  Garden  Crops.     (In  preparation.) 

Insects  Injuring  Fruits.     (In  preparation.) 

Stockbridge's  Rocks  and  Soils 8vo,  2  50 

WolTs  Handbook  for  Farmers  and  Dairymen i6mo,  i  50 

ARCHITECTURE. 

Baldwin's  Steam  Heating  for  Buildings i2mo,  2  50 

Berg's  Buildings  and  Structures  of  American  Railroads 4to,  5  oo 

Birkmire's  Planning  and  Construction  of  American  Theatres 8vo,  3  oo 

Architectural  Iron  and  Steel 8vo,  3  50 

Compound  Riveted  Girders  as  Applied  in  Buildings 8vo,  2  oo 

Planning  and  Construction  of  High  Office  Buildings 8vo,  3  50 

Skeleton  Construction  in  Buildings 8vo,  3  oo 

Briggs's  Modern  American  School  Buildings 8vo,  4  oo 

Carpenter's  Heating  and  Ventilating  of  Buildings 8vo,  4  oo 

Freitag's  Architectural  Engineering.     2d  Edition,  Rewritten 8vo,  3  50 

Fireproofing  of  Steel  Buildings 8vo,  2  50 

French  and  Ives's  Stereotomy 8vo,  2  50 

Gerhard's  Guide  to  Sanitary  House-inspection i6mo,  i  oo 

Theatre  Fires  and  Panics , i2mo,  i  50 

Holly's  Carpenters'  and  Joiners'  Handbook i8mo,  o  75 

Johnson's  Statics  by  Algebraic  and  Graphic  Methods 8vo,  a  oo 

1 


Kidder's  Architect's  and  Builder's  Pocket-book.     Rewritten  Edition. 

i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 

Merrill's  Stones  for  Building  and  Decoration 8vo,  5  oo 

Monckton's  Stair-building 4t0,  4  oo 

Patton's  Practical  Treatise  on  Foundations 8vo,  5  oo 

Peabody's  Naval  Architecture 8vo,  7  50 

Siebert  and  Biggin's  Modern  Stone-cutting  and  Masonry 8vo,  i  50 

Snow's  Principal  Species  of  Wood 8vo,  3  50 

Sondericker's  Graphic  Statics  with  Applications  to  Trusses,  Beams,  and  Arches. 

8vo,  2  oo 

Wait's  Engineering  and  Architectural  Jurisprudence 8vo,  6  oo 

Sheep,  6  50 

Law  of  Operations  Preliminary  to  Construction  in  Engineering  and  Archi- 
tecture  8vo,  5  oo 

Sheep,  5  50 

Law  of  Contracts 8vo,  3  oo 

Wood's  Rustless  Coatings:  Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and  Steel . .  .8vo,  4  oo 

Woodbury's  Fire  Protection  of  Mills 8vo,  2  50 

Worcester  and  Atkinson's  Small  Hospitals,  Establishment  and  Maintenance, 
Suggestions  for  Hospital  Architecture,  with  Plans  for  a  Small  Hospital. 

i2mo,  i  25 

The  World's  Columbian  Exposition  of  1893 Large  4to,  i  oo 

ARMY  AND  NAVY. 

Bernadou's  Smokeless  Powder,  Nitro-cellulose,  and  the  Theory  of  the  Cellulose 

Molecule i2mo,  2  50 

*  Bruff's  Text-book  Ordnance  and  Gunnery 8vo,  6  oo 

Chase's  Screw  Propellers  and  Marine  Propulsion 8vq,  3  oo 

Craig's  Azimuth 4to,  3  50 

Crehore  and  Squire's  Polarizing  Photo-chronograph 8vo,  3  oo 

Cronkhite's  Gunnery  for  Non-commissioned  Officers 24mo.  morocco,  2  oo 

*  Davis's  Elements  of  Law 8vo,  2  50 

*  Treatise  on  the  Military  Law  of  United  States 8vo,  7'  oo 

Sheep,  7  50 

De  Brack's  Cavalry  Outpost  Duties.     (Carr.) 24mo  morocco,  2  oo 

Dietz's  Soldier's  First  Aid  Handbook i6mo,  morocco,  i  25 

*  Dredge's  Modern  French  Artillery 4to,  half  morocco,    15  oo 

Durand's  Resistance  and  Propulsion  of  Ships 8vo,  5  oo 

*  Dyer's  Handbook  of  Light  Artillery i2mo,  3  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives 8vo,  4  oo 

*  Fiebeger's  Text-book  on  Field  Fortification Small  8vo,  2  oo 

Hamilton's  The  Gunner's  Catechism i8mo,  i  oo 

*  Hoff's  Elementary  Naval  Tactics 8vo,  i  50 

Ingalls's  Handbook  of  Problems  in  Direct  Fire 8vo,  4  oo 

*  Ballistic  Tables 8vo,  i  50 

*  Lyons's  Treatise  on  Electromagnetic  Phenomena.   Vols.  I.  and  II . .  8vo.  each,  6  oo 

*  Mahan's  Permanent  Fortifications.     (Mercur.) 8vo,  half  morocco,  7  50 

Manual  for  Courts-martial idmc^  morocco,  i  50 

*  Mercur's  Attack  of  Fortified  Places I2mo,  2  oo 

*  Elements  of  the  Art  of  War 8vo,  4  oo 

Metcalf's  Cost  of  Manufactures — And  the  Administration  of  Workshops,  Public 

and  Private 8vo,  5  oc 

*  Ordnance  and  Gunnery.     2  vols I2mo,  5  oo 

Murray's  Infantry  Drill  Regulations i8mo.  paper,  10 

Peabody's  Naval  Architecture 8vo,  7  50 

*  Phelps's  Practical  Marine  Surveying 8vo,  2  50 

Powell's  Army  Officer's  Examiner I2mo,  4  oo 

Sharpe's  Art  of  Subsisting  Armies  in  War „ i8mo,  morocco,  i  sc 


*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives 8vo  4  oc 

*  Wheeler's  Siege  Operations  and  Military  Mining 8vo,  2  oo 

Winthrop's  Abridgment  of  Military  Law 12010,  2  50 

Woodhull's  Notes  on  Military  Hygiene i6mo,  i   50 

Young's  Simple  Elements  of  Navigation i6mo  morocco,  i  oo 

Second  Edition,  Enlarged  and  Revised i6mo,  morocco,  2  oo 

ASSAYING. 
Fletcher's  Practical  Instructions  in  Quantitative  Assaying  with  the  Blowpipe. 

i2mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Furman's  Manual  of  Practical  Assaying 8vo,  3  oo 

Miller's  Manual  of  Assaying I2mo,  i  oo 

O'Driscoll's  Notes  on  the  Treatment  of  Gold  Ores 8vo,  2  oo 

Ricketts  and  Miller's  Notes  on  Assaying 8vo,  3  oo 

Ulke's  Modern  Electrolytic  Copper  Refining 8vo,  3  oo 

Wilson's  Cyanide  Processes I2mo,  i  50 

Chlorination  Process i2mo,  i  50 

ASTRONOMY. 

Comstock's  Field  Astronomy  for  Engineers 8vo,  2  50 

Craig's  Azimuth 4to,  3  50 

Doolittle's  Treatise  on  Practical  Astronomy 8vo,  4  oo 

Gore's  Elements  of  Geodesy 8vo,  2  50 

Hayford's  Text-book  of  Geodetic  Astronomy 8vo,  3  oo 

Merriman's  Elements  of  Precise  Surveying  and  Geodesy 8vo,  2  50 

*  Michie  and  Harlow's  Practical  Astronomy 8vo,  3  oo 

*  White's  Elements  of  Theoretical  and  Descriptive  Astronomy izmo,  2  oo 

BOTANY. 

Davenport's  Statistical  Methods,  with  Special  Reference  to  Biological  Variation. 

i6mo,  morocco,  i  25 

Thom^  and  Bennett's  Structural  and  Physiological  Botany i6mo,  2  25 

Westermaier's  Compendium  of  General  Botany.     (Schneider.) 8vo,  2  oo 

CHEMISTRY. 

Jidriance's  Laboratory  Calculations  and  Specific  Gravity  Tables 12 mo,  i   25 

Allen's  Tables  for  Iron  Analysis 8vo,  3  oo 

Arnold's  Compendium  of  Chemistry.     (Mandel.) Small  8vo.  3  50 

Austen's  Notes  for  Chemical  Students I2mo,  i   50 

*  Austen  and  Langworthy.      The    Occurrence    of   Aluminium    in    Vegetable 

Products,  Animal  Products,  and  Natural  Waters.  .  8vo.  2  oo 

Bernadou's  Smokeless  Powder. — Nitro-cellulose,  and  Theory  of  the  Cellulose 

Molecule i2mo,  2  50 

Bolton's  Quantitative  Analysis 8vo,  I  50 

*  Browning's  Introduction  to  the  Rarer  Elements , .  8vo,  i  50 

Brush  and  Penfield's  Manual  of  Determinative  Mineralogy .8vo,  4  oo 

Classen's  Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis  by  Electrolysis.  (Boltwood.)  . . .  .8vo,  3  oo 

Cohn's  Indicators  and  Test-papers i2mo.  2  oo 

Tests  and  Reagents 8vo,  3  oo 

Copeland's  Manual  of  Bacteriology.     (In  preparation.) 

Craft's  Short  Course  in  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.  (Schaeffer.). .    .I2mo,  i  50 

Dolezalek's  Theory    of    the    Lead    Accumulator    (Storage    Battery).     (Von 

Ende) ...........    t2mo.  2  50 

Drechsel's  Chemical  Reactions.     (MerrilL ) , «    .    I2mo,  i   25 

Duhem's  Thermodynamics  and  Chemistry.     (.Burgess. ) 8vo,  4  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives. 8vo,  4  oo 

Bffront's  Enzymes  and  their  Applications.     (Prescott.) 8vo,  3  oo 

Brdmann's  Introduction  to  Chemical  Preparations.     (Dunlap.) I2mo,  x  25 

3 


Fletcher's  Practical  Instructions  in  Quantitative  Assaying  with  the  Blowpipe 

i2mo,  morocco,    i  50 

Fowler's  Sewage  Works  Analyses izmo,    2  oo 

Fresenius's  Manual  of  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.     (Wells.) 8vo,    5  oo 

Manual  of  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.     Parti.    Descriptive.     (Wells.) 

8vo,    3  oo 
System  of  Instruction  in    Quantitative   Chemical  Analysis.     (Cohn.) 

2  vols 8vo,  12  50 

Fuertes's  Water  and  Public  Health i2mo,    i  50 

Furman's  Manual  of  Practical  Assaying 8\  o,    3  oo 

*Getman's  Exercises  in  Physical  Chemistry i2mo,    2  oo 

GUI's  Gas  and  Fuel  Analysis  for  Engineers i2mo,    i   25 

Grotenfelt's  Principles  of  Modern  Dairy  Practice.     (Woll.) i2mo,    2  oo 

Hammarsten's  Text-book  of  Physiological  Chemistry.     (Mandel.) 8vo,    4  oo 

Helm's  Principles  of  Mathematical  Chemistry.     (Morgan.) i2mo,    i  50 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors) i6mo,  morocco,   2  50 

Hinds's  Inorganic  Chemistry 8vo,    3  oo 

*  Laboratory  Manual  for  Students i2mo,        75 

Holleman's  Text-book  of  Inorganic  Chemistry.     (Cooper.) 8vo,    2  50 

Text-book  of  Organic  Chemistry.     (Walker  and  Mott.) 8vo,    2  50 

*  Laboratory  Manual  of  Organic  Chemistry.     (Walker.) i2mo,    i  oo 

Hopkins's  Oil-chemists'  Handbook 8vo,    3  oo 

Jackson's  Directions  for  Laboratory  Work  in  Physiological  Chemistry.  .8vo,    i  25 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,    2  50 

Ladd's  Manual  of  Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis i2mo,    i  oo 

Landauer's  Spectrum  Analysis.     (Tingle.) 8vo,    3  oo 

Lassar-Cohn's  Practical  Urinary  Analysis.     (Lorenz.) i2mo,    i  oo 

Leach's  The  Inspection  and  Analysis  of  Food  with  Special  Reference  to  State 

Control.     (In  preparation.) 

Lob's  Electro  lysis  and  Electrosynthesis  of  Organic  Compounds.  (Lorenz.)  i2mo,    i  oo 
Mandel's  Handbook  for  Bio-chemical  Laboratory i2mo,    i  50 

*  Martin's  Laboratory  Guide  to  Qualitative  Analysis  with  the  Blowpipe . .  i2mo,       60 
Mason's  Water-supply.     (Considered  Principally  from  a  Sanitary  Standpoint.) 

3d  Edition,  Rewritten 8vo,    4  oo 

Examination  of  Water.     (Chemical  and  Bacteriological.) i2mo,    i  25 

Meyer's  Determination  of  Radicles  in  Carbon  Compounds.     (Tingle.).  .  i2mo,    i  oo 

Miller's  Manual  of  Assaying 12010,    i  oo 

Mixter's  Elementary  Text-book  of  Chemistry I2mo,    i  50 

Morgan's  Outline  of  Theory  of  Solution  and  its  Results i2mo,    i  oo 

Elements  of  Physical  Chemistry i2mo,    2  oo 

Morse's  Calculations  used  in  Cane-sugar  Factories i6mo,  morocco,    i  50 

Mulliken's  General  Method  for  the  Identification  of  Pure  Organic  Compounds. 

Vol.  I Large  8vo,    5  oo 

Nichols's  Water-supply.     (Considered  mainly  from  a  Chemical  and  Sanitary 

Standpoint,  1883.) 8vo,    2  50 

O'Brine's  Laboratory  Guide  in  Chemical  Analysis 8vo,    2  oo 

O'Driscoll's  Notes  on  the  Treatment  of  Gold  Ores 8vo,    2  oo 

Ost  and  Kolbeck's  Text-book  of  Chemical  Technology.     (Lorenz — Bozart.) 

(In  preparation.) 
Ostwald's  School  of  Chemistry.     Part  One.     (Ramsey.)     (In  press.) 

*  ieenfield's  Notes  on  Determinative  Mineralogy  and  Record  of  Mineral  Tests. 

8vo, paper,        50 

Pictet's  The  Alkaloids  and  their  Chemical  Constitution.     (Biddle.) 8vo,    5  oo 

Pinner's  Introduction  to  Organic  Chemistry.     (Austen.) i2mofc   i  50 

Poole's  Calorific  Power  of  Fuels 8vo,    3  oo 

Prescott  and  Winslow's  Elements  of  Water  Bacteriology,  with  Special  Refer- 
ence to  Sanitary  Water  Analysis i2mo,    i   25 

*  Reisig's  Guide  to  Piece-dyeing 8vo,  25  oo 

4 


Richards  and  Woodman's  Air  .Water,  and  Food  from  a  Sanitary  Standpoint.  8vo,  2  oo 

Richards's  Cost  of  Living  as  Modified  by  Sanitary  Science i2mo,  i  oo 

Cost  of  Food  a  Study  in  Dietaries izmo,  i  oo 

*  Richards  and  Williams's  The  Dietary  Computer Svo,  i  50 

Ricketts  and  Russell's  Skeleton  Notes  upon  Inorganic  Chemistry.     (Part  I. — 

Non-metallic  Elements.) . 8vo,  morocco,  7{J 

Ricketts  and  Miller's  Notes  on  Assaying ^ Svo,  3  oo 

Rideal's  Sewage  and  the  Bacterial  Purification  of  Sewage 8vo,  3  50 

Disinfection  and  the  Preservation  of  Food 8vo,  4  oo 

Ruddiman's  Incompatibilities  in  Prescriptions 8vo,  2  oo 

Sabin's  Industrial  and  Artistic  Technology  of  Paints  and  Varnish.     (In  press.) 

Snlkowski's  Physiological  and  Pathological  Chemistry.     (Orndorff.) 8vo.  2  50 

Schimpf's  Text-book  of  Volumetric  Analysis I2mo,  2  50 

Essentials  of  Volumetric  Analysis i2mo,  I  25 

Spencer's  Handbook  for  Chemists  of  Beet-sugar  Houses i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Handbook  for  Sugar  Manufacturers  and  their  Chemists. .  i6mo,  morocco,  2  oo 

Stockbridge's  Rocks  and  Soifs 8vo,  2  50 

*  Tillman's  Elementary  Lessons  in  Heat 8vo,  i  50 

*  Descriptive  General  Chemistry 8vo,  3  oo 

Treadwell's  Qualitative  Analysis.     (Hall.) 8vo,  3  oo 

Quantitative  Analysis.     (Hall.) 8vo,  4  oo 

Turneaure  and  Russell's  Public  Water-supplies 8vo,  5  oo 

Van  Deventer's  Physical  Chemistry  /or  Beginners.     (Boltwood.) X2mo,  i  50 

*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives , 8vo,  4  oo 

Wassermann's  Immune  Sera:  Hsemolysins,  Cytotoxins,  and  Precipitins.     (Bol- 

duan.) i2mo,  i  oo 

Wells's  Laboratory  Guide  in  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis 8vo,  I  50 

Short  Course  ir  Inorganic  Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis  for  Engineering 

Students I2mo,  i  50 

Whipple's  Microscopy  of  Drinking-water 8vo,  3  50 

Wiechmann's  Sugar  Analysis Small  8vo.  2  50 

Wilson's  Cyanide  Processes i2mo,  i  50 

Chlorination  Process , i2mo,  i  50 

Wulling's  Elementary  Course  in  Inorganic    harmaceutical  and  Medical  Chem- 
istry  i2mo,  2  oo 

CIVIL  ENGINEERING. 

BRIDGES  AND    ROOFS.       HYDRAULICS.      MATERIALS    OF    ENGINEERING 
RAILWAY   ENGINEERING. 

Baker's  Engineers'  Surveying  Instruments I2mo,  3  oo 

Bixby's  Graphical  Computing  Table Paper  19^X24!  inches.  25 

**  Burr's  Ancient  and  Modern  Engineering  and  the  Isthmian  Canal.     (Postage, 

27  cents  additional.) 8vo,  net  3  50 

Comstock's  Field  Astronomy  for  Engineers 8vo,  2  50 

Davis's  Elevation  and  Stadia  Tables 8vo,  i  oo 

Elliott's  Engineering  for  Land  Drainage izmo,  x  50 

Practical  Farm  Drainage i2mo,  x  oo 

Folwell's  Sewerage.     (Designing  and  Maintenance.) 8vo,  3  oo 

Freitag's  Architectural  Engineering.     2d  Edition,  Rewritten Svo,  3  50 

French  and  Ives's  Stereotomy Svo,  2  50 

Goodhue's  Municipal  Improvements 1 2 mo,  x  7S 

Goodrich's  Economic  Disposal  of  Towns'  Refuse Svo,  3  30 

Gore's  Elements  of  Geodesy Svo,  2  50 

Hayford's  Text-book  of  Geodetic  Astronomy Svo,  3  oo 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors) i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Howe's  Retaining  Walls  for  Earth i2mo,  i   25 

Johnson's  Theory  and  Practice  of  Surveying Small  Svo,  4  oo 

Statics  by  Algebraic  and  Graphic  Methods 8vo,  2  oo 

5 


Kiersted's  Sewage  Disposal i2mo,  i  25 

Laplace's  Philosophical  Essay  on  Probabilities.     (Truscott  and  Emory.)  i2mo,  2  oo 

Mahan's  Treatise  on  Civil  Engineering.     (1873.)     (Wood.) 8vo,  500 

*  Descriptive  Geometry 8vo,  i  50 

Merriman's  Elements  of  Precise  Surveying  and  Geodesy 8vo,  2  50 

Elements  of  Sanitary  Engineering 8vo,  2  oo 

Merriman  and  Brooks's  Handbook  for  Surveyors i6mo,  morocco,  2  oo 

Nugent's  Plane  Surveying . 6 8vo,  3  50 

Ogden's  Sewer  Design I2mo,  2  oo 

Patton's  Treatise  on  Civil  Engineering 8vo  half  leather,  7  50 

Reed's  Topographical  Drawing  and  Sketching 4to,  5  oo 

Rideal's  Sewage  and  the  Bacterial  Purification  of  Sewage 8vo,  3  50 

Siebert  and  Biggin's  Modern  Stone-cutting  and  Masonry 8vo,  i  50 

Smith's  Manual  of  Topographical  Drawing.     (McMillan.) 8vo,  2  50 

Sondericker's   Graphic   Statics,  wun  Applications   to   Trusses,  Beams,   and 

Arches 8vo,  2  oo 

*  Trantwine's  Civil  Engineer's  Pocket-book i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 

Wait's  Engineering  and  Architectural  Jurisprudence 8vo,  6  oo 

Sheep,  6  50 

Law  of  Operations  Preliminary  to  Construction  in  Engineering  and  Archi- 
tecture  8vo,  5  oo 

Sheep,  5  50 

Law  of  Contracts 8vo,  3  oo 

Warren's  Stereotomy — Problems  in  Stone-cutting 8vo,  2  50 

Webb's  Problems  in  the  Use  and  Adjustment  of  Engineering  Instruments. 

i6mo,  morocco,  i  25 

*  Wheeler's  Elementary  Course  of  Civil  Engineering 8vo,  4  oo 

Wilson's  Topographic  Surveying 8vo,  3  50 


BRIDGES  AND  ROOFS. 

Boiler's  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Construction  of  Iron  Highway  Bridges.  .8vo,  2  oo 

*         Thames  River  Bridge 4to,  paper,  5  oo 

Burr's  Course  on  the  Stresses  in  Bridges  and  Roof  Trusses,  Arched  Ribs,  and 

Suspension  Bridges , 8vo,  3  50 

Du  Bois's  Mechanics  of  Engineering.     Vol.  II Small  4to,  10  oo 

Foster's  Treatise  on  Wooden  Trestle  Bridges 4to,  5  oo 

Fowler's  Coffer-dam  Process  for  Piers 8vo,  2  50 

Greene's  Roof  Trusses 8vo,  i  25 

Bridge  Trusses 8vo,  2  50 

Arches  in  Wood,  Iron,  and  Stone 8vo,  2  50 

Howe's  Treatise  on  Arches 8vo,  4  oo 

Design  of  Simple  Roof-trusses  in  Wood  and  Steel 8vo,  2  oo 

Johnson,  Bryan,  and  Turneaure's  Theory  and  Practice  in  the  Designing  of 

Modern  Framed  Structures Small  4to,  10  oo 

Merriman  and  Jacoby's  Text-book  on  Roofs  and  Bridges: 

Part  I. — Stresses  in  Simple  Trusses 8vo,  2  50 

Part  IL— Graphic  Statics 8vo,  2  50 

Part  HI.— Bridge  Design.     4th  Edition,  Rewritten 8vo,  2  50 

Part  IV.— Higher  Structures 8vo,  2  50 

Morison's  Memphis  Bridge 4to,  10  oo 

Waddell's  De  Pontibus,  a  Pocket-book  for  Bridge  Engineers. . .  i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Specifications  for  Steel  Bridges i2tno,  i  25 

Wood's  Treatise  on  the  Theory  of  the  Construction  of  Bridges  and  Roofs.Svo,  2  oo 
Wright's  Designing  of  Draw-spans: 

Part  I.  —Plate-girder  Draws 8vo,  2  50 

Part  II. — Rive  ted- truss  and  Pin-connected  Long-span  Draws 8vo,  2  50 

Two  parts  in  one  volume 8vo,  3  50 


HYDRAULICS. 

Bazin's  Experiments  upon  the  Contraction  of  the  Liquid  Vein  Issuing  from  an 

Orifice.     (Trautwine.) 8vo,  2  oo 

Bovey's  Treatise  on  Hydraulics 8vo,  5  oo 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,  6  oo 

Diagrams  of  Mean  Velocity  of  Water  in  Open  Channels paper,  i  50 

Coffin's  Graphical  Solution  of  Hydraulic  Problems i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Flather's  Dynamometers,  and  the  Measurement  of  Power 12 mo,  3  oo 

FolwelTs  Water-supply  Engineering 8vo,  4  oo 

Frizell's  Water-power 8vo,  5  oo 

Fuertes's  Water  and  Public  Health lamo,  i  50 

Water-filtration  Works i2mo,  2  50 

Ganguillet  and  Kutter's  General  Formula  for  the  Uniform  Flow  of  Water  in 

Rivers  and  Other  Channels.     (Hering  and  Trautwine.) 8vo,  4  oo 

Hazen's  Filtration  of  Public  Water-supply .8vo,  3  oo 

Hazlehurst's  Towers  and  Tanks  for  Water- works 8vo,  2  50 

Herschel's  115  Experiments  on  the  Carrying  Capacity  of  Large,  Riveted,  Metal 

Conduits 8vo,  2  oo 

Mason's   Water-supply.     (Considered   Principally   from   a   Sanitary   Stand- 
point.)   3d  Edition,  Rewritten 8vo,  4  oo 

Merriman's  Treatise  on  Hydraulics,     gth  Edition,  Rewritten 8vo,  5  oo 

*  Michie's  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  4  oo 

Schuyler's  Reservoirs  for  Irrigation,  Water-power,  and  Domestic   Water- 
supply Large  8vo,  5  oo 

**  Thomas  and  Watt's  Improvement  of  Riyers.     (Post.,  44  c.  additional),  4to,  6  oo 

Turneaure  and  Russell's  Public  Water-supplies 8vo,  5  oo 

Wegmann's  Desien  and  Construction  of  Dams. . 4to,  5  oo 

Water-supply  of  the  City  of  New  York  from  1658  to'iSgs 4to,  10  oo 

Weisbach's  Hydraulics  and  Hydraulic  Motors.     (Du  Bois.) 8vo,  5  oo 

Wilson's  Manual  of  Irrigation  Engineering Small  8vo,  4  oo 

Wolff's  Windmill  as  a  Prime  Mover 8vo,  3  oo 

Wood's  Turbines 8vo,  2  50 

Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  3  oo 

MATERIALS  OF  ENGINEERING. 

Baker's  Treatise  on  Masonry  Construction 8vo,  5  oo 

Roads  and  Pavements 8vo,  5  oo 

Black's  United  States  Public  Works Oblong  4to,  5  oo 

Bovey's  Strength  of  Materials  and  Theory  of  Structures 8vo,  7  50 

Burr's  Elasticity  and  Resistance  of  the  Materials  of  Engineering.     6th  Edi- 
tion, Rewritten 8vo,  7  50 

Byrne's  Highway  Construction 8vo,  5  oo 

Inspection  of  the  Materials  and  Workmanship  Employed  in  Construction. 

i6mo,  3  oo 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,  6  oo 

Du  Bois's  Mechanics  of  Engineering.     VoL  I Small  4to,  7  50 

Johnson's  Materials  of  Construction Large  8vo,  6  oo 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  2  50 

Lanza's  Applied  Mechanics 8vo,  7  '50 

Martens's  Handbook  on  Testing  Materials.     (Henning.)     2  vols 8vo,  750 

Merrill's  Stones  for  Building  and  Decoration 8vo,  3  oo 

Merriman's  Text-book  on  the  Mechanics  of  Materials 8vo,  4  oo 

Strength  of  Materials i2mo,  i  oo 

Metcalf's  Steel.     A  Manual  for  Steel-users i2mo,  2  oo 

Patton's  Practical  Treatise  on  Foundations 8vo,  5  oo 

7 


Rockwell's  Roads  and  Pavements  in  France i2mo,  *  ar. 

Smith's  Materials  of  Machines i2mo,  i  oo 

Snow's  Principal  Species  of  Wood 8vo,  3  50 

Spalding's  Hydraulic  Cement i2mo,  2  oo 

Text-book  on  Roads  and  Pavements i2mo,  2  oo 

Thurston's  Materials  of  Engineering.     3  Parts 8vo,  8  oo 

art  I. — Non-metallic  Materials  of  Engineering  and  Metallurgy 8vo,  2  oo 

Part  n. — Iron  and  Steel 8vo,  3  50 

Part  III. — A  Treatise  on  Brasses,  Bronzes,  and  Other  Alloys  and  their 

Constituents 8vo,  2  50 

Thurston's  Text-book  of  the  Materials  of  Construction 8vo,  5  oo 

Tillson's  Street  Pavements  and  Paving  Materials 8vo,  4  oo 

Waddell's  De  Pontibus.     (A  Pocket-book  for  Bridge  Engineers.) . .  i6mo,  mor.,  3  oo 

Specifications  for  Steel  Bridges i2mo,  i  25 

Wood's  Treatise  on  the  Resistance  of  Materials,  and  an  Appendix  on  the  Pres- 
ervation of  Timber 8vo,  2  oo 

Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  3  oo 

Wood's  Rustless  Coatings:  Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and  Steel.  .  .8vo,  4  oo 

RAILWAY  ENGINEERING. 

Andrews's  Handbook  for  Street  Railway  Engineers.     3X5  inches,  morocco,  i  25 

Berg's  Buildings  and  Structures  of  American  Railroads 4to,  5  oo 

Brooks's  Handbook  of  Street  Railroad  Location i6mo.  morocco,  i  50 

Butts's  Civil  Engineer's  Field-book i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Crandall's  Transition  Curve i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Railway  and  Other  Earthwork  Tables 8vo,  i  50 

Dawson's  "Engineering"  and  Electric  Traction  Pocket-book.    i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 

Dredge's  History  of  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad:   (1879) Paper,  5  oo 

*  Drinker's  Tunneling,  Explosive  Compounds,  and  Rock  Drills,  4to,  half  mor.,    25  oo 

Fisher's  Table  of  Cubic  Yards Cardboard,  25 

Godwin's  Railroad  Engineers'  Field-book  and  Explorers'  Guide i6mo,  mor.,  2  50 

Howard's  Transition  Curve  Field-book i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Hudson's  Tables  for  Calculating  the  Cubic  Contents  of  Excavations  and  Em- 
bankments   8vo,  i  oo 

Molitor  and  Beard's  Manual  for  Resident  Engineers i6mo,  i  oo 

Nagle's  Field  Manual  for  Railroad  Engineers i6mo  morocco.  3  oo 

Philbrick's  Field  Manual  for  Engineers i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Searles's  Field  Engineering i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Railroad  Spiral. i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Taylor's  Prismoidal  Formulae  and  Earthwork 8vo,  i  50 

*  Trautwine's  Method  of  Calculating  the  Cubic  Contents  of  Excavations  and 

Embankments  by  the  Aid  of  Diagrams 8vo,  2  oo 

The  Field  Practice  of  {Laying    Out    Circular    Curves    for    Railroads. 

izrno,  morocco,  2  50 

Cross-section  Sheet Paper,  25 

Webb's  Railroad  Construction.     2d  Edition,  Rewritten i6mo.  morocco,  5  oo 

Wellington's  Economic  Theory  of  the  Location  of  Railways Small  8vo,  5  oo 

DRAWING. 

Barr's  Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  2  50 

*  Bartlett's  Mechanical  Drawing.  . . 8vo,  3  oc 

*  ••                '                "         Abridged  Ed 8vo,  150 

Coolidge's  Manual  of  Drawing 8vo,  paper,  i  oo 

Coolidge  and  Freeman's  Elements  of  General  Drafting  for  Mechanical  Engi- 
neers.    (In  press.') 

Durley's  Kinematics  of  Machines 8vo,  4  oo 

8 


Hill's  Text-book  on  Shades  and  Shadows,  and  Perspective 8vo,  2  oo 

Jamison's  Elements  of  Mechanical  Drawing.     (In  press.) 

Jones's  Machine  Design: 

Part  I. — Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  i  50 

Part  II. — Form,  Strength,  and  Proportions  of  Parts 8vo,  3  oo 

Mac  Cord's  Elements  of  Descriptive  Geometr>           8vo,  3  oo 

Kinematics;  or,  Practical  Mechanism , 8vo,  5  oo 

Mechanical  Drawing , . . .  > 4to,  4  oo 

Velocity  Diagrams 8vo,  i  50 

*  Mahan's  Descriptive  Geometry  and  Stone-cutting ,  , 8vo,  i  50 

Industrial  Drawing.    (Thompson.) 8vo,  3  50 

Reed's  Topographical  Drawing  and  Sketching 4to,  5  oo 

Reid's  Course  in  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  2  oo 

Text-book  of  Mechanical  Drawing  and  Elementary  Machine  Design . .  8vo,  3  oo 

Robinson's  Principles  of  Mechanism 8vo,  3  oo 

Smith's  Manual  of  Topographical  Drawing.     (McMillan.) 8vo,  50 

Warren's  Elements  of  Plane  and  Solid  Free-hand  Geometrical  Drawing.  .  i2mo,  oo 


Drafting  Instruments  and  Operations i2mo, 

Manual  of  Elementary  Projection  Drawing i2mo, 

Manual  of  Elementary  Problems  in  the  Linear  Perspective  of  Form  and 


Shadow i2nio,  oo 

Plane  Problems  in  Elementary  Geometry i2mo,  25 

Primary  Geometry I2mo,  75 

Elements  of  Descriptive  Geometry,  Shadows,  and  Perspective 8vo,  3  50 

General  Problems  of  Shades  and  Shadows 8vo.  3  oo 

Elements  of  Machine  Construction  and  Drawing 8vo,  7  50 

Problems.  Theorems,  and  Examples  in  Descriptive  Geometry 8vo,  2  50 

Weisbach's  Kinematics  and  the  Power  of  Transmission.       (Hermann  and 

Klein.)  8vo.  5  oo 

Whelpley's  Practical  Instruction  in  the  Art  of  Letter  Engraving i2mo,  2  oo 

Wilson's  Topographic  Surveying 8vo,  3  50 

Free-hand  Perspective , 8vo,  2  50 

Free-hand  Lettering 8vo,  i  oo 

Woolf's  Elementary  Course  in  Descriptive  Geometry Large  8vo,  3  oo 

'ELECTRICITY  AND   PHYSICS. 

Anthony  and  Brackett's  Text-book  of  Physics.    (Magie.) Small  8vo,  3  oo 

Anthony's  Lecture-notes  on  the  Theory  of  Electrical  Measurements I2mo,  i  oo 

Benjamin's  History  of  Electricity 8vo,  3  oo 

Voltaic  CelL 8vo,  3  oo 

Classen's  Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis  by  Electrolysis.    (Boltwood.).  .8vo,  3  oo 

Crehore  and  Squier's  Polarizing  Photo-chronograph 8vo,  3  oo 

Dawson's  "Engineering"  and  Electric  Traction  Pocket-book. .  i6mo,  morocco,  5  oo 
Dolezalek's    Theory  of    the    Lead    Accumulator    (Storage    Battery).     (Von 

Ende.) i2mo,**2  50 

Duhem's  Thermodynamics  and  Chemistry.     (Burgess.) 8vo,  4  oo 

Flather's  Dvnamometers,  and  the  Measurement  of  Power I2mo,  3  oo 

Gilbert's  De  Magnete.     (Mottelay.) 8vo,  2  50 

Hanchett's  Alternating  Currents  Explained I2mo,  i  oo 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors) i6mo,  morocco,  2  50 

Holman's  Precision  of  Measurements 8vo,  2  oo 

Telescopic  Mirror-scale  Method,  Adjustments,  and  Tests Large  8vo,  75 

Landauer's  Spectrum  Analysis.    (Tingle.) 8vo,  3  oo 

Le  Chatelier's  High-temperature  Measurements.  (Boudouard — Burgess. )i2mo,  3  oo 

Lob's  Electrolysis  and  Electrosynthesis  of  Organic  Compounds.  (Lorenz.)  i2mo.  i  oo 

*  Lyons's  Treatise  on  Electro  magnetic  Phenomena.     Vols.  I.  and  II.  8vo,  each,  6  oo 

*  Michie.    Elements  of  Wave  Motion  Relating  to  Sound  and  Light 8vo,  4  oo 

9 


Niaudet's  Elementary  Treatise  on  Electric  Batteries.     (Fishoack. ) jaino,  2  50 

•  Rosenberg's  Electrical  Engineering.    (Haldane  Gee — Kinzbrunner.). . .  .8vo,  50 

Ryan,  Norris,  and  Hoxie's  Electrical  Machinery.     VoL  1 8vo,  50 

Thurston's  Stationary  Steam-engines 8vo,  50 

*  Tillman's  Elementary  Lessons  in  Heat 8vo,  50 

Tory  and  Pitcher's  Manual  of  Laboratory  Physics Small  8vo,  oo 

Ulke's  Modern  Electrolytic  Copper  Refining 8vo,  3  oo 


LAW. 

*  Davis's  Elements  of  Law 8vo,  2  50 

*  Treatise  on  the  Military  Law  of  United  States 8vo,  7  oo 

Sheep,  7  50 

Manual  for  Courts-martial i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

Wait's  Engineering  and  Architectural  Jurisprudence 8vo,  6  oo 

Sheep,  6  50 

Law  of  Operations  Preliminary  to  Construction  in  Engineering  and  Archi- 
tecture      8vo,  5  oo 

Sheep,  5  50 

Law  of  Contracts 8vo,  3  oo 

Winthrop's  Abridgment  of  Military  Law I2mo,  2  50 

MANUFACTURES. 

Bernadou's  Smokeless  Powder — Kitro-cellulose  and  Theory  of  the  Cellulose 

Molecule i2mo,  2  50 

Boliand's  Iron  Founder i2mo,  2  50 

"  The  Iron  Founder,"  Supplement. . . . i2mo,  2  50 

Encyclopedia  of  Founding  and  Dictionary  of  Foundry  Terms  Used  in  the 

Practice  of  Moulding i2mo,  3  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives 8vo,  4  oo 

Eff rent's  Enzymes  and  their  Applications.     (Prescott.) 8vo,  3  oo 

Fitzgerald's  Boston  Machinist i8mo,  i  oo 

Ford's  Boiler  Making  for  Boiler  Makers i8mo,  i  oo 

Hopkins's  Oil-chemists'  Handbook 8vo,  3  oo 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  a  50 

Leach's  The  Inspection  and  Analysis  of  Food  with  Special  Reference  to  State 

Control.     (In  preparation.) 

Metcalf's  Steel.     A  Manual  for  Steel-users i2mo,  2  oo 

Metcalfe's  Cost  of  Manufactures — And  the  Administration    of  Workshops, 

Public  and  Private 8vo,  5  oo 

Meyer's  Modern  Locomotive  Construction 4to,  10  oo 

Morse's  Calculations  used  in  Cane-sugar  Factories i6mo,  morocco,  i  50 

*  Reisig's  Guide  to  Piece-dyeing 8vo,  25  oo 

Smith's  Press-working  of  Metals 8vo,  3  oo 

Spalding's  Hydraulic  Cement i2mof  2  oo 

Spencer's  Handbook  for  Chemists  of  Beet-sugar  Houses i6mo,  morocco,  3  oo 

Handbook  tor  sugar  Manuiacmrers  ana  their  Chemists.. .  i6mo,  morocco,  2  oo 
Thurston's  Manual  of  Steam-boilers,  their  Designs,  Construction  and  Opera- 
tion  8vo,  5  oo 

*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives 8vo,  4  oo 

West's  American  Foundry  Practice i2mo,  2  50 

Moulder's  Text-book i2mo,  2  50 

Wiechmann's  Sugar  Analysis Small  8vo,  2  50 

Wolff's  Windmill  as  a  Prime  Mover 8vo,  3  oo 

Woodbury's  Fire  Protection  of  Mills 8vo,  2  50 

Wood's  Rustless  Coatings:   Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and  Steel.  .  .8vo,  4  oo 

10 


MATHEMATICS. 

Baker's  Elliptic  Functions 8vo,    i  50 

*  Bass's  Elements  of  Differential  Calculus I2mo,   4  oo 

Briggs's  Elements  of  Plane  Analytic  Geometry i2mo, 

Compton's  Manual  of  Logarithmic  Computations i2mo, 

Daris's  Introduction  to  the  Logic  of  Algebra 8vo, 

*  Dickson's  College  Algebra  Large  i2mo, 


*  Answers  to  Dickson's  College  Algebra 8vo,  paper, 

*  Introduction  to  the  Theory  of  Algebraic  Equations   Large  I2mo, 

Ualsted's  Elements  of  Geometry 8vo, 

Elementary  Synthetic  Geometry 8vo, 


oo 
50 
So 
50 

25 
25 
75 
50 
Rational  Geometry i2mo,  75 

*  Johnson's  Three-place  Logarithmic  Tables:    Vest-pocket  size paper,        15 

100  copies  for    5  oo 

*  Mounted  on  heavy  cardboard,  8  X 10  inches,        25 

10  copies  for    2  oo 

Elementary  Treatise  on  the  Integral  Calculus Small  8vo,    i  50 

Curve  Tracing  in  Cartesian  Co-ordinates _  .  I2mo,    i  oo 

Treatise  on  Ordinary  and  Partial  Differential  Equations Small  8vo,    3  50 

Theory  of  Errors  and  the  Method  of  Least  Squares i2mo,    i  50 

*  Theoretical  Mechanics . .  I2mo,    3  oo 

Laplace's  Philosophical  Essay  on  Probabilities.     (Truscott  and  Emory.)  i2mo,    2  oo 

*  Ludlow  and  Bass.    Elements  of  Trigonometry  and  Logarithmic  and  Other 

Tables 8vo,    3  oo 

Trigonometry  and  Tables  published  separately Each,    2  oo 

*  Ludlow's  Logarithmic  and  Trigonometric  Tables 8vo,     i  oo 

Maurer's  Technical  Mechanics 8vo,     4  oo 

Merriman  and  Woodward's  Higher  Mathematics 8vo,    5  oo 

Merriman's  Method  of  Least  Squares 8vo,    2  oo 

Rice  and  Johnson's  Elementary  Treatise  on  the  Differential  Calculus .  Sm.,  8vo,    3  oo 

Differential  and  Integral  Calculus.     2  vols.  in  one Small  8vo,    2  50 

Sabin's  Industrial  and  Artistic  Technology  of  Paints  and  Varnish.     (In  press.) 
Wood's  Elements  of  Co-ordinate  Geometry 8vo,    2  oo 

Trigonometry:  Analytical,  Plane,  and  Spherical i2mo,    i  oo 

MECHANICAL   ENGmEERING. 
MATERIALS  OF  ENGINEERING,  STEAM-ENGINES  AND  BOILERS. 

Baldwin's  Steam  Heating  for  Buildings I2mo,    2  50 

Barr's  Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,    2  50 

*  Bartlett's  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,    3  oo 

*  "  "  "        Abridged  Ed 8vo.    i  50 

Benjamin's  Wrinkles  and  Recipes *2mo,    2  oo 

Carpenter's  Experimental  Engineering 8vo,    6  oo 

Heating  and  Ventilating  Buildings 8vo,  4  oo 

Gary's  Smoke  Suppression  in  Plants  using  Bituminous  CoaL      (In  prep- 
aration.) 

Clerk's  Gas  and  Oil  Engine Small  8vo,  4  oo 

Coolidge's  Manual  of  Drawing 8vo,    paper,  i  oo 

Coolidge  and  Freeman's  Elements  of  General  Drafting  for  Mechanical  En- 
gineers.    (In  press.) 

Cromwell's  Treatise  on  Toothed  Gearing i2mo,  i  50 

Treatise  on  Belts  and  Pulleys i2mo,  i  50 

Durley's  Kinematics  of  Machines 8vo,  4  oo 

Flather's  Dynamometers  and  the  Measurement  of  Power i2mo,  3  oo 

Rope  Driving , i2mo,  2  oo 

11 


Gill's  Gas  and  Fuel  Analysis  for  Engineers v , , i2mo,    i  25 

Hall's  Car  Lubrication i2mo,    i  oo 

Bering's  Ready  Reference  Tables  (Conversion  Factors) i6mo,  morocco,    2  50 

Button's  The  Gas  Engine 8vo,    5  oo 

Jones's  Machine  Design: 

Part  I. — Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo, 

Part  II. — Form,  Strength,  and  Proportions  of  Parts 8vo, 

Kent's  Mechanical  Engineer's  Pocket-book i6mo,    morocco, 

Kerr's  Power  and  Power  Transmission 8vo, 

MacCord's  Kinematics;  or,  Practical  Mechanism 8vo, 

Mechanical  Drawing 4to, 

Velocity  Diagrams 8vo, 

Mahan's  Industrial  Drawing.    (Thompson.) 8vo, 

Poole's  Calorific  Power  of  Fuels 8vo, 

Reid's  Course  in  Mechanical  Drawing „ 8vo. 

Text-book  of  Mechanical  Drawing  and  Elementary  Machine  Design.  .8vo, 

Richards's  Compressed  Air I2mo, 

Robinson's  Principles  of  Mechanism 8vo, 

Smith's  Press-working  of  Metals 8vo, 

Thurston's  Treatise  on   Friction  and    Lost  Work  in   Machinery  and  Mill 

Work 8vo, 

Animal  as  a  Machine  and  Prime  Motor,  and  the  Laws  of  Energetics .  izmo, 

Warren's  Elements  of  Machine  Construction  and  Drawing Svo, 

Weisbach's  Kinematics  and  the  Power  of  Transmission.      Herrmann — 

Klein.) 8vo, 

Machinery  of  Transmission  and  Governors.     (Herrmann — Klein.).  .8vo, 

HydrauLcs  and  Hydraulic  Motors.     (Du  Bois.) 8vo, 

Wolff's  Windmill  as  a  Prime  Mover 8vo, 

Wood's  Turbines i 8vo, 

MATERIALS  OF  ENGINEERING. 

Bovey's  Strength  of  Materials  and  Theory  of  Structures 8vo,    7  50 

Burr's  Elasticity  and  Resistance  of  the  Materials  of  Engineering.     6th  Edition, 

Reset Svo,    7  50 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,    6  oo 

Johnson'?  Materials  of  Construction Large  8vo,    6  oo 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,    2  50 

Lanza's  Applied  Mechanics 8vo,    7  50 

Martens's  Handbook  on  Testing  Materials.     (Henning.) 8vo,    7  50 

Merriman's  Text-book  on  the  Mechanic*  of  Materials 8vo,    4  oo 

Strength  of  Materials i2mo, 

Metcalf's  Steel.     A  Manual  for  Steel-users i2mo. 

Smith's  Materials  of  Machines i2mo 

Ihurston's  Materials  of  Engineering 3  vols. ,  Svo, 

Part   H.— Iron  and  Steel Svo, 

Part  HI. — A  Treatise  on  Brasses,  Bronzes,  and  Other  Alloys  and  their 

Constituents Svo     2  50 

Text-book  of  the  Materials  of  Construction Svo,    5  oo 

Wood's  Treatise  on  the  Resistance  of  Materials  and  an  Appendix  on  the 

Preservation  of  Timber 8vo,    2  oo 

Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics Svo,    3  oo 

Wood's  Rustless  Coatings:  Corrosion  and  Electrolysis  of  Iron  and  Steel. .  .Svo,    4  oo 

STEAM-ENGINES  AND   BOILERS. 

Carnot's  Reflections  on  the  Motive  Power  of  Heat.     (Thurston.) i2mo,  t  50 

Dawson's  "Engineering"  and  Electric  Traction  Pocket-book.  .i6mo,  mor.,  5  co 

Ford's  Boiler  Making  for  Boiler  Makers i8mo,  i  oo 

12 


Goss's  Locomotive  Sparks 8vo,  2  oo 

Hemenway's  Indicator  Practice  and  Steam-engine  Economy 12 mo,  a  oo 

Button's  Mechanical  Engineering  of  Power  Plants 8vo,  5  oo 

Heat  and  Heat-engines 8vo,  5  oo 

Kent's  Steam-boiler  Economy 8vo,  oo 

Kneass's  Practice  and  Theory  of  the  Injector 8vo  50 

MacCord's  Slide-valves 8vo,  oo 

Meyer's  Modern  Locomotive  Construction 4to.  10  oo 

Peabody's  Manual  of  the  Steam-engine  Indicator i2mo,  50 

Tables  of  the  Properties  of  Saturated  Steam  and  Other  Vapors 8vo,  oo 

Thermodynamics  of  the  Steam-engine  and  Other  Heat-engines 8vo,  5  oo 

Valve-gears  for  Steam-engines 8vo,  2  50 

Peabody  and  Miller's  Steam-boilers 8vo,  4  oo 

Pray'a  Twenty  Years  with  the  Indicator. Large  8vo,  2  50 

Pupln's  Thermodynamics  of  Reversible  Cycles  in  Gases  and  Saturated  Vapors. 

(Osterberg.) i2mo.  i  25 

Reagan's  Locomotives :  Simple,  Compound,  and  Electric i2mo,  2  50 

Rontgen's  Principles  of  Thermodynamics.     (Du  Bois.) 8vo,  5  oo 

Sinclair's  Locomotive  Engine  Running  and  Management i2mof  2  oo 

Smart's  Handbook  of  Engineering  Laboratory  Practice i2mo,  2  50 

Snow's  Steam-boiler  Practice * 8vo,  3  oo 

Spangler's  Valve-gears 8vo,  2  50 

Notes  on  Thermodynamics I2mo,  i  oo 

Spangler,  Greene,  and  Marshall's  Elements  of  Steam-engineering 8vo,  3  oo 

Thurston's  Handy  Tables 8vo,  i   50 

Manual  of  the  Steam-engine 2  vols.,  8vo,  10  oo 

Part  I. — History,  Structuce,  and  Theory 8vo,  6  oo 

Part  II. — Design,  Construction,  and  Operation 8vo,  6  oo 

Handbook  of  Engine  and  Boiler  Trials,  and  the  Use  of  the  Indicator  and 

the  Prony  Brake 8vo  5  oo 

Stationary  Steam-engines 8vo,  2  50 

Steam-boiler  Explosions  in  Theory  and  in  Practice i2mo  i  50 

Manual  of  Steam-boilers ,  Their  Designs,  Construction,  and  Operation .  8vo,  5  oo 

Weisbach's  Heat,  Steam,  and  Steam-engines.     (Du  Bois.) 8vo,  5  oo 

Whitham's  Steam-engine  Design 8vo,  5  oo 

Wilson's  Treatise  on  Steam-boilers.     (Flather.) i6mo,  2  50 

Wood's  Thermodynamics  Heat  Motors,  and  Refrigerating  Machines. . .  .8vo,  4  oo 


MECHANICS    AND  MACHINERY. 


Barr's  Kinematics  of  Machinery • 8vo,  2  50 

Bovey's  Strength  of  Materials  and  Theory  of  Structures 8vo,  7  50 

Chase's  The  Art  of  Pattern-making I2mo,  2  50 

Chordal. — Extracts  from  Letters I2mo,  2  oo 

Church's  Mechanics  of  Engineering 8vo,  6  oo 

Notes  and  Examples  in  Mechanics 8vo,  oo 

Compton's  First  Lessons  in  Metal-working ' 1 12mo,  50 

Compton  and  De  Groodt's  The  Speed  Lathe I2mo,  50 

Cromwell's  Treatise  on  Toothed  Gearing I2mo,  50 

Treatise  on  Belts  and  Pulleys i2mo,  50 

Dana's  Text-book  of  Elementary  Mechanics  for  the  Use  of  Colleges  and 

Schools I2mo,  i  50 

Dingey's  Machinery  Pattern  Making i2mo,  2  oo 

Dredge's  Record  of  the   Transportation  Exhibits  Building  of  the   World's 

Columbian  Exposition  of  180,3 4to,  half  morocco,  5  oo 

13 


Du  Bo  s's  Elementary  Principles  of  Mechanics: 

Vol.     I.— Kinematics 8vo,  3  50 

Vol     II. — Statics 8vo,  4  oo 

Vol.  III. — Kinetics 8vo,  3  50 

Mechanics  of  Engineering.     Vol.   I Small  4to,  7  50 

VoL  II Small  4to,  10  oo 

Durley's  Kinematics  of  Machines   8vo,  4  oo 

Fitzgerald's  Boston  Machinist i6mo,  i  oo 

Flather's  Dynamometers,  and  the  Measurement  of  Power i2mo,  3  oo 

Rope  Driving I2mo, 

Goss's  Locomotive  Sparks 8vo 

Hail's  Car  Lubrication I2mo, 

Holly's  Art  of  Saw  Filing i8mo, 

*  Johnson's  Theoretical  Mechanics I2mo, 

Statics  by  Graphic  and  Algebraic  Methods 8vo, 

Jones's  Machine  Design: 

Part  I. — Kinematics  of  Machinery 8vo,  i  50 

Part  n. — Form,  Strength,  and  Proportions  of  Parts 8vo,  3  oo 

KBIT'S  Power  and  Power  Transmission 8vo,  2  oo 

Lanza's  Applied  Mechanics 8vo,  7  50 

MacCord's  Kinematics;  or,  Practical  Mechanism 8vo,  5  oo 

Velocity  Diagrams  8vo,  i  50 

Maurer's  Technical  Mechanics 8vo,  4  oo 

Merriman's  Text- book  on  the  Mechanics  of  Materials 8?o,  4  oo 

*  Michie's  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo,  4  oo 

Reagan's  Locomotives:  Simple,  Compound,  and  Electric I2mo,  2  50 

Reid's  Course  in  Mechanical  Drawing 8vo,  2  oo 

Text-book  of  Mechanical  Drawing  and  Elementary  Machine  Design.  .8vo,  3  oo 

Richards's  Compressed  Air izmo,  x  50 

Robinson's  Principles  of  Mechanism 8vo,  3  oo 

Ryan,  Nonris,  and  Hoxie's  Electrical  Machinery.     Vol.  1 8vo,  2  50 

Sinclair's  Locomotive-engine  Running  and  Management I2mo,  2  oo 

Smith's  Press-working  of  Metals 8vo,  3  oo 

Materials  of  Machines i2mo,  x  oo 

Spangler,  Greene,  and  Marshall's  Elements  of  Steam-engineering 8vo,  3  oo 

Thurston's  Treatise  on  Friction  and  Lost  Work  in  Machinery  and  Mill 

Work 8vo,  3  oo 

Animal  as  a  Machine  and  Prime  Motor,  and  the  Laws  of  Energetics,  izmo,  i  oo 

Warren's  Elements  of  Machine  Construction  and  Drawing 8vo,  7  50 

Weisbach's    Kinematics    and    the  Power  of    Transmission.     (Herrmann — 
Klein.) 8vo, 

Machinery  of  Transmission  and  Governors.     (Herrmann — Klein.). 8vo, 
Wood's  Elements  of  Analytical  Mechanics 8vo, 

Principles  of  Elementary  Mechanics i2mo, 

Turbines « 8vo, 

The  World's  Columbian  Exposition  of  1893 4to, 

METALLURGY. 

Egleston's  Metallurgy  of  Silver,  Gold,  and  Mercury: 

VoL   I.— Silver 8vo,  7  5<> 

VoL   II.— Gold  and  Mercury 8vo,  7  So 

**  Iles's  Lead-smelting.     (Postage  9  cents  additional.) I2mo,  2  50 

Keep's  Cast  Iron 8vo,  2  50 

Kunhardt's  Practice  of  Ore  Dressing  in  Europe 8vo,  i  50 

Le  Chatelier's  High-temperature  Measurements.  (Boudouard — Burgess.) .  i2tno,  3  oo 

Metcalf's  SteeL     A  Manual  for  Steel-users i2mo,  2  oo 

Smith's  Materials  of  Machines I2mof  i  oo 

14 


Thurston's  Materials  of  Engineering.     In  Three  Parts 8vo,  8  oo 

Part  II. — Iron  and  Steel 8vo,  3  So 

Part  III. — A  Treatise  on  Brasses,  Bronzes,  and  Other  Alloys  and  their 

Constituents 8vo,  2  50 

Hike's  Modern  Electrolytic  Copper  Refining 8vo,  3  oo 

MINERALOGY. 

Barringer's  Description  of  Minerals  of  Commercial  Value.     Oblong,  morocco,  2  50 

Boyd's  Resources  of  Southwest  Virginia 8vo,  3  oo 

Map  of  Southwest  Virginia Pocket-book  form,  2  oo 

Brush's  Manual  of  Determinative  Mineralogy.     (Penfield.) 8vo,  4  oo 

Chester's  Catalogue  of  Minerals 8vo,  paper,  i  oo 

Cloth,  i  25 

Dictionary  of  the  Names  of  Minerals «• 8vo,  3  50 

Dana's  System  of  Mineralogy Large  8vo,  half  leather,  12  50 

First  Appendix  to  Dana's  New  "System  of  Mineralogy." Large  8vo,  i  oo 

Text-book  of  Mineralogy 8vo,  4  oo 

Minerals  and  How  to  Study  Them. . .  s i2mo,  i  50 

Catalogue  of  American  Localities  of  Minerals Large  8vo,  i  oo 

Manual  of  Mineralogy  and  Petrography i2mo,  2  oo 

Eakle's  Mineral  Tables 8vo,  i  25 

Egleston's  Catalogue  of  Minerals  and  Synonyms 8vo,  2  50 

Hussak's  The  Determination  of  Rock-forming  Minerals.     (Smith.)  Small  8vo,  2  oo 

Merrill's  Non-metallic  Minerals:  Their  Occurrence  and  Uses 8vo,  4  oo 

*  Penfield's  Notes  on  Determinative  Mineralogy  and  Record  of  Mineral  Tests. 

8vo,  paper,  o  50 
Rosenbusch's  Microscopical  Physiography   of  the   Rock-making   Minerals. 

(Iddings.) 8vo,  5  oo 

*  Tillman's  Text-book  of  Important  Minerals  and  Docks 8vo,  2  oo 

Williams's  Manual  of  Lithology 8vo,  3  oo 

MINING. 

Beard's  Ventilation  of  Mines I2mo,  2  50 

Boyd's  Resources  of  Southwest  Virginia 8vo,  3  oo 

Map  of  Southwest  Virginia Pocket-book  form,  2  oo 

»  Drinker's  Tunneling,  Explosive  Compounds,  and  Rock  Drills. 

4to,  half  morocco,  25  oo 

Eissler's  Modern  High  Explosives 8vo,  4  oo 

Fowler's  Sewage  Works  Analyses i2mo,  2  oo 

Goodyear 's  Coal-mines  of  the  Western  Coast  of  the  United  States 12 mo,  2  50 

Ihlseng's  Manual  of  Mining 8vo,  4  oo 

**  Iles's  Lead-smelting.     (Postage  gc.  additionaL) I2mo,  50 

Kunhardt's  Practice  of  Ore  Dressing  in  Europe 8vo,  50 

O'DriscolTs  Notes  on  the  Treatment  of  Gold  Ores 8vo,  oo 

*  Walke's  Lectures  on  Explosives 8vo,  oo 

Wilson's  Cyanide  Processes I2mo,  50 

Chlorination  Process X2mo,  50 

Hydraulic  and  Placer  Mining Z2mo,  oo 

Treatise  on  Practical  and  Theoretical  Mine  Ventilation I2mo  25 

SANITARY  SCIENCE. 

Copeland's  Manual  of  Bacteriology.     (In  preparation.) 

Folwell's  Sewerage.     (Designing,  Construction  and  Maintenance, ) 8vo,  3  oo 

Water-supply  Engineering 8vo,  4  oo 

Fuertes's  Water  and  Public  Health jarno,  i  50 

Water-filtration  Works xamo,  2  50 

15 


Gerhard's  Guide  to  Sanitary  House-inspection  ......................  i6mo,    i  oo 

Goodrich's  Economical  Disposal  of  Town's  Refuse  ..............  Demy  8vo,    3  50 

Hazen's  Filtration  of  Public  Water-supplies  ..........................  8vo,    3  oo 

Kiersted's  Sewage  Disposal  .....................................  i2mo,    i  25 

Leach's  The  Inspection  and  Analysis  of  Food  with  Special  Reference  to  State 

Control.     (In  preparation.) 
Mason's   Water-supply.     (Considered   Principally   from   a   Sanitary   Stand- 

point.)   3d  Edition,  Rewritten  ............................  8vo,    4  oo 

Examination  of  Water.     (Chemical  and  Bacteriological.)  ........  i2mo,    i  25 

Merriman's  Elements  of  Sanitary  Engineering     ......  ................  8vo,    2  oo 

Nichols's  Water-supply.     (Considered  Mainly  from  a  Chemical  and  Sanitary 

Standpoint)     (1883.)  ....................................  8vo,    2  50 

Ogden's  Sewer  Design  ...........................................  i2mo,    2  oo 

Prescott  and  Winslow's  Elements  of  Water  Bacteriology  .with  Special  Reference 

to  Sanitary  Water  Analysis.  .    ...........................  I2mo5 

*  Price's  Handbook  on  Sanitation  ................................  i2mo, 

Richards'.  Cost  of  Food.    A  Study  in  Dietaries  .....................  i2mo, 

Cost  of  Living  au  Modified  by  Sanitary  Science  ..................  i2mo, 

Richards  and  Woodman's  Air,  Water,  and  Food  from  a  Sanitary  Stand- 
point ...................................................  8vo, 

*  Richards  and  Williams's  The  Dietary  Computer  .....................  8vo, 

Rideal's  Sewage  and  Bacterial  Purification  of  Sewage  ..................  8vo, 

Turneaure  and  Russell's  Public  Water-supplies  .......................  8vo, 

Whipple's  Microscopy  of  Drinking-water  ............................  8vo, 

Woodhull's  Notes  and  Military  Hygiene  ...........................  i6mo, 


MISCELLANEOUS. 

Barker's  Deep-sea  Soundings  .....................................  8vo,    2 

Emmons's  Geological  Guide-book  of  the  Rocky  Mountain  Excursion  of  the 
International  Congress  of  Geologists  ..........  ,  ......  Large  8vc 

Ferrel's  Popular  Treatise  on  the  Winds  ..............................  8vo 

Haines's  American  Railway  Management  ..........................  12010, 

Mott's  Composition,  Digestibility  .  and  Nutritive  Value  of  Food.   Mounted  chart. 
Fallacy  of  the  Present  Theory  of  Sound  .....................  .  .  i6mo 

Ricketts's  History  of  Rensselaer  Polytechnic  Institute,  1824-1894.  Small  8vo, 
Rotherham's  Emphasized  New  Testament  .....................  Large  8vo, 

Steel's  Treatise  on  the  Diseases  of  the  Dog  ...........................  8vo, 

Totten's  Important  Question  in  Metrology  ...........................  8vo     2 

The  World's  Columbian  Exposition  ot  1893  ...........................  4to,    i 

Worcester  and  Atkinson.  Small  Hospitals,  Establishment  and  Maintenance, 
and  Suggestions  for  Hospital  Architecture,  with  Plans  for  a  Small 
Hospital  ...............................................  I2mo,  r 

HEBREW  AND  CHALDEE   TEXT-BOOKS. 

Green's  Grammar  of  the  Hebrew  Language  ..........................  8vo,  3 

Elementary  Hebrew  Grammar  ................................  i2mo,  i 

Hebrew  Chrestomathy  ........................................  8vo,  2 

Gesenius's  Hebrew  and  Chaldee  Lexicon  to  the  Old  Testament  Scriptures. 

(Tregelles.)  ...........................  Small  4to,  half  morocco,  5 

Lett*  ris't  Hebrew  Bible  ............................................  »v°.  2 

16 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 

-*3  UD 


DEC    4 


p\. •' 


. 


*r»r 


6£  -2-  PIT 


25N»v'64M 


-L6097